Flamenco Technical Manual Revision 6.0 - Tunstall.de

The manual was prepared with due care, and all details were checked for their 

correctness. However, we cannot assume any responsibility form possible 

discrepancies or incomplete information. 

All rights to this documentation are reserved, in particular copyright and distribution 

rights. No part of this documentation may be reproduced in any form or processed, 

copied or distributed using electronic systems without the prior written consent by 

Tunstall GmbH. 

We reserve the right for implementing technical changes. 

Tunstall GmbH

Table of Contents 

1. Safety ................................... 3 

1.1 About this chapter ................................ 3 

1.2 Organisational measures .......................... 3 

1.3 Symbols used in this manual ...................... 4 

1.4 Intended use .................................... 4 

1.5 General safety rules .............................. 5 

1.6 Technical standards .............................. 6 

2. Necessary previous knowledge ............ 7 

2.1 System overview ................................. 7 

2.2 System structure ................................. 8 

2.3 Speech communication ........................... 9 

2.4 Wards and groups ................................ 10 

2.5 Cables / Wiring .................................. 11 

2.6 System limits .................................... 11 

2.7 Configuration / SystemOrganizer ................... 12 

3. Room types ............................. 13 

3.1 Patient / resident room ............................ 14 

3.2 Function room ................................... 25 

3.3 Ward bathroom .................................. 26 

3.4 Nurse station .................................... 28 

3.5 Corridor ........................................ 33 

4. Installation examples ..................... 35 

5. Installation work sequence ................ 41 

6. Defining the mounting positions ........... 43 

7. Installing the back boxes ................. 49 

8. Laying the cables ........................ 51 

8.1 Cable legend .................................... 51 

8.2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) ................ 52 

8.3 Electric power supply cables (Ip) ................... 53 

8.4 Current demand ................................. 54 

8.5 Group bus OSYnet ............................... 56 

8.6 Room bus RAN .................................. 59 

9. Activating the power supply ............... 61 

9.1 Installing the power supply unit ..................... 61 

9.2 Check the current supply .......................... 61 

Flamenco - Technical Manual, 04/13 (Rev. 6.0), 00 8812 60 

1

10. Configure the OSY-ControlCenter ......... 63 

11. Voltage surge protection .................. 65 

11.1 SPD modules .................................... 66 

12. Functional checks ........................ 69 

12.1 Checking the room installation ..................... 70 

12.2 Checking the ward functions ....................... 74 

12.3 Checking the consoles ............................ 76 

12.4 Checking functions between wards ................. 76 

13. Spare parts .............................. 77 

14. Product leaflets .......................... 83 

14.1 Display equipment ............................... 87 

14.2 Switches ........................................ 99 

14.3 Room terminals .................................. 107 

14.4 Connection sockets .............................. 123 

14.5 Consoles ....................................... 137 

14.6 Interfaces in the room ............................ 145 

14.7 Interfaces in the group ............................ 157 

14.8 Accessories ..................................... 169 

14.9 System devices .................................. 173 

14.10 Power supply .................................... 181 

14.11 Installation ...................................... 201 

2 

Flamenco - Technical Manual, 04/13 (Rev. 6.0), 00 8812 60

1. Safety 

You are strongly advised to carefully study this chapter before starting to work 

at the nurse call system. 

1.1 About this chapter 

The Flamenco products have been designed and produced according to the 

latest state-of-the-art. Nevertheless, potentially dangerous situations may occur 

during installation, modification or de-installation of the system or of its components 

if the executing persons on-site act in a non-professional manner, or 

if pertinent safety instructions are ignored. Non-compliance with general and 

special safety instructions may jeopardise the life and well-being of installation 

personnel or third persons, and such misbehaviour may lead to damage to system 

components and other equipment. 

Information in this chapter is of general nature. Special and more detailed 

safety instructions are presented in the various chapters when safety-hazardous 

work details or processes are described 

1.2 Organisational measures 

Electrical systems shall be installed, modified, serviced and maintained by authorised 

specialists of the trade only. Among others, these are personnel from 

the local electric power companies and electricians who are listed on their 

roster. The registered electrician shall contact the power company to formally 

request the commissioning of any new electric installation. As such, electric installation 

personnel shall be responsible for the safety and correct function of 

the relevant electric systems. 

Commercial users of electric installations shall arrange for regular servicing 

and maintenance of the respective electric equipment. Users and operators 

shall observe the legal aspects as final responsibility rests with themselves. 

Any work at the electric system and installation must be executed by trained 

and authorised specialists of the trade. 

The technical manual addresses the specialists of the electric trade. 

Before starting any installation work, carefully study this manual - with particular 

attention to the chapter on “Safety”. Later on, i.e. while working at the system, 

it will be too late! 

Keep this manual and any further documents which you may need readily available 

during the installation work and whenever effecting any service or maintenance 

work at the system. 


3

1. Safety 

Comply with all generally applicable laws as well as special rules and directives 

for accident prevention and environmental protection. 

All parts and any equipment used for the installation shall comply with the 

technical demands and criteria set forth by Tunstall GmbH. This is always ensured 

when using original parts. 

1.3 Symbols used in this manual 

When studying this manual, you will come across a number of symbols which 

direct your attention to specific issues: 

WARNING ! This symbol refers to actions which may incur personal injuries 

(Danger to life or well-being). 

WARNING ! This symbols refers to actions which could endanger persons 

through electrical voltage or electrical current. 

Components sensitive to electrostatics ! This symbol indicates components 

which are sensitive to electrostatics. Avoid any contact with these components 

as this may induce damage to such component. 

CAUTION ! This symbol refers to actions which may incur damage to the system 

or components due to electrical voltage or electrical current. 

NOTE ! Here you will find supplementary and otherwise useful information. 

In the text passages you will come across symbols which always have 

the same meaning: 

A square before the text means: “This is part of a listing.“. 

An filled-in circle in front of a text means: “This is what you have to do.” 

An open circle in front of a text means: “This is the result of an action.” 

1.4 Intended use 

All Flamenco products are designed for use in the nurse call system, and here 

again, only in the manner as described in this technical manual. Any other application 

of use shall be considered as not authorised, and Tunstall GmbH will 

not accept any liability for damage resulting from any non-compliance with this 

rule. 

4 


1. Safety 

1.5 General safety rules 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Closely observe all safety instructions from this manual, pertinent national 

rules and directives for accident prevention as well as the owner's / user's 

internal rules and procedures for safety at work and while handling or operating 

the system. 

Avoid any safety-hazardous work methods. 

Before starting to work, personnel shall make themselves familiar with the 

working environment which includes a survey of obstacles in the working 

and operating area. 

Use only original fuses with the correct rating for the specific application. 

Only install and wire up the equipment in a de-energized state. 

If work details must be executed at installed components they must be free 

from residual voltage. Before working at such parts, use applicable instruments 

to check the electric status. 

If work must be executed at electrically live components, a second person 

should act as a safety attendant who in case of an emergency can turn the 

main switch off. 

In case of any fault or malfunction, shut off the electrical power. Do not continue 

to work until the fault has been corrected. 

Protect all system components from direct wetness. 

The various components of the Flamenco system are fitted with elements 

sensitive to electrostatics. Any discharge of electrostatic energy may damage 

such parts. Therefore, avoid any direct contact with these electrostatically 

sensitive components. 

For further information regarding the installation and functional check refer 

to German standard DIN VDE 0834. 


5

1. Safety 

1.6 Technical standards 

Close observe the following standards which are applicable to nurse call systems: 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

DIN VDE 0834-1 0834-1:2000-04: Call systems in hospitals, nursing homes 

and similar institutions - Part 1: Requirements for equipment, erection and 

operation 

DIN VDE 0834-2; VDE 0834-2:2000-04: Call systems in hospitals, nursing 

homes and similar institutions - Part 2: - Environmental conditions and electromagnetic 

compatibility 

ISO 11197: Medical supply units 

EN 60601-1: Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General requirements 

for basic safety and essential performance 

EN 60601-1-1: Medical electrical equipment - Part 1: General safety requirements 

for medical electrical systems 

EN 50081-1: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), basic specification for 

emitted interference 

EN 50082-1: Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC), basic specification for 

immunity to interference 

DIN VDE 0100: Rules for the installation of high-voltage systems with nominal 

voltage up to 1000 V 

DIN VDE 0100-710: Erection of low-voltage installations - Requirements for 

special installations or locations Part 710: Medical locations 

EN 60950-1: Information technology equipment “Safety“ Part 1: General requirements 

Also observe additional national rules for installations. 

6 


2. Necessary previous knowledge 

2.1 System overview 

Ward 4 Ward 5 

Ward 2 

Ward 3 

OSY‐ControlCenter 

PS/DECT 

Telephony 

(DECT, VoIP, GSM) 

HIS 

... 

Ward 1 

Control Centre 

Fig. 1: 

System overview 


7


2.2 System structure 

The nurse call system uses a bus system which comprises a group bus OSYnet 

and a room bus RAN. The group bus OSYnet links the individual rooms and potential 

interfaces in the ward. The room bus RAN links the equipment and 

devices in the rooms themselves. 

The respective room terminal controls the room bus RAN and forms the 

connection between room bus RAN and group bus OSYnet: ComTerminal Flamenco, 

RoomTerminal Flamenco, ControlTerminal Flamenco, ControlTerminal 

with doorplate Flamenco. 

System control is realised in the OSY-ControlCenter which controls the data 

flow as well as all speech communication. 

If the OSY-ControlCenter should fail or break down, decentralised OSYnet- 

SafetyControllers can takeover the control of the basic nurse call functions. 

These controllers are fitted to ward's OSYnet group bus. 

Decentralised power supply units provide the electric power for the system. 

Number of units and their location depend on the specific demand for electric 

power. Power for the OSY-ControlCenter is also provided via an external power 

supply unit. 

Group 4 

Group 3 

OSYnet 

Group 2 

RAN 

RAN 

Room 1 Room 2 

OSYnet 

Group 1 

PS 

DECT 

HIS 

... 

RAN 

RAN 

OSY-ControlCenter Room 1 Room 2 

Fig. 2: 

System structure 

8 



2.3 Speech communication 

Speech communication and data transmission are physically and logically separated. 

Two speech paths are standard for each group. When designed in 

segments, each group will feature more than two speech paths, however, this 

arrangement requires special planning and installation. 

The system's speech line links the system-inherent speech units: 

ComTerminal, Patient handset, ComStation BUS-C , ComStation PC , ComStation 

CT , ManagementCenter PC , ManagementCenter PC Push buttons as well as 

the announcement loudspeakers as separate units or integrated in the corridor 

displays. 

2.3.1 Non-system speech paths 

Aside from the speech communication within the nurse call system itself,speech 

communication may also be realised using other devices: 

ComStation TEL , patient telephone, cordless phone (DECT or GSM mobile) etc. 

The interfaces to the PBX are provided in the OSY-ControlCenter. 

These devices can be used as virtually fully equivalent with the system's 

speech communication devices. Their use may be exclusively or mixed with the 

other units. However, planning and realisation of such solutions require detailed 

know-how of the technology involved, the operational implementation and subsequent 

functional and organisational procedures. 

For the installation refer to and observe the specific manufacturer's documents. 

DECT 

PBX 

Cordless phone 

Patient telephone 

OSY-ControlCenter 


9


2.4 Wards and groups 

Ward 5 

Ward 6 

Group 3 

Ward 3 

Ward 4 

Group 2 

Ward 1 Ward 2 

Group 1 

Organisation of the 

hospital 

Flamenco technology 

Wards are the organisational entities in hospitals. Therefore, a ward is an entity 

also for the nurse call operation in Flamenco nurse call systems. However, the 

physical structure of Flamenco call systems is almost independent of this organisation. 

In the development of the Flamenco technology, the organisational structure 

of the wards was decoupled from the technical structure. Rather than the ward, 

the 'physical' group is an entity - technically speaking, that is. Each group is 

linked to a group bus OSYnet and is controlled from a control unit (acting as a 

building block of the central OSY-ControlCenter). One group may comprise 

several wards. And what is more, wards may be 'distributed' onto several 

groups. 

This group-oriented arrangement allows for a substantial reduction of the necessary 

control units. The number of these control units and groups, respectively, 

is not determined by the number of wards but rather by the building structure 

and by the desired fail-safe rating. 

This independence from the physical structure is a considerable advantage as 

there is no need to always keep in mind the eventual organisational structure 

when planning for wiring and equipment for the installation. The system can be 

amended at any later date to meet new organisational structure, and this can 

be realised without dealing with the physical structure. 

Ward 

Group 

= Organisational entity 

= Physical entity 

10 



2.5 Cables / Wiring 

Data cables, e.g. CAT7 (22 AWG) or commercially available communication 

cables IY(ST)Y... can be used for group bus OSYnet. 

Power supply for all components is realised with a separate net (ring system), 

also with commercially available cables, e.g. NYM 2x2.5 mm 2 . On average, one 

power supply unit is required for every 25 rooms. 

The room bus RAN is also realised with commercially available communication 

cables IY(ST)Y... 

Maximum cable length for the group bus OSYnet is 700 m. In exceptional circumstances, 

it may be extended for another 700 m. In this case, an OSYnet- 

Gateway (order no. 77 4001 00) is required. 

2.6 System limits 

A physical group may comprise up to 110 bus users, as there are: 

ComTerminal Flamenco 

RoomTerminal Flamenco 

ControlTerminal Flamenco 

ControlTerminal with doorplate Flamenco 

ComStation CT Flamenco 

ComStation T Flamenco 

Corridor display Alpha 16 

Corridor display Alpha 16, double-sided 

ComStation BUS-C 

ComStation PC 

OSYlink-Door entry speaker 

OSYlink-Group lamp 

OSYlink-Universal 

OSYlink-Announcement 

OSYnet-SafetyController 


11


2.7 Configuration / SystemOrganizer 

A special software, the SystemOrganizer (order no. 77 0750 00) is used to centrally 

configure the complete nurse call system. 

The SystemOrganizer is applied for the whole system administration, from inital 

order processing via general definition and planning for the nurse call system 

to later customer service work on location or via partner. The comprehensive 

software also permits remote access to the system with the possibility for configuration, 

servicing and fault analysis. 

Users are allocated to several user groups, and specific access rights can be 

defined for each group. 

Fig. 3: 

SystemOrganizer software 

12 


3. Room types 

The following pages present various types of rooms showing examples of the 

system and equipment installed. 


13

3. Room types 

3.1 Patient / resident room 

3.1.1 Patient / resident room with speech 

OSYnet + Ip 

OSYnet + Ip 

Ie 

Entertainment system by customer 

Entertainment 

In 

77 0170 00 

In 

70 0111 01 

In 

70 0113 00 

In 

70 0115 01 

Is 

Entertainment 

Ie 

77 0510 00 

70 0424 00 

74 0747 00 

Is 

Entertainment 

Ie 

70 0434 00 

74 0747 00 

14 


3. Room types 

For each room 

ComTerminal Flamenco 77 0510 00 

Room lamp for display of all types of calls and presence states: 

e.g. Room lamp, 3 sections 

optional with additional individual indication for WC call / 

WC emergency call: e.g. Room lamp, 4 sections 

77 0170 00 

77 0170 10 

For each bed 

Connection socket combi or 

Connection socket combi, bedhead unit 

70 0424 00 

70 0434 00 

Patient handset 74 0747 00 

In WC room 

Where additional indication for WC call / WC emergency call is 

desired, e.g. as directional indicator in front of the WC: 

Room lamp code blue/cardiac alarm, WC 

77 0170 01 

Cancel button for WC call / WC emergency call 

e.g. Cancel switch/WC wp 70 0113 00 

There is a selection of call devices for use at or near wash 

basin, WC, shower, bath tub: 

Call switch/WC wp 

Pull cord call switch/WC wp 

Pneumatic call switch/WC 

70 0111 01 

70 0115 01 

70 0106 01 

In the seating area (optional) 

Call button, e.g. Call switch wp 70 0111 00 

Necessary accessories: Refer to table on page 49. 

Cable legend: Refer to page 51. 


15

3. Room types 

3.1.2 Patient / Resident room 

without speech, with ControlTerminal 

OSYnet + Ip 

OSYnet + Ip 

In 

77 0550 00 

In 

In 

70 0119 00 

70 0111 01 

In 

70 0113 00 

In 

70 0115 01 

In 

70 0171 03 

70 0710 00 

In 

70 0171 50 

70 0710 00 

16 


3. Room types 

For each room 

Options: 



77 0550 00 

77 0551 00 

ControlTerminal installation kit 77 0960 00 

ControlTerminal ConfigSet 

(only one required for the nurse call system) 

77 0920 00 

Staff presence combination with call tone, bedhead unit 70 0119 00 

For each bed 

Connection socket with call tone, bedhead unit or 

Connection socket with call tone, bedhead unit 

Options: 

Pear push switch incl. call and light switch, 2 m cable 


Pear push switch incl. 2 call switches, 2 m cable 


70 0171 03 

70 0171 50 

70 0710 00 

70 0710 01 

70 0711 00 

70 0711 01 

In WC room 








70 0111 01 

70 0115 01 

70 0106 01 






17

3. Room types 

3.1.3 Patient / resident room 

without speech, with RoomTerminal 

OSYnet + Ip 

OSYnet + Ip 

In 

77 0170 00 

In 

70 0111 01 

77 0520 00 

In 

70 0113 00 

In 

70 0115 01 

In 

70 0171 03 

70 0710 00 

In 

70 0171 50 

70 0710 00 

18 


3. Room types 

For each room 

RoomTerminal Flamenco 77 0520 00 


e.g. Room lamp, 3 sections 

optional with additional individual indication for WC call / 

WC emergency call: e.g. Room lamp, 4 sections 

77 0170 00 

77 0170 10 

For each bed 

Connection socket with call tone, bedhead unit or 

Connection socket with call tone, bedhead unit 

Options: 





70 0171 03 

70 0171 50 

70 0710 00 

70 0710 01 

70 0711 00 

70 0711 01 

In WC room 

Where additional indication for WC call / WC emergency call is 

desired, e.g. as directional indicator in front of the WC: 

Room lamp code blue/cardiac alarm, WC 

77 0170 01 








70 0111 01 

70 0115 01 

70 0106 01 






19

3. Room types 

3.1.4 Patient room: Light switching 

OSYnet + Ip 

OSYnet + Ip 

Ie 


Entertainment 

Room light 

Entertainment 

Ie 

Reading light 

70 0424 00 

Is 

RAN 

Pulse duration 150 ms 

24 V d.c. voltage 

Useable relays 

Latching relay (electronic): 

ELTAKO, ES60-TX60-24VDC 

ELTAKO, ES75-100-12..24 VDC 

SCHIELE entrelec TX60-24V 

BIAIG electronics TX60-24V 

Latching relay (mechanical): 

ELTAKO, 1S9-24 VDC 

ELTAKO, S91-100-24 VDC 

Switching relay (mechanical): 

ELTAKO, R12-100-24 VDC (for top-hat rail) 

ELTAKO, R91-100-24 VDC (surface mounting / back box) 

FINDER, 49.61-7024.4050 

Connection socket combi (70 0424 00): Room light and reading light 

Connection socket combi, bedhead unit (70 0734 00): Room light and reading 

light 

Connection socket with call tone, bedhead unit (70 0171 03): Room light or reading 

light 

Connection socket with call tone, bedhead unit Kanal (70 0171 50): Room light 

or reading light 

20 


3. Room types 

3.1.5 Patient room: TV connection 

3.1.5.1 Standard TV set (open TV tone) 

OSYnet + Ip 

OSYnet + Ip 

Ie 


Entertainment 

Entertainment 

Ie 

74 0747 00 

70 0424 00 

RAN 

In 

70 0360 10 

70 0360 20 

Infrared 

70 0860 00 

Ia 

Data 

00 0280 40 

Connection socket combi (70 0424 00) und Connection socket combi, bedhead 

unit (70 0434 00) allow TV control in combination with patient handset 

(74 0747 00) and the RAN interface TV (70 0860 00) and IR TV control module 

universal (70 0360 10). 

IR TV control module universal (70 0360 10) allows the control of standard TV 

sets using infrared signals. Additionally needed: Kit for IR TV control module 

(70 0360 20), Addressing plug for IR TV control module (70 0360 30) and onetime 

TV control module programming service (70 0360 50). 

Note: No tone transmission to patient handset. 


21

3. Room types 

3.1.5.2 Patient room: TV connection 

Standard TV set with tone transmission to Patient handset 

OSYnet + Ip 

OSYnet + Ip 

Ie 


Entertainment 

Entertain− 

ment 

Ie 

Ton 

74 0747 00 

Scart 

70 0424 50 

RAN 

In 

Ia2 

70 0360 11 

70 0360 21 

IR 

70 0860 00 

Ia 

Data 

00 0280 40 

Connection socket combi, TVL (70 0424 50) and connection socket combi, TVL 

bedhead unit (70 0434 50) allow TV control in combination with patient handset 

(74 0747 00), RAN interface TV (70 0860 00) and IR TV control module universal 

Audio (70 0360 11). 

Warning! These connections sockets are used only for this application. 

IR TV control module universal Audio allows the control and tone transmission 

from standard TV sets using infrared signals. Additionally needed: Kit for IR TV 

control module Audio (70 0360 21), Addressing plug for IR TV control module 

(70 0360 30) and one-time TV control module programming service (70 0360 

50). 

22 


3. Room types 

3.1.5.3 Patient room: TV connection 

Hospital LCD TV, Professional 

OSYnet + Ip 

OSYnet + Ip 

Ie 


Entertainment 

Entertain− 

ment 

Ie 

74 0747 00 

Tone 

70 0424 00 

RAN 

Ie 

In 

74 7005 26/XX* (26”) 

74 7005 32/XX* (32”) 

70 0860 00 

Ia 

Data 

00 0280 40 

XX* = current year, e.g. 13 for 2013 

Connection socket combi (70 0424 00) and connection socket combi bedhead 

unit (70 0434 00) allow TV control in combination with patient handset (74 0747 

00) and RAN interface TV (70 0860 00). LCD TV sets are available in different 

sizes. 

For the programming per project one TV installation kit (74 7002 56/XX*) is required. 

Note: XX* stands for the current year, i.e. e.g. 74 7002 56/13 for 2013). 

The TV sets are prepared for standard VESA wall mounts. Three different 

wall mounts can be ordered from Tunstall (74 7002 80, 74 7002 81, 74 7002 82). 


23

3. Room types 

3.1.6 Patient room: Separate shower and WC 

OSYnet + Ip 

OSYnet + Ip 

Ie 


Entertainment 

0 

77 0170 00 

0 = Channel number 0 

In 

In 

70 0112 00 

0 

70 0113 00 

7 

In 

7 

In 

70 0115 01 

7 

77 0170 01 

In 

6 

6 6 

70 0113 00 

70 0111 01 

In 

In 

70 0115 01 

6 

Is 

77 0170 01 

Entertainment 

Ie 

77 0510 00 

70 0424 00 

74 0747 00 

Is 

Entertainment 

Ie 

70 0434 00 

74 0747 00 

Separate call cancelling for each cubicle; collective room lamp (77 0170 00) in 

corridor and separate room lamps (77 0170 01) in room (channel encoding) 

with additional display for each cubicle. Maximum of 7 channels for each 

ComTerminal. 

Channel numbers 1 - 5 can be used as bed numbers 1 - 5. 

24 


3. Room types 

3.2 Function room 

OSYnet + Ip 

OSYnet + Ip 

In 

77 0170 00 

77 0510 00 

For each room 



e.g. Room lamp, 3 sections 77 0170 00 




25

3. Room types 

3.3 Ward bathroom 

3.3.1 Ward bathroom with speech, with ComTerminal 

OSYnet + Ip 

OSYnet + Ip 

In 

77 0170 00 

In 

In 

70 0115 00 

77 0510 00 

70 0106 00 

In 

In 

70 0111 00 

70 0111 00 

Pro Raum 




For each bath / WC 

Pull cord call switch wp, suitable for shower, WC 

Call switch wp, suitable for washbasin 

Pneumatic call switch, suitable for bath tubs 

70 0115 00 

70 0111 00 

70 0106 00 



26 


3. Room types 

3.3.2 Ward bathrom without speech, with ControlTerminal 

OSYnet + Ip 

OSYnet + Ip 

In 

77 0550 00 

In 

70 0119 00 

In 

70 0115 00 

70 0106 00 

In 

In 

70 0111 00 

70 0111 00 

For each room 

Options: 



77 0550 00 

77 0551 00 

ControlTerminal installation kit 77 0960 00 

ControlTerminal ConfigSet 

(only one required for the nurse call system) 

77 0920 00 

Staff presence combination with call tone, bedhead unit 70 0119 00 

For each bath / WC 

Pull cord call switch wp, suitable for shower, WC 

Call switch wp, suitable for washbasin 

Pneumatic call switch, suitable for bath tubs 

70 0115 00 

70 0111 00 

70 0106 00 




27

3. Room types 

3.4 Nurse station 

3.4.1 Ward console ComStation BUS-C 

OSYnet + Ip 

OSYnet + Ip 

In 

77 018210 

74 0452 30 

77 0605 50 

For each room 

ComStation BUS-C 77 0605 50 

Connection socket ComStation 74 0452 30 

Room lamp Universal, 2 sections 77 0182 10 



28 


3. Room types 

3.4.2 Nurse station: 

Ward console ComStation CT Flamenco 

OSYnet + Ip 

OSYnet + Ip 

In 

77 0170 00 

74 0452 30 

77 0606 00 

For each room 

ComStation CT Flamenco 77 0606 00 


Room lamp for display of all types of calls and presence 

states: e.g. Room lamp, 3 sections 77 0170 00 




29

3. Room types 

3.4.3 Nurse station: Ward console ComStation PC 

OSYnet + Ip 

OSYnet + Ip 

In 

77 0182 10 

74 0452 60A 

77 0602 00 

+ 77 0790 00 

+ 77 0790 01 

or 77 0790 02 

For each room 

ComStation PC 77 0602 00 

Connection socket ComStation PC 

74 0452 60A 

Room lamp Universal, 2 sections 77 0182 10 

PrimusGlobal + System setup and configuration 77 0790 00 

PrimusGlobal+ Project data up to 36 rooms 

Standard graphics 

or planview graphics 

77 0790 01 

77 0790 02 

30 


3. Room types 

3.4.4 Nurse station: Ward console ComStation TEL 

OSYnet + Ip 

OSYnet + Ip 

network on-site 

Ethernet 10/100 MBit 

In 

77 0170 00 

AC 

DC 

77 0510 00 

77 0603 00 

For each room 

ComStation TEL 77 0603 00 

For each room (if compliance with DIN VDE 0834 is required) 







31

3. Room types 

3.4.5 Nurse station: 

without speech, ComStation T Flamenco 

OSYnet + Ip 

OSYnet + Ip 

In 

77 0170 00 

74 0452 30 

77 0606 20 

For each room 

ComStation T Flamenco 77 0606 20 


Room lamp for display of all types of calls and presence 

states: e.g. Room lamp, 3 sections 77 0170 00 



32 


3. Room types 

3.5 Corridor 

Flurdisplay: 

OSYnet + Ip 

OSYnet + Ip 

77 01X0 00 

The corridor display Alpha 16, single-sided 

(77 0150 00) or Alpha 16, double-sided 

(77 0160 00) is directly connected to the group bus 

OSYnet. 

Group lamps, direction lamps: 

OSYnet + Ip 

OSYnet + Ip 

77 0802 00 

4 direction lamps (77 1102 00) or group lamps 

(77 1X02 00) for 4 wards can be connected to each 

OSYlink‐group lamp (77 0802 00). 

77 0111 02 

77 0112 02 

Door entry speaker: 

OSYnet + Ip 

OSYnet + Ip 

77 0801 00 

To each OSYlink-door entry speaker (77 0801 00) 

one door entry speaker (77 0350 00) can be 

connected. 

77 0350 00 

Loudspeaker with announcement interface: 

OSYnet + Ip 

OSYnet + Ip 

77 0804 00 

To each OSYlink-announcement (77 0804 00) a 

maximum of 5 loudspeakers with announcement 

interface (05 0024 01) can be connected. 

05 0024 01 

Devices or technical equipment from other makes: 

OSYnet + Ip 

77 0803 00 

OSYnet + Ip 

Connection of devices or technical equipment from 

other makes via OSYlink-Universal (77 0803 00). 

For details refer to product leaflet of OSYlink-Universal. 


33

3. Room types 

34 


4. Installation examples 


35


230 V AC 

77 0802 00 

77 0112 02 

77 3400 00 

or 

77 3401 00 

24 V 

77 2100 00 

Ip 

OSYnet 

77 0802 00 

77 0801 00 

77 0510 00 

77 0550 00 

+ 77 0960 00 

77 0803 00 

77 0510 00 77 0510 00 77 0510 00 

77 0111 02 

74 0452 30 

77 0350 00 

77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 

ComStation CT 

77 0112 02 

74 0452 30 

77 0550 00 

+ 77 0960 00 

77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 77 0510 00 77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 

ComStation CT 

120 

00 0040 76 

230 V AC 

77 3400 00 

or 

77 3401 00 

24 V 

77 2100 00 

Ip 

OSYnet 

OSYnet 

120 

00 0040 76 

77 0510 00 

OSYnet 

Flamenco Installation example 1 

230 V AC 

ManagementCenter 

77 3400 00 

or 

77 3401 00 

230 V AC 

Order no.: Product name: 

24 V 


Group 1 

Group 2 

Group 3 

00 0040 76 120 Ohm resistor (bus termination) 

74 0452 30 Connection socket ComStation 

77 0111 02 Direction lamp 

77 0112 02 Group lamp, 2 sections 

77 0350 00 Door entry speaker 

77 0510 00 ComTerminal Flamenco 

77 0550 00 ControlTerminal Flamenco 

77 0606 00 ComStation CT Flamenco 

77 0960 00 ControlTerminal installation kit 

77 0801 00 OSYlink-Door entry speaker 

77 0802 00 OSYlink-Group lamp 

77 0803 00 OSYlink-Universal 

77 2100 00 OSYnet-SafetyController 

77 3400 00 Power supply unit UPS 

77 3401 00 Power supply unit 

36 



77 3400 00 

or 

77 3401 00 

24 V 

Ip 

OSYnet 

77 0150 00 or 77 0160 00 

230 V AC 

77 3400 00 

or 

77 3401 00 

24 V 

Ip 

ComStation PC 230 V 

ComStation PC 230 V 

230 V AC 

77 0510 00 77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 

74 0452 60A 

77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 

120 

00 0040 76 

77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 77 0510 00 77 0510 00 

OSYnet 

77 0150 00 or 77 0160 00 

74 0452 60A 

120 

00 0040 76 

77 0510 00 77 0510 00 77 0510 00 77 0510 00 

77 4000 00 


77 0510 00 77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 77 0510 00 77 0510 00 

Ip 

77 0150 00 or 77 0160 00 

OSYnet 

77 2100 00 

74 0452 60A 

77 3400 00 

or 

77 3401 00 

24 V 

77 0510 00 77 0510 00 

230 V 

77 0510 00 

230 V AC 

ComStation PC 

230 V AC 

24 V 

77 3400 00 

or 

77 3401 00 





77 0150 00 Corridor display Alpha 16 

77 0160 00 Corridor display Alpha 16, double-sided 




77 4000 00 OSYnet-Y-RepeaterOpto 

OSYnet 

Group 1 

Group 2 

Group 3 


37


77 0510 00 

24 V 

Ip 

OSYnet 

77 2100 00 

OSYnet 

77 0150 00 or 77 0160 00 

77 4001 00 

77 3400 00 

or 

77 3401 00 

77 0804 00 

OSYnet 

05 0024 01 

230 V AC 

77 3400 00 

or 

77 3401 00 



05 0024 01 Loudspeaker with announcement interface 





77 0605 50 ComStation BUS−C 

77 0804 00 OSYlink-Announcement 




77 4001 00 OSYnet-Gateway 


77 0510 00 77 0510 00 77 0510 00 

74 0452 30 

77 0510 00 77 0510 00 77 0510 00 77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 77 0510 00 77 0510 00 77 0510 00 

74 0452 30 

77 0510 00 77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 

77 0510 00 

77 0605 50 

77 0605 50 

77 0510 00 

Cable legend: 

OSYnet = Group bus OSYnet = e.g. IY(ST)Y 4x2x0,8 

Ip = Power cable = NYM 2x2,5 mm 2 

230 V AC 

120 

00 0040 76 

24 V 


Group 1 

Group 2 

Group 3 

OSYnet 

38 



Flamenco without speech Installation example 

Station 1 Station 2 

230 V AC 

230 V AC 

Further rooms 

77 0520 00 77 0520 00 77 0520 00 

77 3400 00 

or 

77 3401 00 

Further rooms 

77 0520 00 77 0520 00 

77 0520 00 

77 3400 00 

or 

77 3401 00 

24 V 

24 V 

77 2100 00 

Ip 

Ip 

OSYnet 

OSYnet 

77 0802 00 

77 4001 00 

77 0111 02 

77 0112 02 

OSYnet 77 0150 00 or 77 0160 00 

74 0452 30 

77 0550 00 

+ 77 0960 00 

74 0452 30 

120 

00 0040 76 

77 0520 00 

Further rooms 

Further rooms 

77 0606 20 

77 0520 00 77 0520 00 77 0520 00 

77 0606 20 




77 0111 02 Direction lamp 

77 0112 02 Group lamp, 2 sections 



77 0520 00 RoomTerminal Flamenco 


77 0606 20 ComStation T Flamenco 

77 0802 00 OSYlink-Group lamp 

77 0960 00 ControlTerminal installation kit 




77 4001 00 OSYnet-Gateway 

230 V AC 

77 3400 00 

or 

77 3401 00 

24 V 


Cable legend: 

Group 1 

Group 2 

Group 3 

OSYnet = Group bus OSYnet 

- without speech transmission e.g. IY(ST)Y 2x2x0,8 

- with preparation for speech transmission e.g. IY(ST)Y 4x2x0,8 

OSYnet 

Ip = Power cable = NYM 2x2,5 mm 2 


39


40 


5. Installation work sequence 

Work step 

Description 

1. Defining the mounting positions Page 43 and the following. 

2. Installation of back boxes Page 49 and the following. 

3. Laying the cables Page 51 and the following. 

4. Mounting and connecting of devices Refer to chapter “Product 

leaflets“, page 83 and the 

following. 

5. Switching on and checking of power supply Page 61 and the following. 

6. Configuring the room terminals (ComTerminal 

Flamenco, RoomTerminal Flamenco, ControlTerminal 

Flamenco, ControlTerminal with doorplate 

Flamenco) 

7. Configuring OSY-ControlCenter 

(SystemOrganizer) 

ComTerminal Flamenco, 

RoomTerminal Flamenco: 

Refer to chapter “Product 


following. 

ControlTerminal Flamenco, 

ControlTerminal with doorplate 

Flamenco: Refer to 

online help included with 

the ControlTerminal Config‐ 

Set (order no. 77 0920 00). 

Page 63 and the following. 

8. Connecting the OSY-ControlCenter Refer to chapter “Product 


following. 

9. Commissioning the OSY-ControlCenter Refer to chapter “Product 


following. 

10. Commissioning the ward console 

(ComStation BUS-C , ComStation PC , ComStation CT 

Flamenco) or ComStation T Flamenco 

11. Connecting and commissioning the Management‐ 

Center 

Refer to the documents 

delivered with the ward console. 

Refer to chapter “Product 


following. 

12. Functional check of the system Page 69 and the following. 


41

5. Installation work sequence 

42 


6. Defining the mounting positions 

6.1 General requirements 

All devices for the nurse call 

system 

Devices with displays 

Call switches, Call devices 

Presence buttons 

Optical signalling devices 

Signal lamps, Corridor displays 

- Considering the different users, the process of raising a call 

must be simple and unambiguous, and a mix-up with other system 

elements must be virtually impossible. 

- Damage or destruction from external effects which may occur 

during normal use (e.g. when moving beds) must be virtually 

impossible. 

- Must not be installed in rooms with harmfull influences to telecommunications 

equipment. 

- Unobstructed view must be ensured (ComTerminal, Room‐ 

Terminal, ComStation CT , ComStation T ). 

- Not subject to direct sun radiation. 

- Easy access and reach must be ensured. 

- Near the door. 

- Visual recognition must not be obscured by other stray light. 

- Called or paged persons shall be directed via the shortest 

distance to the call location. 

- Shall be easily allocated to the respective rooms. 

Room lamps 

In WCs and wet rooms - Comply with specifications acc. to DIN VDE 0100! 

Power supply units, 

OSYlink modules, 

OSYnet-SafetyController, 

OSYnet‐Y‐RepeaterOpto, 

OSYnet‐Gateway 

Distributor cabinets for both 

nurse call system and mains 

power supply 

- Use in dry rooms only; if possible within distribution cabinets 

(not inside of patient or resident rooms). 

- Easy access at any time (access door at least 60 cm wide). 

- Heat transfer must not be blocked off. 

- When installed in switch cabinets, forced-air cooling may be 

required. 

- Considering the effective voltage drop, the power supply unit 

should be located close to the biggest users. 

- Fire hazard! Danger of fire in case of short-circuit. Therefore, 

ensure sufficient ventilation in distribution cabinets. 

- After removing the outer cover, the high-voltage part must still 

be protected. 

- Connection terminals for the nurse call system and those for 

the high-voltage installations must be clearly separated and 

designated as such, e.g. by way of design, shape, colour. Inscriptions 

alone are not sufficient to preclude misuse. 

6.1.1 Mounting heights 

Prescribed mounting height acc. to DIN VDE 0834-1:2000: 

Mounting height above floor level: 

Device with control elements (with and without indicating lamps) 700 - 1500 mm 

Device with control elements with text display 

1500 - 1700 mm 

Device in installation units 

1600 - 1800 mm 

Signal lamps and large letter display 

1500 - 2200 mm 

Distribution boxes 

700 - 2200 mm 


43


6.1.2 Room terminals 


Order no.: 77 0510 00 



170 mm 

Location in the room: 

The ComTerminal Flamenco has to be installed in an acoustically 

convenient location, so that from all locations in the 

room a good speech connection over the ComTerminal 

Flamenco is possible. 

The RoomTerminal Flamenco should also be installed in an 

acoustically convenient location, so that a later upgrading to a 

Terminal with speech would be possible. 

1600 mm 

Note: If the ComTerminal Flamenco or the RoomTerminal 

Flamenco is not installed in the entrance area, a separate 

staff presence switch (70 0112 00) has to be installed near 

the door. 

2-gang back box required. 

Note: 

120 mm 

120 mm 

At 2-gang back boxes at least 120 mm space (from the 

centre) must be provided for the ComTerminal Flamenco or 

RoomTerminal Flamenco. 

44 



55 mm 

150 mm 




55 mm 

150 mm 




Note: The back box is installed behind the lamp and not behind 

the doorplate. 


45


6.1.3 Room lamps 

55 mm 

110 mm 

150 mm 

Room lamp 

Order no.: 77 0170 00, 77 0170 01, 77 0170 10, 77 0182 10 

1-gang back box required for each room lamp. 

55 mm 

150 mm 

Room lamp with doorplate 

Order no.: 77 0171 00, 77 0171 10 

1-gang back box required for each room lamp with doorplate. 

Note: The back box is installed behind the lamp and not behind 

the doorplate. 

46 



6.1.4 Switches 

150 mm 

Switches near the door 

91 mm 

1300 mm 

1-gang back box required for each switch. 

91 mm raster spacing is mandatory! 

300 mm 

Pull cord call switch in bathroom/WC 

(ceiling mounted) 



ÀÀ 

The pull cord grab may be not higher than 200 mm above the 

floor, so that people lying on the floor can reach the pull cord. 

ÀÀ ÀÀÀ 

ÀÀÀ 

300 mm 

Pull cord call switch in bathroom/WC 

(wall mounted) 



2250 mm 

Pull cord switches in shower stalls have to be installed at 

least 200 mm above the highest possible position of the 

showerhead. The pull cord grab may be not higher than 

200 mm above the floor, so that people lying on the floor can 

reach the pull cord. 

300 mm 

Pneumatic call switch 



2250 mm 

Back box solid wall, 1-gang: 17 0100 00 

Back box partition wall, 1-gang: 17 5100 00 

Note: The switch will be offset, i.e. the switch centre will be 

approx. 5 mm below the back box centre. In other words, install 

the back box 5 mm above the desired switch position. 

Back box 

Switch 

5 mm 


47


6.1.5 Connection sockets 

Bed 1 Bed 2 

100 mm 

Connection socket combi 

(wall mounting) 

Order no.: 70 0424 00, 70 0424 50, 70 0449 00 


100 mm minimum spacing above floor level. 

Medical supply unit 

Bed 1 Bed 2 

Connection sockets 

Connection socket combi, bedhead unit 

(mounting in medical supply unit) 

Order no.: 70 0434 00, 70 0434 50, 70 0448 00 

Common practice is that the connection sockets are installed 

by the supplier of the medical supply units. 

Bed 1 Bed 2 

Connection socket with call switch 


100 mm 


100 mm minimum spacing above floor level. 


Bed 1 Bed 2 


Connection socket with call switch, bedhead 

unit (mounting in medical supply unit) 


Common practice is that the connection sockets are installed 

by the supplier of the medical supply units. 

48 


7. Installing the back boxes 

Refer to the table of accessories to find the correct back boxes and connectors 

for each product. 

Order no. 

Back boxes 

Solid wall Partition wall Connector 

1-gang 

17 0100 00 

2-gang 

17 0410 00 

1-gang 

17 5100 00 

2-gang 

17 5400 00 

Pneumatic call switch 70 0106 00 Centre offset Centre offset 

70 0807 00 

Pneumatic call 

switch/WC 

70 0106 01 Centre offset Centre offset 

Call switch 70 0111 00 

Call switch/WC 70 0111 01 

Staff presence wp 70 0112 00 

Cancel switch/WC wp 70 0113 00 

Code blue / Cardiac 

alarm switch wp 

70 0114 00 

Pull cord call switch wp 70 0115 00 

Pull cord call switch/WC 

wp 

Call switch/WC with 

cancel switch wp 

Call switch with privacy 

switch wp 

Staff presence combination 

with call tone wp 

Connection socket with 

call switch 

Connection socket with 

call switch, bedhead 

unit 

Cancel switch/WC mit 

call tone wp 

70 0115 01 

70 0117 00 

70 0118 00 

70 0119 00 

70 0171 03 70 0807 01 

70 0171 50 Installation in medical supply unit 00 0211 37 

70 0183 00 

Connection socket combi 70 0424 00 

Connection socket 

combi, TVL 


combi Universal 

70 0424 50 

70 0449 00 


49

7. Installing the back boxes 


combi, bedhead unit 

Connection socket combi, 

bedhead unit, TVL 

Connection socket combi, 

bedhead unit Universal 


ComStation 


Back box 

Solid wall Partition wall Connector 

1-gang 

17 0100 00 

2-gang 

17 0410 00 

1-gang 

17 0510 00 

70 0434 00 Installation in medical supply unit 



2-gang 

17 0540 00 

74 0452 30 

70 0807 00 


ComStation PC 74 0452 60A 

Direction lamp 77 0111 02 

Group lamp, 2 sections 77 0112 02 



Room lamp, 3 sections 77 0170 00 

Room lamp code blue/ 

cardiac alarm, WC 

77 0170 01 

Room lamp, 4 sections 77 0170 10 

Room lamp, 3 sections, 

with doorplate 

Room lamp, 4 sections, 


Room lamp Universal, 2 

sections 

77 0171 00 

77 017110 

77 0182 10 70 0807 07 

ComTerminal Flamenco 77 0510 00 


ControlTerminal with 

doorplate Flamenco 


OSYnet-Y-Repeater‐ 

Opto 

77 0520 00 

77 0550 00 77 0960 00 

77 0551 00 77 0960 00 

77 4000 00 77 0950 00 

50 


8. Laying the cables 

When laying the cables, closely observe the current VDE rules. 

8.1 Cable legend 

To simplify the handling of installation plans, Tunstall GmbH has introduced an 

expanded cable legend. The cables are organised according to their application 

areas. Relevant types of cables are allocated to specific application areas. 

These shall be considered as minimum requirements. 

Marking Designation Type of cable 

Ia General cables IY(ST)Y 2x2x0.8 

Ia2 General cables IY(ST)Y 2x2x0.6 




OSYnet Group bus OSYnet Recommended cables: 

CAT7 (22 AWG) with diameter Ø = 0.64 mm 

IY(ST)Y 4x2x0,8 with diameter Ø = 0.8 mm 

Optional cables: 




IY(ST)Y 4x2x0,6 with diameter Ø = 0.6 mm 

Ie Entertainment cables 2x IYY per channel or similar cables (1 double 

wire required for each programme) 

In Room bus RAN IY(ST)Y 2x2x0.8 

Ip Power cable NYM 2x2,5 mm 2 

Is Speech cable plus 

room bus RAN 

2x IY(ST)Y 2x2x0.8 

8.1.1 Colour coding 

German 

abbreviation 

English 

abbreviation 

Colour 

bl BU blue 

br BN brown 

ge YE yellow 

gn GN green 

gr GY grey 

or OG orange 

rt RD red 

sw BK black 

vi VT violet 

ws WH white 


51


8.2 Electromagnetic compatibility (EMC) 

All electronic components of the nurse call system emission and sensibility values 

which are well within the prescribed parameters for electromagnetic compatibility 

(EMC). Nevertheless, interference with the nurse call system may occur 

in specific situations and due to insufficient interference suppression of 

fluorescent lamps - particularly in hospital installation units (medical supply 

units). 

Customers should make provisions which prevent such interference from external 

sources. In many cases, this type of external interference can be avoided 

by installing suppressor elements (varistor circuits). These varistor circuits are 

commercially available from the manufacturers. Tunstall offers a proven overvoltage 

filter 230 V (70 0890 97). 

The EMC properties of the various electro medical supply units may differ to a 

great extent. Even two supply units of the same type may act and react with 

considerable difference if they are wired in different ways. 

Normally, call systems are widely distributed over the building, and their EMC 

behaviour is affected by the specific design and layout of the network. 

This situation should also be considered when effecting changes or amendments 

to existing medical supply units. 

8.2.1 Cables for high-voltage installations and cables for 

other systems with dangerous voltage 

Power cables for the nurse call system must not be laid along with the cables 

of high-voltage installations or with cables of other systems of high-risk voltage 

in common cables, conduits or cable trays. 

Cables for the nurse call system and high-voltage cables must be placed at a 

minimum spacing of 30 cm. For shorter distances of less than 10 m the spacing 

may be reduced to 10 cm. 

230 V / 400 V AC 

Cable for high-voltage system 

Spacing > 30 cm 

Cable for the nurse call system 

For laying nurse call system cables in medical supply units the regulations of 

ISO 11197:2004 have to be observed. 

52 



8.3 Electric power supply cables (Ip) 

Electric power for the system is provided with +24 V DC, which is generated by 

regulated, short-circuit proof power supply units. 

The power supply cable Ip is installed as a ring circuit. Cable lengths should be 

kept as short as possible to preclude larger voltage drops. 

Maximum voltage differential from the power supply unit to the farthest room 

being supplied via the ring circuit should not exceed 4 V. 

Where larger voltage drops are observed, another cable should be laid from the 

supply unit, or a cross linking within the +24 V ring circuit should be realised. 

If neither solution will solve the problem, a second power supply unit should be 

installed. Coupling of power supply units in parallel is not allowed. 

The power supply ring circuit should be made using cables of 2.5 mm 2 cross 

section. Depending on the type of circuit, single core leads (NYA 2.5 mm 2 for 

+24V and 0V) or a common cable (NYM 2x2.5 mm 2 ) may be used. 

Fig. 4: NYM 2x2,5 mm 2 

NOTE ! When laying the cables, always select the shortest route to keep the 

resultant voltage drop as low as possible. 

Use of logic colour codes for the cables and/or specific laying techniques for 

the extra-low voltage cables shall eliminate the chance for mix-up with highvoltage 

cables. If you select to use cable material which is also used for high 

voltage circuits you should mark and designate these cables clearly and permanently. 

Comply with current rules and directives! 


53


8.4 Current demand 

The table below was prepared to calculate the required current in the Flamenco 

system. The values are average figures and may differ for individual applications. 

Total current consumption will vary according to the number of functions 

used at any one time. 

Additional current consumption 

05 0024 01 Loudspeaker with announc. interf. 80 mA 

11 5350 00 Telephone interface relay 10 mA 

70 xxxx xx Switches 10 mA 

70 0171 03 Connection socket with call switch 15 mA 

70 0171 50 Connection socket with call switch, 21 mA While light button is pressed: max. 179 mA 

bedhead unit 

70 0360 10 IR TV control module universal 15 mA During data transmission: 

for a short time 35 mA 

70 0360 11 IR TV control module universal audio 15 mA During data transmission: 

for a short time 35 mA 

70 04x4 x0 Connection socket combi / combi, 30 mA 

bedhead unit 

70 0790 00 Sound detector 16 mA 

70 08xx 00 RAN interfaces 20 mA 

70 0831 00 1‐channel radio receiver 35 mA 

74 0747 00 Patient handset 20 mA 

77 011x 02 Direction lamp / Group lamp 0 mA Each lighted section: 75 mA 

77 0150 00 Corridor display Alpha 16 Average current consumption: 300 mA 

77 0160 00 Corridor display Alpha 16, double-sided Average current consumption: 600 mA 

77 017x xx Room lamp or 

20 mA Each lighted section: 30 mA 

Room lamp with doorplate 

77 0182 10 Room lamp Universal, 2 sections 0 mA Each lighted section: 30 mA 

77 0350 00 Door entry speaker 30 mA During operation: 45 mA 

77 0510 00 ComTerminal Flamenco 115 mA Display backlight switched on + all LED: 40 mA 

77 0520 00 RoomTerminal Flamenco 52 mA Display backlight switched on + all LED: 40 mA 

77 055x 00 ControlTerminal Flamenco or 

42 mA Each lighted section: 30 mA 


77 0605 50 ComStation BUS-C 230 mA 

77 0606 00 ComStation CT Flamenco 115 mA Display backlight switched on + all LED: 40 mA 

77 0606 20 ComStation T Flamenco 52 mA Display backlight switched on + all LED: 40 mA 

77 0801 00 OSYlink‐Door entry speaker 53 mA 

77 0802 00 OSYlink‐Group lamp 26 mA 

77 0803 00 OSYlink‐Universal 35 mA 

77 0804 00 OSYlink‐Announcement 32 mA 

77 2100 00 OSYnet‐SafetyController 30 mA 

77 4000 00 OSYnet‐Y‐RepeaterOpto 60 mA 

77 4001 00 OSYnet‐Gateway 50 mA 

One power supply unit is required for each OSY-ControlCenter (Order no. 

77 2x0x 00). 

54 



8.4.1 Standard basis for calculation 

To calculate the required current, first add all standby current figures or the average 

current consumption, respectively. 

In a simplified manner, the additional current demand can be calculated as follows: 

You may assume that on the average 5 calls, 5 presence states and one 

speech connection are active at any one time. 

Current demand for each call = 100 mA 

Current demand for each presence state = 100 mA 

Current demand for each speech connection = 50 mA 

The power supply unit should not be loaded by more than 80% of its capacity. 

Maximum capacity for the power supply units is 12.5 A. The 80% permissible 

load, therefore, amounts to 10 A. 

8.4.2 Sample calculation for 25 two-bed rooms with WC 

Number 

Device 

Standby current: 

for each device 

for 25 rooms 

25 ComTerminal Flamenco 115 mA 2875 mA 

25 Room lamp, 3 sections 20 mA 500 mA 

25 Room lamp, code blue/cardiac 

alarm, WC 

20 mA 500 mA 

50 Connection socket, bedhead unit 30 mA 1500 mA 

50 Patient handset 20 mA 1000 mA 

50 Switch 10 mA 500 mA 

1 ComStation BUS-C 230 mA 230 mA 

1 OSYlink‐Group lamp 26 mA 26 mA 

1 Group lamp, 3 sections 0 mA 0 mA 

Number 

Function 

Sum (standby current consumption): 

Additional current: 

per function 

7131 mA 

per ward 

5 active call 100 mA 500 mA 

5 active presence state 100 mA 500 mA 

1 active speech connection 50 mA 50 mA 

Sum (additional current consumption): 

1050 mA 

Total 

(standby current consumption + additional current consumption): 

8181 mA 

80% load on a power supply unit = 10 A (100% load = 12.5 A). 

Result: 1 power supply unit is required for the above 25 two-bed rooms with WC. 


55


8.5 Group bus OSYnet 

Lay all cables to the control unit OSY-ControlCenter. Use the locally available 

facilities (distributors, cable conduits). 

WARNING ! For the group bus OSYnet no stub lines may be installed. All devices 

must be directly connected to the bus. 

Cables for the nurse call system which run outside of the building must be fitted 

with an overvoltage protection acc. to DIN VDE 0845 at the position where they 

leave the building. This overvoltage protection will not be required if a galvanic 

disconnect point prevents the effect of harmful voltages. 

8.5.1 Useable cable types 

The following types of cables are recommended for the group bus OSYnet:: 

 

 


IY(ST)Y 4x2x0.8 with diameter Ø = 0.8 mm 

The following types of cables may be used optionally: 

 

 

 

 




IY(ST)Y 4x2x0.6 with diameter Ø = 0.6 mm 

NOTE ! As alternative solutions, halogen-free variants as well as under ground 

cables can be used. Contact Tunstall GmbH when planning to use any other 

type of cable. 

Theses cables are twisted in pairs with the following design: 

56 



8.5.2 Prescribed cable assignment 

CAT-7 

IY(ST)Y 4x2x0,8 

IY(ST)Y 4x2x0,6 

CAT-5 

CAT-6 

yellow 

white 

green 

white 

blue 

red 

brown 

white 

yellow 

white 

green 

white 

blue 

red 

brown 

white 

yellow 

white 

green 

white 

blue 

red 

brown 

white 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

DG 

DG 

DH 

DL 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

DG 

DG 

DH 

DL 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

DG 

DG 

DH 

DL 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

8.5.3 CCS 32 cable 

The system cable CC32 from Tunstall has been used in many earlier reconditioning 

projects. The cable may be used, however, only one speech path will 

be available. 

CCS 32 

*) The black conductor is not used. 

black*) 

shielding 

white 

blue 

brown 

grey 

DG 

DH 

DL 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 


57


8.5.4 Maximum permissible cable lengths for OSYnet 

Group 1, Ward 1 

max. 700 m 



a + b = max. 700 m 

b 


c + d + e = max. 700 m 

a 


e 


c 

OSYnet‐Y‐RepeaterOpto 


d 

max. 700 m 


max. 700 m 


= Bus termination 

at last bus user 

Where several wards are connected to one group bus, it may be necessary to 

split the group bus into two independent sections. The splitting is done using 

the OSYnet-Y-RepeaterOpto (order no. 77 4000 00). One repeater can be used 

for each group. 

Where the max. cable length of 700 m will not suffice, the group bus can 

expanded for another 700 m using the OSYnet-Gateway (order no. 

77 4001 00). One Gateway can be used for each group. 

NOTE! Per group bus one OSYnet-Y-RepeaterOpto (order no. 77 4000 00) or 

one OSYnet-Gateway (order no. 77 4001 00) installed. 

8.5.4.1 Bus termination 

The last device (e.g. a ComTerminal) at a bus cable must be fitted with a 

120 Ohm resistor (order no. 00 0040 76) between the connecting points DH and 

DL. 

58 



8.6 Room bus RAN 

The RAN (room area network) links all components in a room. For data transfer, 

3 conductors of IY(ST)Y 2x2x0.8 (Cable = In) are required. 

+24V 

RAN 

0V 

R(ed) = +24 V 

Y(ellow) = RAN 

B(lack) = 0V 

Max. permissible cable length for RAN is 50 m. 

Max. permissible number of RAN users is 30. 

Devices for speech communication require an additional speech line (cable Is). 

All devices with RAN interface can be connected at random (star, bus or mesh 

network). Later expansion of the RAN can be realised from any device and independent 

of the device's particular function. Only additional devices with speech 

communication require an extra speech line. 

For a better overview, split the various RAN connections into function groups. 

This type of arrangement is more service-friendly (Fig. 5 on page 60). 

The type of installation has no influence on the RAN functions. 

The voltage drop at each cable connection caused by a current of max. 60 mA 

must not exceed 0.3 V in relation to the voltage at the ComTerminal. Under normal 

condition, this value is achieved when a RAN user is connected to a cable 

of type In, which is longer than 50 m. 

8.6.1 Shielded cables for the room bus RAN (Is) 

CAUTION ! Insulate the protective screen or the blank shield wire up to the 

connecting point. Otherwise, a short circuit situation or crosstalk may occur. 

To ensure the protective screen function, all room bus cables for music or 

speech transmissions (shielded cables) may be stripped for a max. length of 

30 mm only. 

max. 30 mm 


59


Not service-friendly 

confusing = 

poor installation 

Service friendly 

clear arranged = 

good installation 

Fig. 5: 

RAN: Example for installation 

60 


9. Activating the power supply 

Prerequisite: Except the power supply unit, all cables are installed and all 

devices are connected in compliance with the enclosed product leaflets. 

Note: All product leaflets are presented in chapter “Product leaflets” starting on 

page 83. 

9.1 Installing the power supply unit 

Before connecting the power supply unit you must check the cables to the 

power supply unit for possible short circuits and earth interconnections. 

Install the power supply unit acc. to the installation instructions coming with the 

unit. This information is also shown in the chapter “Product leaflets” starting on 

page 83. 

9.2 Check the current supply 

The operating voltage for the whole system is +24 V DC. Electric current for the 

system components is supplied through power supply units. 

Execute the checks and tests as shown below: 

9.2.1 Check output voltage of the power supply unit 

Use a voltmeter to confirm the output voltage of +24 V. 

9.2.2 Check continuity of + 24 V ring circuit 

Disconnect one end of the ring circuit at the power supply unit. Switch the power 

supply unit on and measure the voltage at the open wires. If no voltage is measured, 

the ring circuit is not closed or one of the conductors (+24 V or 0 V) is interrupted. 

Power supply 

unit 

1. room terminal 

Ip 

Ip 

1. room terminal 


61

9. Activating the power supply 

9.2.3 Supply voltage to the room terminals 

Activate 5 calls and 5 presence states for the ward which is to be checked. Use 

the worst location, i.e. the most distant location from the power supply unit. 

Test the voltage and determine the room terminal (ComTerminal Flamenco, 

RoomTerminal Flamenco, ControlTerminal Flamenco or ControlTerminal with 

doorplate Flamenco) with the lowest voltage. This point is considered as the 

electric centre of the ring circuit. Here, the voltage differential to the first room 

terminal as seen from the power supply unit must not be greater than 4 V. 

If you should read a lower value (i.e. a drop of more than 4 V) the voltage drop 

must be reduced by laying an additional cable from the power supply unit to the 

electric centre - or double the 0 V lead - if it is available. 

Power supply 

unit 

Ip 

Ip 

Electric 

centre 

9.2.4 Check voltage for group bus OSYnet 

If group bus OSYnet is correctly connected: 

voltage between DH and DG and 

voltage between DL and DG = approx. +2.5 V. 

9.2.5 Check voltage for RAN 

RAN voltage is o.k. when voltage between B (0V) and Y (RAN) is between 

+8.8 V and +9 V DC. 

If the voltage is outside of these parameters, these may be the reasons 

If voltage between B (0V) and Y (RAN) = 0 V 

a) Short circuit between B and Y 

b) Wire Y (RAN) is not connected to the connection socket. 

If voltage between B and Y = +12 V 

a) Wire B (0V) is not connected at one of the RAN users. 

b) One RAN user is defective. 

62 


10. Configure the OSY-ControlCenter 

Before starting the operation of the nurse call system, the OSY-ControlCenter 

must be configured with the specific data of the relevant project. This configuration 

is realised exclusively using the software 'SystemOrganizer'. Standard 

procedure is that the OSY-ControlCenter is configured at Tunstall before it is 

delivered. However, the configuration may also take place on-location in the 

hospital or via remote service mode. 

All project-specific data must be on hand when starting with the configuration 

process. 

Fig. 6: 

SystemOrganizer software 

10.1 Parameters to be configured 

 

 

 

 

Country-specific settings 

Designation for rooms, wards, buildings, etc. 

Setting of call types and system messages 

Parameters for call handling, e.g. call types, call categories, cancelling, privacy 

setting 

Organisational allocation of rooms (locations) to wards, work shifts, etc. 

Managing of mobile devices DECT / PS. 

... 


63

10. Configure the OSY-ControlCenter 

10.1.1 Software requirements 

Microsoft Windows 7, Windows XP or Windows 2000 

10/100 MBit LAN access 

The use of the SystemOrganizer is described in the online help for the software. 

64 


11. Voltage surge protection 

The German standard DIN VDE 0834-1:2000-04 regulates that all cables of the 

nurse call system which are to emerge from the building shall be provided with 

voltage surge protection according to DIN VDE 0845 (VDE 0845) at the emerging 

point. 

For the voltage surge protection you have especially to follow: 

VDE 0845-4-2: 2002-07; DIN EN 61663-2: Lightning protection -Telecommunication 

lines - Part 2 Lines using metallic conductors (IEC 61663-2:2001). 

In the following the structure of the voltage surge protection is presented for 

cables of the Flamenco call system, which are laid between two buildings. 

NOTE ! For the described fine protection of the Flamenco call system it is 

provided that all measures for the coarse protection have been completed according 

to the valid regulations. Otherwise the fine protection cannot work. 

The voltage surge protection has to be installed in the main building connection 

point. This should be installed directly where the cables enter the building. 

The voltage surge protection has to be installed in both buildings affected. 

WARNING ! By installing the described surge protection the maximum cable 

length for the OSYnet is reduced by 50 meters. 

NOTE ! To make sure a permanent protection of the Flamenco nurse call system, 

the voltage surge protection devices have to be installed acc. to the manufacturer's 

specifications. 

On the next pages the required voltage surge protection devices (SPD) are 

presented. Note: The shown SPD modules are just examples. SPD modules 

of other makes can be used as well. 

After the presentation of the SPD modules the construction of the surge protection 

is shown in a diagram. 


65


11.1 SPD modules 

Functions 

SPD module base part 

BXT BAS 

Base part, for use as feed-through terminal for 

supporting SPD modules for speech and data 

lines. Modules pluggable without interruption, for 

4 single wires or 2 double wires. Width 12 mm 

(2/3 TE). 

‐ Mounting on 35 mm top hat rail acc. to 60715 

‐ Connection cross section finely stranded: 

0.08 - 2.5 mm2 

‐ Earthing via 35 mm top hat rail acc. to 

EN 60715 


77 4900 00 

unit: mm 

SPD module for speech and data wires 

BXT ML4 BD HF 5 

Combined Lightning Current and Surge Arrester‐ 

Module SPD class TYPE 1 / P1 tested acc. to 

EN 61643-21 and energy-coordinated acc. to 

IEC 61643-22 for protection of 2 pairs of IT 

sytems. For use with high data transmission 

rates due to its low self impedance. 

‐ For plugging into base part type BXT BAS. 

‐ SPD monitoring system: LifeCheck 

‐ Max. continuous operating DC voltage: 6.0 V 

‐ Nominal current for 45 °C: 1.0 A 

‐ D1 Total lightning impulse current (10/350): 

10 kA 

‐ Series impedance per wire: 1.0 Ohm 

‐ Shock test : EN 60068-2-27 (Ea test) 

‐ Examination of vibration performance 

(sinuoidal): EN 60068-2-6 (Fc test) 

‐ Test for vibration performance (coincidental): 

EN 60068-2-64 (Fh test) 

77 4900 01 

unit: mm 

66 



Functions 

SPD module for network cables 

DPA M CLE RJ45B 48 

Surge arrester class E, fully shielded, tested acc. 

to EN 61643-21 for universal use acc. to 

EN 50173 up to 48 V DC for the protection of 4 

pairs of data network interfaces via RJ45 socket, 

for single application or application in 19 inch 

cabinets, space-saving, width 19 mm. 

‐ Max. continuous operating DC voltage: 48 V 

‐ Nominal current: 1 A 

‐ C2 Total nominal discharge current (8/20) line- 

PG: 10 kA 

‐ For mounting on 35 mm top hat rail acc. to 

EN 60715 


77 4900 02 

unit: mm 


67


Building 1 

Building 2 

ComTerminals 

ComStation TEL 

NF1b 

NF1a 

Base part 


77490000 

NF2a 

NF2b 

DG 

DH 

Base part 


77490000 

1 2 

2' 1' 

3 4 *) 

4' 3' 

1 2 

Voltage surge protection 

speech wires 

SPD module 

for speech and data wires 

Order no. 77490001 


data wires 

SPD module 



2' 1' 

NF1b' 

NF1a' 

Protected 

NF2a' 

NF2b' 

3 4 *) 

4' 3' 

DL NC 

DL' 


network cables 

SPD module 

for network cables 


DG' 

DH' 

Protected 

NF1b 

NF1a 

Base part 


77490000 

NF2a 

NF2b 

DG 

DH 

Base part 


77490000 

1 2 

Corridor displays 


speech wires 

OSYlinkmodules 

2' 1' 

SPD module 



3 4 *) 

4' 3' 

1 2 

Group 1 


data wires 

SPD module 



2' 1' 

NF1b'' 

NF1a'' 

Protected 

NF2a'' 

NF2b'' 

3 4 *) 

4' 3' 

DL NC 

DL'' 

DG'' 

DH'' 

Protected 

Main building 

connection point 1 

*) Mounting on earthed top hat rail. 

*) 



SPD module 



OSY‐ControlCenter *) Mounting on earthed top hat rail. 

*) 

Main building 

connection point 2 

Cables guided through the earth. 

68 


12. Functional checks 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Check each room for possible faults. 

Test light call function for each room. 

Test functions between the rooms. 

Test the ward console. 

Test mobile console. 

Test central console. 

Test functions between the wards. 

NOTE ! National standards for nurse call systems in the relevant countries must 

be complied with. 

NOTE ! If the nurse call system shall comply with the German standard 

DIN VDE 0834, then all tests and checks must be executed as prescribed in 

this standard. Note: The tests and checks as prescribed by DIN VDE 0834 may 

go beyond the tests and checks as described in this manual. 


69


12.1 Checking the room installation 

12.1.1 Checking every room for faults 

 

 

 

 

ComTerminal Flamenco or RoomTerminal Flamenco: Perform the test RAN, 

as prescribed in the product leaflet for the Terminal. The LEDs of all operational 

room devices will flash. After that call for the state in the display. If 

“OK“ is displayed, the number of operational room devices equals to the 

RAN number set at the Terminal. 

No fault may be indicated at any of these devices for the room: 

ComStation BUS-C , ComStation CT Flamenco, ComStation T Flamenco, Com‐ 

Station PC , ManagementCenter PC , OSYnet‐SafetyController (output for 

fault messages). 

Use the patient handset or the pear push switch to check for correct light 

switching. 

Use the patient handset to check for correct radio reception and TV sound. 

70 



12.1.2 Check light call function for each room 

12.1.2.1 Check each room 

The following test is performed to check all call devices in the room: 

Start 

yes 

LED for 

call button (red) 

weak light. 

no 

Correct the fault. 

Press call button 

(red). 

LED for call button 

(red) bright. 

Room lamp: 

Red flashing. 

Activate 

presence 1 

(green). 

LED in presence 

button (green). 

is on 

Room lamp: 

Red is on. 

Green is on. 

Deactivate 

presence 1 

(green). 


(red) 

weak light. 


button (green) 

is off. 

Room lamp: 

Lights are off. 

Press call button 

(red). 


(red) bright. 

Room lamp: 

Red flashing. 

Activate 

presence 2 

(yellow). 


button (yellow) 

is on. 

Room lamp: 

Red is on. 

Yellow is on. 

Deactivate 

presence 2 

(yellow). 


(red) weak light 

LED in 

presence button 

(yellow) is off. 

Room lamp: 



71


12.1.2.2 Check function from WCs en suite to room 

The following test is performed to check all call devices from WCs en suite to 

rooms: 

Start 

yes 

LED for WC call 

button (red) 

weak light. 

no 

Correct the fault. 

Press WC call 

button (red). 

LED for WC call 

button (red) bright. 

LED for WC 

cancel button 

(grey) is on. 

Room lamps 

77 0170 00 

77 0171 00: 

Red flashing. 

Room lamp 

77 0170 01: 

White flashing. 

Room lamps 

77 0170 10 

77 0171 10 

Red flashing + 

White flashing. 

Press WC 

cancel button 

(grey). 

Room lamps 

7 0170 00 

77 0171 00: 

Red is on. 

Room lamp 

77 0170 01: 

White is on. 

Room lamps 

77 0170 10 

77 0171 10 

Red is on + 

White is on. 

Press WC 

cancel button 

(grey) again. 

LED for WC- call 

button (red) 

weak light. 

LED for WC 

cancel button 

(grey) is off. 

Room lamps 

77 0170 00 

77 0171 00: 


Room lamp 

77 0170 01: 

Lights are off 

Room lamps 

77 0170 10 

77 0171 10 


72 



12.1.2.3 Testing of code blue / cardiac alarm 

Start 

The following test is performed for the code blue/cardiac alarm button at the 

ComTerminal (if available), at the RoomTerminal, and for all separate code blue/ 

cardiac alarm switches: 

Activate 

presence 1 

(green). 

LED for presence 

button 1 (green) 

is on. 

Room lamps 

77 0170 00 

77 0171 00 

77 0170 10 

77 0171 10: 

Green is on. 

Press code 

blue/cardiac alarm 

button (blue). 

LED for code 


button (blue) is on. 

Room lamps 

77 0170 00 

77 0171 00: 

77 0170 10 

77 0171 10 

Red flicker. 

Green is on. 

Room lamp 

77 0170 01: 

Blue flickers. 

Activate 

presence 2 

(yellow). 

LED for 


(yellow) is on. 

Room lamps 

77 0170 00 

77 0171 00: 

77 0170 10 

77 0171 10 

Red is on. 

Green is on. 

Yellow is on 

Room lamp 

77 0170 01: 

Blue is on. 

Deactivate 

presence 2 

(yellow). 

LED for code 


button (blue) 

weak light. 

LED for 


(yellow) is off. 

Room lamps 

77 0170 00 

77 0171 00: 

77 0170 10 

77 0171 10 

Red is off. 

Green is on. 

Yellow is off. 

Room lamp 

77 0170 01: 


Deactivate 

presence 1 

(green). 

LED for 


(green) is off. 

Room lamps 

77 0170 00 

77 0171 00 

77 0170 10 

77 0171 10: 



73


12.2 Checking the ward functions 

12.2.1 Call forwarding 

When a call is not answered within a programmed time frame, it will be forwarded 

to all rooms with activated presence states. Forwarded calls are 

presented on the display at the ComTerminal and at the RoomTerminal Flamenco, 

and a tone also signals such calls. Furthermore a call tone will sound 

at the staff presence combination with call tone wp (order no. 70 0119 00) as 

well as at the cancel switch/WC with call tone wp (order no. 70 0183 00). 

12.2.1.1 Rooms with ComTerminal Flamenco 

Refer to the operating instructions for the ComTerminal Flamenco for details on 

the handling of forwarded calls. 

Check for each room: 

Is the call forwarding tone audible at the ComTerminal? 

Does the display of the ComTerminals show the correct room number? 

Can the call be answered? Can a speech connection be established to the 

call location? 

Can calls of call type “Call“ be cancelled from the remote position? 

12.2.1.2 Rooms with RoomTerminal Flamenco 

Refer to the operating instructions for the ComTerminal Flamenco for details on 

the handling of forwarded calls. 


Is the call forwarding tone audible at the RoomTerminal? 

Does the display of the RoomTerminals show the correct room number? 

Can the call be acknowledged? 

12.2.1.3 Rooms with ControlTerminal Flamenco 


Is the call forwarding tone audible at the staff presence combination with call 

tone wp (order no. 70 0119 00) and at the cancel switch/WC with call tone 

(order no. 70 0183 00)? 

12.2.2 Corridor display 

Check whether calls in the ward are correctly indicated at the corridor display. 

74 



12.2.3 Direction lamps 

Check each direction lamp for the correct indication of the direction for the allocated 

rooms. 

12.2.4 Call devices 

Check whether calls from additional call devices (e.g. radio triggers and pear 

push switches) are indicated as desired. 


75


12.3 Checking the consoles 

Perform this test for all installed consoles: Ward consoles, mobile consoles, 

central consoles. For information on the correct operation and use of the consoles 

refer to the relevant operating instructions. 

Two persons are required for executing these checks. One person will handle 

the console, and the other person will proceed from one room to another. 


Is the room number correctly displayed? 

Do all types of calls arrive at the console and are they signalled in the appropriate 

manner (e.g. normal call, WC call, diagnostic call, emergency call 1, 

emergency call 2, WC call, WC emergency call, cardiac alarm, telephone 

call, door call)? 

Are bed numbers (channel numbers) correctly presented? 

Can calls be answered at the console? 

Can a speech connection be established with the console via voice devices 

(ComTerminal, patient handset)? 

Are presence states correctly displayed? 

Can announcements be broadcast from the console? 

NOTE ! If you note that a false bed number has been set at the connection 

socket combi bedhead unit, the medical supply unit must be opened in order 

to set the correct number (refer to documents on the medical supply unit). 

12.4 Checking functions between wards 

Check: 

Can ward coupling be activated at the ward console? 

Correct function of group lamps. 

76 


13. Spare parts 

Functions 

Terminating resistor 120 Ohm 

as bus terminating element in the final bus device. 

Order No. 

00 0040 76 

Fuse 1 A F 

e.g. for corridor display Alpha 16, corridor display 

Alpha 16, double-sided. 

00 0130 24 

Mains fuse, front plate (5 x 20) T 5.0 A 

e.g. for power supply unit and power supply unit 

UPS, power supply unit UPS 60. 

00 0130 41 

Output fuse, bottom 15 A FKS 

e.g. for power supply unit and power supply unit 


00 0132 02 

Battery fuse, internal 20 A FKS 

e.g. for power supply unit UPS, battery set for 

UPS 60. 

00 0132 03 

Push-wire connector for junction boxes, 00 0210 21 

5-pole 

e.g. for connection socket ComStation, Control‐ 

Terminal Flamenco, ControlTerminal with doorplate 

Flamenco. 

Wire cross-section: 0.5 - 2.5 mm 2 

Clamp for battery connection, 2 pole 

e.g. for power supply unit UPS 60. 

00 0211 20 

Screw connecting clamp, 6‐pole 

e.g. for OSYlink-Door entry speaker, OSY-ControlCenter 

(data wires). 

00 0211 32 


77


Functions 

Screw connecting clamp, voltage supply, 

4‐pole 

e.g. for OSYlink-Door entry speaker, OSYlink- 

Group lamp, OSYlink-Announcement, OSYlink‐ 

Universal and for OSY‐ControlCenter (DC/DC 

converter). 


00 0211 33 


e.g. for OSYlink-Door entry speaker, OSYlink- 

Group lamp, OSYlink-Announcement, OSYlink‐ 

Universal, OSY-ControlCenter (audio wires). 

00 0211 36 


e.g. for connection socket with call switch bedhead 

unit. 

00 0211 37 


e.g. for OSYlink‐Universal. 

00 0211 38 

Clamp for control and indicator outputs, 

7-pole 

for power supply unit and power supply unit 


00 0211 39 

Clamp for mains connection, 3-pole 



00 0211 40 

Clamp for 24 V connection, 4-pole 



00 0211 41 

78 



Functions 

Cage clamp, 10‐pole 

for OSY‐ControlCenter. 


00 0211 44 

Bridging contact EBP 2 - 5 

e.g. for ControlTerminal Flamenco, ControlTerminal 

with doorplate Flamenco. 

00 0220 52 

Bridging contact EB 2 - 5 for control 

clamps “x“ and “y“ 

for power supply unit UPS, power supply unit 

UPS 60. 

00 0223 56 

Plug-in screw terminal with fuse holder 

e.g. for corridor display Alpha 16, corridor display 

Alpha 16, double-sided. 

00 0224 81 

Rechargeable lead-gel batteries, Type 

BAT 24-7 

consisting of 2 batteries for power supply unit 

UPS, order no. 77 3400 00. 

00 0648 85 

Rechargeable lead-gel battery, Type BAT 

12-24 

Battery for battery set for UPS 60, 

order no. 77 3450 00 

00 0648 87 

LED module, red 

for group lamps, direction lamp. 

13 5200 00A 

LED module, green 

for group lamps, direction lamp. 

13 5202 00A 


79


Functions 

Connecting cable 

e.g. for connection socket with call switch or for 

connection socket with call switch bedhead unit 

for the connection of an external call device to 

the additional external call input. 


50 0308 02 

Connector, 3-pole 

for switches and room lamps. 

70 0807 00 

Connector, 4‐pole 

for connection socket with call switch. 

70 0807 01 

Fixing clamp 

for switches. 

70 0808 00 

Overvoltage protection circuit 70 0890 97 

80 



Functions 

LED module, red 

for room lamps. 


77 0190 00 

LED module, yellow 


77 0190 01 

LED module, green 


77 0190 02 

LED module, white 


77 0190 03 

LED module, blue 


77 0190 04 

OSYnet connecting plug 

for OSYnet‐Y‐RepeaterOpto. 

77 0950 00 


81


82 


14. Product leaflets 

Each device is furnished with a product leaflet with information on mounting and 

connection details. In addition, we have collated the relevant product leaflets 

in this chapter of the technical manual. 

WARNING ! Do not install the power supply unit at this time. The mounting and 

installation of the various devices and equipment shall be executed with no 

electric power in the system. Otherwise there is the ever present danger of a 

short-circuit situation! 

NOTE ! Check that the order no. on the products is the same as the order no. 

on the installation plans. Example: Switches for WC call have the same housing 

as the switches for normal call, however, they are programmed differently. 

Order no. Product name Page 

Display equipment 

77 0112 02 Group lamp, 2 groups 88 



77 0150 00 Corridor display Alpha 16 89-90 

77 0160 00 Corridor display Alpha 16, double-sided 91-92 

77 0170 00 Room lamp, 3 sections 93 

77 0170 01 Room lamp code blue/cardiac alarm, WC 93 

77 0170 10 Room lamp, 4 sections 94 

77 0171 00 Room lamp, 3 sections, with doorplate 94 

77 0171 10 Room lamp, 4 sections, with doorplate 94 

77 0182 10 Room lamp Universal, 2 sections 95-96 

77 0181 10 Room lamp Universal, 3 sections, with 

97 

doorplate 

Switches 

70 0106 00 Pneumatic call switch 100 

70 0106 01 Pneumatic call switch/WC 100 

70 0111 00 Call switch wp 101 

70 0111 01 Call switch/WC wp 101 

70 0112 00 Staff presence switch wp 102 

70 0113 00 Cancel switch/WC wp 102 

70 0114 00 Code blue / cardiac alarm switch wp 101 

70 0115 00 Pull cord call switch wp 103 


Page 83



Product name 

Page 

70 0115 01 Pull cord call switch/WC wp 103 

70 0117 00 Call switch/WC with cancel switch wp 104 

70 0118 00 Call switch with privacy switch wp 104 

70 0119 00 Staff presence combination with call tone 105 

wp 

70 0183 00 Cancel switch/WC with call tone wp 105 

Room terminals 

77 0510 00 ComTerminal Flamenco 108-111 

77 0520 00 RoomTerminal Flamenco 112-115 

77 0550 00 ControlTerminal Flamenco 116-118 

77 0551 00 ControlTerminal with doorplate Flamenco 119-121 


70 0171 03 Connection socket with Call switch 124 

70 0171 50 Connection socket with Call switch, bedhead 

125-126 

unit 

70 0424 00 Connection socket combi 127-128 

70 0434 00 Connection socket combi, bedhead unit 129-130 

70 0449 00 Connection socket combi universal 131-132 

70 0448 00 Connection socket combi, bedhead unit, 133-134 

universal 

74 0452 30 Connection socket ComStation 135-136 

Consoles 

77 0602 00 ComStation PC 138 

77 0606 00 ComStation CT Flamenco 139-140 

77 0606 20 ComStation T Flamenco 141-142 

77 0610 00 ManagementCenter PC 143 

Interfaces in the room 

70 0360 10 IR TV control module universal 146-147 

70 0360 11 IR TV control module universal Audio 148-149 

70 0840 00 RAN interface normal call 150 

70 0841 00 RAN interface code blue / cardiac 150 

70 0842 00 RAN interface telephone call 151 

70 0860 00 RAN interface TV 152-153 

70 0848 00 RAN interface universal 154 

70 0880 00 RAN interface with speech 155 

11 5350 00 Telephone interface relay 156 

Interfaces in the group 

77 0801 00 OSYlink‐Door entry speaker 158 

Page 84 



Order no. Product name 

Page 

77 0802 00 OSYlink‐Group lamp 160-161 

77 0803 00 OSYlink‐Universal 162-163 

77 0804 00 OSYlink‐Announcement 164-165 

77 0870 00 OSYlink AS-CCS 166-168 

77 0872 00 OSYlink AS-L200 166-168 

Accessories 

70 0790 00 Sound detector 170 

70 0812 00 Diagnostic connection cable 171 

77 0901 00 Smoke detector 172 

System devices 

77 2x0x 00 OSY‐ControlCenter 173-178 

77 2100 00 OSYnet‐SafetyController 179-180 

Power supply 

77 3400 00 Power supply unit UPS 182-187 

77 3400 10 Power supply unit UPS 60 188-193 

77 3401 00 Power supply unit 194-196 

77 3450 00 Battery set for UPS 60 197-200 

Installation 

77 4000 00 OSYnet‐Y‐RepeaterOpto 202 

77 4001 00 OSYnet‐Gateway 203 


Page 85



Page 86


14.1 Display equipment 

77 0112 02 Group lamp, 2 groups 





77 0170 00 Room lamp, 3 sections 

77 0170 01 Room lamp Code blue / cardiac alarm, WC 

77 0170 10 Room lamp, 4 sections 

77 0171 00 Room lamp, 3 sections, with doorplate 

77 0171 10 Room lamp, 4 sections, with doorplate 

77 0182 10 Room lamp Universal, 2 sections 

77 0181 10 Room lamp Universal, 3 sections, with doorplate 


Page 87

Installationsanleitung D Installation Instructions GB 

Gruppenleuchte, 2‐teilig, Best.‐Nr. 77 0112 02 



Signalleuchte für mehrere Gruppen zur gruppenbezogenen Signalisierung von Rufen. 

(2-teilig: 2 Gruppen, 3-teilig: 3 Gruppen, 4-teilig: 4 Gruppen) Je Gruppe stehen zwei 

Einzelleuchtfelder (rot und grün) mit Anschlussmöglichkeiten zur Signalisierung von Rufen 

und Rufstatus zur Verfügung. Inkl. LED‐Module. 

Abmessungen (HxBxT) ohne Montagerahmen: 

2-teilig: 160 x 86 x 70 mm 

3-teilig: 240 x 86 x 70 mm 

4-teilig: 320 x 86 x 70 mm 

Betriebsstrom pro Leuchtfeld: 75 mA 

Hinweis! Die vollständige Installation des Systems ist im technischen 

Handbuch beschrieben. 

Group lamp, 2 groups, order no. 77 0112 02 



Signal lamps for several groups for group related display of calls: 2 groups, 3 groups or 4 

groups. Two single sections (red and green) per group with connection possibilities for 

signalling of calls and call status incl. LED modules. 

Dimensions (HxWxD) without mountnig frame: 

2 groups: 160 x 86 x 70 mm 

3 groups: 240 x 86 x 70 mm 

4 groups: 320 x 86 x 70 mm 

Operating current per light section: 75 mA 

Note! The complete installation of the system is described in the technical 

manual. 

Anschlüsse / Connections: 

Plus‐Pol: Ruf (rot) 

positive terminal: call (red) 

Tunstall GmbH, Orkotten 66, D-48291 Telgte, www.tunstall.de 

Einbaudose und Befestigungsschrauben für die Wandmontage nicht im Lieferumfang. 

Back box and fixing screws for wall mounting not included in delivery. 

Plus-Pol: Status (grün) 

positive terminal: status (green) 

Gemeinsamer Minus‐Pol 

collective negative terminal 

Rotes Leuchtfeld: Ruf 

red light section: call 

LED‐Modul, rot / LED module, red 

LED‐Modul, grün / LED module, green 

Grünes Leuchtfeld: Status 

green light section: status 

77 0112 02 

Gruppenleuchte, 2‐teilig 

Group lamp, 2 groups 

77 0113 02 



77 0114 02 



00 8802 47, 09/11 (Rev. 2.0) 

Page 88


Flurdisplay Alpha 16, Best.‐Nr. 77 0150 00 

Display zur alphanumerischen Anzeige von Rufen und allgemeinen Systeminformationen. 

16 Zeichen, alphanumerisch 

Automatische Anzeige als Laufschrift bei längeren Texten 

Tongeber zur Anzeige von nachgesendeten Rufen 

Lautsprecher z.B. für Durchsagen und Signaltöne 

Stromaufnahme: 300 mA (Durchschnitt) 



Corridor Display Alpha 16, order no. 77 0150 00 

Display for alphanumeric indication of calls and general system information. 

16 digits, alphanumeric 

Longer texts are automatically displayed as ticker 

Buzzer for signalling forwarded calls 

Loudspeaker, e.g. for announcements or signal tones 

Supply current: 300 mA (average) 


manual. 

Adresse einstellen (1 - 110) Setting of address (1 - 110) 

Zum Einstellen der Adresse dienen die Codierschalter 1 bis 7 mit den Werten 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 

32, 64. Entsprechenden Schalter auf ON stellen. 

Beispiele: Adresse 1 wird durch Einschalten des Codierschalters 1 eingestellt. 

Adresse 4 wird durch Einschalten des Codierschalters 3 eingestellt. 

Adresse 24 wird durch Addition gebildet: Schalter 4 und 5 auf ON stellen (8+16=24). 

Wenn die Adresse während des Betriebs geändert wird, muss anschließend ein Reset 

durchgeführt werden. Für den Reset Codierschalter 10 für eine Sekunde auf ON setzen. 

For setting the address please use the code switches 1 to 7 with the values 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 

64. Set the appropriate switch to ON. 

Examples: Address 1 is set by using the code switch 1. Address 4 is set by using the code 

switch 3. Address 24 is selected through addition: coding switch 4 and 5 (8 + 16 = 24). 

After the address is changed while system operation a reset has to be made. For the reset set 

code switch 10 for one second to ON. 

Montage 

Das Flurdisplay ist vorgesehen zur Montage in Fluren oder Diensträumen. 

Das mitgelieferte Zubehör dient zur Deckenmontage. 

Mounting 

The corridor display is designed for mounting in corridors or duty rooms. 

The standard accessory is used for ceiling mounting. 

1 


785 mm 

570 mm 

Gesamtgewicht ca. 3 kg 

Total weight approx. 3 kg 

2 

4 

8 

16 

32 

64 

Test 

Reset 

Anschlussleitung von Rohrende 

bis Kabelende, ca. 750 mm 

Connection Cable from tube end 

up to cable end, approx. 750 mm 

Adresse 

Address 

Rohr Länge ca. 645 mm 

Tube length approx. 645 mm 

A 

Das Seil durch die Hülse A der Öse 

schieben. Das Seil arretiert automatisch. 

Seil bis zur gewünschten Länge 

abschneiden. (Zum Lösen der 

Arretierung Hülse A eindrücken.) 

Slide the rope through the sleeve A of 

the eye. The rope is fixed automatically. 

Cut off the rope to the desired length. 

(For pulling out the rope press sleeve A.) 

770 mm 

77 0150 00 

Flurdisplay Alpha 16 

Corridor Display Alpha 16 

35 

00 8802 43, 02/13 (Rev. 3.0) 

Page 89

Anschlüsse D Connections GB 

Anschluss 

Das Flurdisplay wird direkt an den Gruppenbus OSYnet angeschlossen. Die freien 

Drahtenden der Anschlussleitung dienen zum bauseitigen Anschluss. 

Funktionstest 

Wenn das Flurdisplay angeschlossen ist, sollte ein Funktionstest durchgeführt werden. 

Zum Starten des Funktionstest Codierschalter 9 “Test” auf ON setzen. 

Das Display durchläuft nun die im Folgenden beschriebenen Testschritte. Jeder Schritt 

dauert ca. 2 Sekunden. 

Connection 

The corridor display is directly connected to the group bus OSYnet. Use the free wire ends of 

the connection cable for on site connection. 

Functional test 

When the corridor display is connected, a functional test should be carried out. 

To start the functional test set code switch 9 “Test” to ON. 

The corridor display will run through the test steps described in the following table. Each 

step takes approx. 2 seconds. 

Display zeigt: Test ok, wenn... Was wird getestet? 

Display shows: Test ok, if... What is being tested? 

Start Test 

Funktionstest startet. 

Start Test 

Functional test starts. 

Tunstall GmbH 

Display Check 

0123456789abcdef 

Die 3 Texte werden 

nacheinander angezeigt. 

Optische Anzeige. 


Display Check 


The 3 texts are displayed one 

after the other. 

Optical display. 

Buzzer test 

Tongeber-Test startet. 

Buzzer test 

Buzzer test starts. 

Buzzer: low 

Leiser Signalton ertönt. 

Tongeber‐Einstellung “leise”. 

Buzzer: low 

Low signal tone sounds. 

Buzzer setting “low”. 

Buzzer: medium 

Mittel-lauter Signalton ertönt. 

Tongeber-Einstellung “mittel”. 


Medium signal tone sounds. 

Buzzer setting “medium”. 

Buzzer: loud 

Lauter Signalton ertönt. 

Tongeber-Einstellung “laut”. 

Buzzer: loud 

Loud signal tone sounds. 

Buzzer setting “loud”. 

Buzzer OFF 

Tongeber wird ausgeschaltet. 

Buzzer OFF 

Buzzer is switched off. 

Speech relay 1 ON 

Leises Klicken eines Relais 

ist zu hören. 

Sprechkanal 1 der Rufanlage. 


Low relay click can be heard. 

Speech channel 1 of system. 



ist zu hören. 



Low relay click can be heard. 


Speech relays OFF 

Klicken von Relais ist zu hören. 

Sprechkanäle werden geschlossen. 


Relay click can be heard. 

Speech channels are closed. 

IIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIIII 

(Anzeige in Laufschrift) 

To stop the test: 

DIP switch 9 -> OFF 

End of Test 

00:00 (Uhrzeit) 

Anzeige ohne “Löcher”. 

Löcher zeigen defekte LEDs an. 

Funktionsfähigkeit der LEDs. 

Zum Beenden des Tests den Codierschalter 9 auf OFF setzen. 

Test beendet. 

Wenn OSYnet angeschlossen: Anzeige der Systemuhrzeit. 

Sonst läuft die interne Uhr des Flurdisplays ab 00:00 Uhr. 

Anschlussleitung 

connection cable 

schwarz/black: 

blau/blue: 

rot/red: 

braun/brown: 

weiß/white: 

grau/grey: 

rosa/pink: 

gelb/yellow: 

grün/green: 

violett/violet: 


(displayed as ticker) 



End of Test 

00:00 (time) 

0 V 

0 V 

24 V 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

DL 

DH 

DG 

Display without “holes”. 

Holes show defective LEDs. 

LED function. 

To stop the test set code switch 9 to OFF. 

Test ended. 

If OSYnet is connected: System time is displayed. 

Otherwise internal clock of corridor display starts at 00:00 h. 

bauseitiger Anschluss 

on site connection 

Si * ) 

OSYnet OSYnet Ip Ip 


*) Steck‐Schraubklemme mit Si‐Halter (00 0224 81), Sicherung F1A (00 0130 24) 

*) Plug-in screw terminal with fuseholder (00 0224 81), Fuse F1A (00 0130 24) 

1 

2 

4 

8 

16 

32 

64 

Adresse 

Address 

Test 

Reset 

Rote Kontroll‐LED blinkt langsam 

(1 Sek. EIN / 1 Sek. AUS), wenn Verbindung zum OSYnet ok ist. 

Sonst liegt eine Störung vor. 

Red control LED flashes slowly 

(1 sec ON, 1 sec OFF), if connection to OSYnet is ok. 

Otherwise there is a fault. 

77 0150 00 

Flurdisplay Alpha 16 

Corridor Display Alpha 16 

00 8802 43, 02/13 (Rev. 3.0) 

Page 90


Flurdisplay Alpha 16, doppelseitig, Best.‐Nr. 77 0160 00 

Doppelseitiges Display zur Anzeige von Rufen und allgem. Systeminformationen. 

16 Zeichen alphanumerisch 

Automatische Anzeige als Laufschrift bei längeren Texten 

Tongeber zur Anzeige von nachgesendeten Rufen 

Lautsprecher z.B. für Durchsagen und Signaltöne 

Stromaufnahme: 600 mA (Durchschnitt) 



Corridor Display Alpha 16, double‐sided, order no. 77 0160 00 

Double-sided display for indication of calls and general system information. 

16 digits, alphanumeric 

Longer texts are automatically displayed as ticker 

Tone generator for signalling forwarded calls 

Loudspeaker, e.g. for announcements or signal tones 

Supply current: 600 mA (average) 


manual. 

Montage 

Das Flurdisplay ist vorgesehen zur Montage in Fluren oder Diensträumen. 

Das mitgelieferte Zubehör dient zur Deckenmontage. 

Mounting 

The corridor display is designed for mounting in corridors or duty rooms. 

The standard accessory is used for ceiling mounting. 

570 mm 

Das Seil durch die Hülse A der Öse schieben. Das 

Seil arretiert automatisch. Seil bis zur gewünschten 

Länge abschneiden. (Zum Lösen der Arretierung 

Hülse A eindrücken.) 

Slide the rope through the sleeve A of the eye. The 

rope is fixed automatically. Cut off the rope to the 

desired length. 

(For pulling out the rope press sleeve A) 


785 mm 

Gesamtgewicht ca. 6 kg 

total weight approx. 6 kg 

Anschlussleitung von Rohrende 

bis Kabelende, ca. 750 mm 

Connection Cable from tube end 

up to cable end, approx. 750 mm 

Rohr Länge ca. 645 mm 

Tube length approx. 645 mm 

A 

770 mm 

77 0160 00 

Flurdisplay Alpha 16, doppelseitig 

Corridor Display Alpha 16, double‐sided 

120 mm 

Die beiden unteren Schrauben in 

die anderen Löcher einschrauben. 

Srew the two bottom screws in 

the other holes. 

Option: 

Gewinkelte Montage für bessere Lesbarkeit 

Angled mounting for better readability 

Gerade Montage 

Upright mounting 

Gewinkelte Montage 

Angled mounting 

00 8802 44, 02/13 (Rev. 3.0) 

Page 91


Anschluss 

Das Flurdisplay wird direkt an den Gruppenbus OSYnet angeschlossen. Die freien 

Drahtenden der Anschlussleitung dienen zum bauseitigen Anschluss. 

Connection 

The corridor display is directly connected to the group bus OSYnet. Use the free wire ends of 

the connection cable for on site connection. 


In einem der beiden Displays befindet sich hinter der seitlichen Schutzkappe ein 10‐teiliger 

Codierschalter. Zum Einstellen der Adresse dienen die Codierschalter 1 bis 7 mit den 

Werten 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64. Entsprechenden Schalter auf ON stellen. 




Wenn die Adresse während des Betriebs geändert wird, muss anschließend ein Reset 

durchgeführt werden. Für den Reset Codierschalter 10 für eine Sekunde auf ON setzen. 

Funktionstest 

Nach dem Anschließen des Flurdisplays sollte ein Funktionstest durchgeführt werden. 

Zum Starten des Funktionstest Codierschalter 9 “Test” auf ON setzen. 

Das Display durchläuft nun die im Folgenden beschriebenen Testschritte. Jeder Schritt 

dauert ca. 2 Sekunden. Sie müssen den Test zweimal durchführen, d.h. jeweils ein Display 

beobachten. 

Behind the protection cover at the side of one display there is a 10 part code switch. For setting 

the address please use the code switches 1 to 7 with the values 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64. Set the 

appropriate switch to ON. 

Examples: Address 1 is set by using the code switch 1. Address 4 is set by using the code 

switch 3. Address 24 is selected through addition: coding switch 4 and 5 (8 + 16 = 24). 

After the address is changed while system operation a reset has to be made. For the reset set 

code switch 10 for one second to ON. 

Functional test 

After the corridor display has been connected, a functional test should be carried out. 

To start the functional test set code switch 9 “Test” to ON. 

The corridor display will run through the test steps described in the following table. Each 

step takes approx. 2 seconds. You have to carry out the test twice, i.e. check each display 

separately. 

Display zeigt: Test ok, wenn... Was wird getestet? 

Display shows: Test ok, if... What is being tested? 

Start Test 

Funktionstest startet. 

Start Test 

Functional test starts. 


Display Check 


Die 3 Texte werden 

nacheinander angezeigt. 

Optische Anzeige. 


Display Check 


The 3 texts are displayed one 

after the other. 

Optical display. 

Buzzer test 

Tongeber-Test startet. 

Buzzer test 

Buzzer test starts. 

Buzzer: low 

Leiser Signalton ertönt. 

Tongeber‐Einstellung “leise”. 

Buzzer: low 

Low signal tone sounds. 

Buzzer setting “low”. 


Mittel-lauter Signalton ertönt. 

Tongeber-Einstellung “mittel”. 


Medium signal tone sounds. 

Buzzer setting “medium”. 

Buzzer: loud 

Buzzer OFF 





(Anzeige in Laufschrift) 



End of Test 

Lauter Signalton ertönt. 

Tongeber-Einstellung “laut”. 

Tongeber wird ausgeschaltet. 



ist zu hören. 1) 



Klicken von Relais 


Anzeige ohne “Löcher”. 

Löcher zeigen defekte LEDs an. 


Sprechkanäle werden geschlossen. 

Funktionsfähigkeit der LEDs. 

Zum Beenden des Tests den Codierschalter 9 auf OFF setzen. 

Test beendet. 

00:00 (Uhrzeit) 

Wenn OSYnet angeschlossen: Anzeige der Systemuhrzeit. 

Sonst läuft interne Uhr des Flurdisplays ab 00:00 Uhr. 

1) Die Relais für die beiden Sprechkanäle befinden sich nur in dem Display, in dem sich 

auch der Codierschalter befindet. 

Buzzer: loud 

Buzzer OFF 





(displayed as ticker) 



End of Test 

Loud signal tone sounds. 

Buzzer is switched off. 

Low relay click can be heard. 1) 

Low relay click can be heard. 1) 

Relay click can be heard. 1) 

Display without “holes”. 

Holes show defective LEDs. 

Buzzer setting “loud”. 



Speech channels are closed. 

LED function. 

To stop the test set code switch 9 to OFF. 

Test ended. 

If OSYnet is connected: System time is displayed. 

00:00 (time) 

Otherwise internal clock of corridor display starts at 00:00 h. 

1) The relays for the speech channels are only in the display with the coding switch. 



connection cable 

schwarz/black: 

blau/blue: 

rot/red: 

braun/brown: 

weiß/white: 

grau/grey: 

rosa/pink: 

gelb/yellow: 

grün/green: 

violett/violet: 

0 V 

0 V 

24 V 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

DL 

DH 

DG 

bauseitiger Anschluss 

on site connection 

Si * ) 

OSYnet OSYnet Ip Ip 

*) Steck‐Schraubklemme mit Si‐Halter (00 0224 81) Sicherung F1A (00 0130 24) 

*) Plug-in screw terminal with fuseholder (00 0224 81) Fuse F1A (00 0130 24) 


(1 Sek. EIN / 1 Sek. AUS), wenn 

Verbindung zum OSYnet ok ist. 

Sonst liegt eine Störung vor. 

Red control LED flashes 

slowly (1 sec ON, 1 sec OFF), 

if connection to OSYnet is ok. 


1 

2 

4 

8 

16 

32 

64 

Adresse 

Address 

Test 

Reset 

77 0160 00 

Flurdisplay Alpha 16, doppelseitig 

Corridor Display Alpha 16, double‐sided 

00 8802 44, 02/13 (Rev. 3.0) 

Page 92


Zimmerleuchte, 3-teilig, Best.‐Nr. 77 0170 00 

zur optischen Anzeige von allen Rufarten und Personalanwesenheiten. Wandmontage. 

Zimmerleuchte Alarm, WC, Best.‐Nr. 77 0170 01 

als Ergänzung zu Zimmerleuchte 77 0170 00 zur optischen Anzeige von Alarm‐ und/oder 

WC‐Rufen. Wandmontage wahlweise vor der Zimmertür neben Zimmerleuchte 77 0170 00 

zur eindeutigen Anzeige von WC‐ und/oder Alarmruf, oder Montage im Zimmer am 

WC‐Eingang, um die Richtung zum WC‐Ruf anzuzeigen. 

Zimmerleuchte, 4‐teilig, Best.‐Nr. 77 0170 10 

zur optischen Anzeige von allen Rufarten und Personalanwesenheiten sowie zusätzliche 

Anzeige für WC‐Ruf. Wandmontage 



Achtung! Die Leiterplatte und die LED‐Module sind mit elektrostatisch gefährdeten 

Bauteilen bestückt. Vermeiden Sie deshalb eine direkte Berührung. 

Room lamp, 3 sections, order no. 77 0170 00 

for optical signalling of all call types and staff presences. Wall mounting. 

Room lamp code blue / cardiac alarm, WC, order no. 77 0170 01 

as complement to room lamp 77 0170 00 for optical signalling of code blue/cardiac alarm 

and/or WC calls. Wall mounting either in the corridor be-sides the room lamp 77 0170 00 

for explicit signalling of WC calls and/or code blue/cardiac alarm or it is installed besides 

the WC door in the patient room for displaying the direction to the WC call. 

Room lamp, 4 sections, order no. 77 0170 10 

for optical signalling of all call types and staff presences as well as additional display for 

WC call. Wall mounting. 


manual. 

Attention! The printed circuit board and the LED modules include electrostatic 

sensitive components. Avoid touching. 


Montage 

1* Einbaudose 

2 Gehäuse‐Rückwand 

3* Anschlussklemme (70 0807 00) 

4 Leiterplatte mit LED‐Modulen 

5 Dekorrahmen 

6 Befestigungsschrauben 

7 Lichtkuppel mit Trenneinsatz 

* ist nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten. 

1. Gehäuse‐Rückwand 2 mit den Schrauben der Einbaudose an der Einbaudose 1 

festschrauben. Einbaurichtung beachten, siehe Markierung im Gehäuse. 

2. Angeschlossene Anschlussklemme 3 in die eingebaute Buchse der Leiterplatte 4 

stecken. 

3. Leiterplatte 4 in die Gehäuse‐Rückwand 2 einsetzen (erst oben, dann unten). Dabei die 

beiden Löcher unten in der Leiterplatte 4 auf die Arretierungsstifte der 

Gehäuse‐Rückwand 2 stecken. 

4. LED‐Module gemäß der folgenden Übersicht auf die Leiterplatte stecken. 

5. Dekorrahmen 5 mit den Befestigungsschrauben 6 auf die Gehäuse‐Rückwand 2 

schrauben. 

6. Lichtkuppel mit Trenneinsatz 7 auf den Dekorrahmen 5 drücken bis sie einrastet. 

Farben der LED‐Module 

77 0170 00 77 0170 01 77 0170 10 

rot: Rufe 

grün: Personal 1 

gelb: Personal 2 

kein LED‐Modul 

blau: Alarmruf 

blau: Alarmruf 

weiß: WC‐Ruf 


rot: Rufe 




Anschluss Zimmerbus (RAN) ohne Sprechen 

B (lack) = 0V schwarz 

B 

Y (ellow) = RAN gelb 

vom RAN-Teilnehmer 

Y 

R (ed) = +24 V rot 

R 70 0807 00 

Bei der Einstellung der RAN‐Anzahl am ComTerminal muss beachtet werden: 

Die Zimmerleuchte, 4-teilig, Best.‐Nr. 77 0170 10, entspricht zwei 

Zimmergeräten, d.h. ihre RAN‐Anzahl beträgt nicht 1 sondern 2. 

Kanalcodierung 

Die Zimmerleuchten können zur Bildung von Funktionseinheiten verschiedenen Kanälen 

zugeordnet werden. Die Kanalnummern werden an einer markierten Stelle auf der 

Leiterplatte (P1, P2, P3) durch Trennen (Messer) bzw. Verbinden (Löten) eingestellt. 

Werkseitig ist immer die Kanalnummer 0 eingestellt. 

Die einzustellende Kanalnummer entnehmen Sie dem entsprechenden Installationsplan. 

Beispiel Kanalnummer 6: 

P2 und P3 trennen 

= 6 

= werkseitig verbunden 

= getrennt 

= Lötpunkt 

Zum Wiederverbinden 

getrennter Leitungen 

Demontage 

Lichtkuppel von oben und unten leicht zusammendrücken und dann abziehen. 

Mounting 

1* Back box 

2 Pattress 

3* Connector (70 0807 00) 

4 Printed circuit board (PCB) with LED modules 

5 Decorative frame 

6 Fixing screws 

7 Light dome with insert module 

* not included with product delivery. 

1. Fit the pattress 2 with the back box screws to the back box 1. For the correct mounting 

direction refer to the markings in the pattress. 

2. Plug the pre-connected connector 3 into the socket on the PCB 4. 

3. Put the PCB 4 into the pattress 2 (first the top, then the bottom). The two holes on the 

base of the PCB must fit onto the fixing pins of the pattress 2. 

4. Plug the LED modules onto the PCB according to the following overview. 

5. Fit the decorative frame 5 with the fixing screws 6 onto the pattress 2. 

6. Press the light dome with the insert module 7 onto the decorative frame 5 until it locks in 

place. 

LED module colours 

77 0170 00 77 0170 01 77 0170 10 

red: calls 

green: staff 1 

yellow: staff 2 

no LED module 

blue: code blue/cardiac alarm 

blue: code blue/cardiac alarm 

white: WC call 

no LED module 

red: calls 




Connection of room bus (RAN) without speech 

from RAN user 

B (lack) = 0V 

Y (ellow) = RAN 

R (ed) = +24 V 

B 

Y 

R 70 0807 00 

When setting the RAN number in the ComTerminal take into account: 

Room lamp, 4 sections, order no. 77 0170 10, is equivalent to two room 

devices, i.e. its RAN number is not 1 but 2. 

Channel coding 

If functional units are requested, the room lamps have to be assigned to different channels. 

The channel number is configured at the position marked on the PCB (P1, P2, P3) by 

breaking the links (cutter) or reconnecting (solder). The product is pre‐set on channel 0. 

For the channel number to be set please refer to the installation plan. 

Example channel number 6: 

Break links P2 and P3 

= 6 

= pre-set link 

= broken link 

Dismantling 

Compress and pull off the light dome. 

= Solder point 

to reconnect a broken link 

OBEN 

TOP 

77 0170 00 

Zimmerleuchte, 3‐teilig 

Room lamp, 3 sections 

77 0170 01 

Zimmerleuchte Alarm, WC 

Room lamp code blue / 

cardiac alarm, WC 

77 0170 10 

Zimmerleuchte, 4‐teilig 

Room lamp, 4 sections 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

6 

7 

P1 

P2 P3 

= 0 

= 1 

= 2 

= 3 

= 4 

= 5 

= 6 

= 7 

Kanalnummer 

Channel number 

1. 

1. 

2. 

00 8802 49, 08/06 (Rev. 1.0) 

Page 93



Zimmerleuchte, 3-teilig, mit Türschild, Best.‐Nr. 77 0171 00 

zur optischen Anzeige von allen Rufarten und Personalanwesenheiten. Türschild als 

Beschriftungsfeld für die Raumbezeichnung. Wandmontage. 

Zimmerleuchte, 4-teilig, mit Türschild, Best.‐Nr. 77 0171 10 

wie 77 0171 00, jedoch zusätzlich Anzeige des WC‐Rufs. 





Montage 

1* Einbaudose 




5 Dekorrahmen 



8* Namensschild (Höhe x Breite: 70 x 92 mm) 

9 Schutzabdeckung 





stecken. 






schrauben. 


7. Namenschild 8 und Schutzabdeckung 9 einlegen. 


77 0171 00 77 0171 10 

rot: Rufe 

rot: Rufe 

grün: Personal 1 grün: Personal 1 

gelb: Personal 2 gelb: Personal 2 

kein LED‐Modul weiß: WC‐Ruf 



B 



Y 

R (ed) = +24 V rot 

R 70 0807 00 

Bei der Einstellung der RAN‐Anzahl am ComTerminal muss beachtet werden: 

Die Zimmerleuchte, 4-teilig, mit Türschild, Best.‐Nr. 77 0171 10, entspricht 

zwei Zimmergeräten, d.h. ihre RAN‐Anzahl beträgt nicht 1 sondern 2. 


Die Zimmerleuchten können zur Bildung von Funktionseinheiten verschiedenen Kanälen 

zugeordnet werden. Die Kanalnummern werden an einer markierten Stelle auf der 






= 6 


= getrennt 

Demontage 

= Lötpunkt 




Room lamp, 3 sections, with doorplate, order no. 77 0171 00 

for optical signalling of all call types and staff presences. Doorplate as label field for room 

designation. Wall mounting. 

Room lamp, 4 sections, with doorplate, order no. 77 0171 10 

as 77 0171 00, but additionally with display for WC call. 


manual. 



Mounting 

1* Back box 


2 Pattress 


3* Connector (70 0807 00) 

8* Label strip (HxW: 70 x 92 mm) 

4 Printed circuit board (PCB) with LED modules 9 Protection cover 











place. 

7. Insert the label strip 8 and the protection cover 9. 


77 0171 00 77 0171 10 

red: calls red: calls 

green: staff 1 green: staff 1 

yellow: staff 2 yellow: staff 2 

no LED module white: WC call 


from RAN user 

B (lack) = 0V 


R (ed) = +24 V 

B 

Y 

R 70 0807 00 

When setting the RAN number in the ComTerminal take into account: 

Room lamp, 4 sections, with doorplate, order no. 77 0171 10, is equivalent to 

two room devices, i.e. its RAN number is not 1 but 2. 


If functional units are requested, the room lamps have to be assigned to different channels. 






= 6 


= broken link 

Dismantling 




OBEN 

TOP 

1 

P1 

P2 P3 

1. 

2 

3 

4 

6 

6 

7 

= 0 

= 1 

= 2 

= 3 

= 4 

= 5 

= 6 

= 7 

1. 

2. 

77 0171 00 

Zimmerleuchte, 3‐teilig, mit Türschild 

Room lamp, 3 sections, with doorplate 

77 0171 10 

Zimmerleuchte, 4‐teilig, mit Türschild 

Room lamp, 4 sections, with doorplate 

5 

8 

9 

Kanalnummer 


00 8802 54, 02/07 (Rev. 1.0) 

Page 94


Zimmerleuchte Universal, 3-teilig, Best.‐Nr. 77 0180 10 

zur optischen Anzeige von allen Rufarten und Personalanwesenheit 1 sowie zusätzliche 

Anzeige für WC‐Ruf. Wandmontage. 


wie 77 0180 10, jedoch zusätzlich mit Personalanwesenheit 2. 


zur optischen Anzeige von Personalanwesenheit 1 und von Telefonruf. Wandmontage. 


zur optischen Anzeige von allen Rufarten. Wandmontage. 

Achtung! Die LED‐Module sind mit elektrostatisch gefährdeten Bauteilen bestückt. 

Vermeiden Sie deshalb eine direkte Berührung. 

Room lamp universal, 3 sections, order no. 77 0180 10 

for optical signalling of all call types and staff presence 1 as well as additional display for 

WC call. Wall mounting. 


as 77 0180 10, but additionally with staff presence 2. 


for optical signalling of staff presence 1 and telephone call. Wall mounting. 

Room lamp universal, 1 section, order no. 77 0182 50 

for optical signalling of all call types. Wall mounting. 

Attention! The LED modules include electrostatic sensitive components. Avoid 

touching. 

Montage 

1* Einbaudose 




5 Dekorrahmen 







stecken. 






schrauben. 



Mounting 

1* Back box 


2 Pattress 


3* Connector (70 0807 07) 


4 Printed circuit board (PCB) with LED modules * not included with product delivery. 









place. 



Anschlusspunkt 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 


L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

Demontage 

77 0180 10 77 0180 00 

rot: Rufe 




rot: Rufe 




77 0182 10 77 0182 50 

kein LED‐Modul rot: Rufe 

grün: Personal 1 kein LED‐Modul 

weiß: Telefonruf kein LED‐Modul 

kein LED‐Modul kein LED‐Modul 


Dismantling 

Connector 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

Connector 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 


77 0180 10 77 0180 00 

red: calls 


no LED module 


red: calls 




77 0182 10 77 0182 50 

no LED module red: calls 

green: staff 1 no LED module 

white: telephone call no LED module 

no LED module no LED module 

OBEN 

TOP 

1 

1. 

77 0180 10 

Zimmerleuchte Universal , 3‐teilig 

Room lamp universal, 3 sections 

77 0180 00 

Zimmerleuchte Universal, 4‐teilig 


2 

3 

4 

6 

6 

1. 

2. 

77 0182 10 

Zimmerleuchte Universal , 2‐teilig 


77 0182 50 

Zimmerleuchte Universal, 1‐teilig 

Room lamp universal, 1 section 

5 

7 

00 8802 56, 12/11 (Rev. 2.1) 

Page 95


77 0180 10 

System EccoLine L200, NewLine L200: 

System CCS: 

System CONCENTO PLUS / Concento: 

Terminal L200 

0V 

RL 

AWL 

WCL 

COM 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

LB1 

ComTerminal 

0V 

C 

S 

WL 

COM 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

LB1 

Terminal / 

Displaymodul / 

RAB / 

GND 

RL 

AW 

WL 

COM 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

LB1 

LB2 

LB2 

LB2 

77 0180 00 

System CCS: 

ComTerminal 

0V 

C 

S 

HS 

WL 

COM 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

LB1 

LB2 

77 0182 10 

System Flamenco, EccoLine mit Sprechen, EccoLine L200: 

System Flamenco, EccoLine with speech, EccoLine L200: 

Steckvorrichtung ComStation 

(Bestell‐Nr. 74 0452 30) 

mit Anschluss einer ComStation BUS , 

EccoLine ComStation 

oder ComStation L200 

Connection socket ComStation 

(order no. 74 0452 30) 

with connection of a ComStation BUS , 

EccoLine ComStation 

or ComStation L200 

3 0V 

2 AW 

COM 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

LB1 

LB2 

System Flamenco: 

Steckvorrichtung ComStation PC 

(Bestell‐Nr. 74 0452 60A) 

mit Anschluss einer ComStation PC 

Connection socket ComStation PC 

(order no. 74 0452 60A) 

with connection of a ComStation PC 

0 V 

2 AW 

COM 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

LB1 

LB2 


77 0182 10 

System Flamenco: 

Telefonanschaltrelais 

(Bestell‐Nr. 11 5350 00) 

Telephone interface relay 


14 

A1 

COM 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

LB1 

LB2 

77 0182 50 

System Communicall Connect: 

0 V 

+24VDC AUX NO 

PiperTerminal 

mit 24VDC-Zusatzstromversorgung 

Speech module 

with 24VDC additional power supply 

COM 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

LB1 

LB2 

00 8802 56, 12/11 (Rev. 2.1) 

Page 96


Zimmerleuchte Universal, 3-teilig, mit Türschild, Best.‐Nr. 77 0181 10 

zur optischen Anzeige von allen Rufarten, Personalanwesenheit 1 und zusätzlich WC‐Ruf. 

Türschild als Beschriftungsfeld für die Raumbezeichnung. Wandmontage. 

Zimmerleuchte Universal, 4-teilig, mit Türschild, Best.‐Nr. 77 0181 00 

wie 77 0181 10, jedoch zusätzlich mit Personalanwesenheit 2. 

Achtung! Die LED‐Module sind mit elektrostatisch gefährdeten Bauteilen bestückt. 


Room lamp universal, 3 sections, with doorplate, order no. 77 0181 10 

for optical signalling of all call types, staff presence 1 and additional display for WC call. 

Doorplate as label field for room designation. Wall mounting. 

Room lamp universal, 4 sections, with doorplate, order no. 77 0181 00 

as 77 0181 10, but additionally with staff presence 2. 

Attention! The LED modules include electrostatic sensitive components. Avoid 

touching. 

Anschlüsse 

Connections 

System EccoLine L200, NewLine L200: 

System CCS: 

System CONCENTO PLUS , Concento: 

Terminal L200 

0V 

RL 

AWL 

WCL 

COM 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

ComTerminal 

0V 

C 

S 

HS* 

WL 

COM 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

Terminal / 

Displaymodul / 

RAB / 

GND 

RL 

AW 

WL 

COM 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

LB1 

LB2 

*nur bei 77 0181 00 

*only for 77 0181 00 

LB1 

LB2 

LB1 

LB2 


Montage 

1* Einbaudose 




5 Dekorrahmen 



8* Namensschild (Höhe x Breite: 70 x 92 mm) 






stecken. 






schrauben. 


7. Namenschild 8 und Schutzabdeckung 9 einlegen. 



L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

77 0181 10 77 0181 00 

rot: Rufe 

rot: Rufe 

grün: Personal 1 grün: Personal 1 

kein LED‐Modul gelb: Personal 2 

weiß: WC‐Ruf weiß: WC‐Ruf 

Mounting 

1* Back box 


2 Pattress 


3* Connector (70 0807 07) 

8* Label strip (hxw: 70 x 92 mm) 

4 Printed circuit board (PCB) with LED modules 9 Protection cover 











place. 



Connector 

L1 

L2 

L3 

L4 

77 0181 10 77 0181 00 

red: calls red: calls 

green: staff 1 green: staff 1 

no LED module yellow: staff 2 

white: WC call white: WC call 

Demontage 


Dismantling 


OBEN 

TOP 

1 

1. 

2 

3 

4 

6 

6 

7 

2. 

77 0181 10 

Zimmerleuchte Universal , 3‐teilig, 

mit Türschild 

Room lamp universal, 3 sections, 


1. 

77 0181 00 

Zimmerleuchte Universal, 4‐teilig, 

mit Türschild 

Room lamp universal, 4 sections, 


5 

8 

9 

00 8802 55, 12/11 (Rev. 1.1) 

Page 97



Page 98


14.2 Switches 

70 0106 00 Pneumatic call switch 

70 0106 01 Pneumatic call switch/WC 

70 0111 00 Call switch wp 

70 0111 01 Call switch/WC wp 

70 0112 00 Staff presence switch wp 

70 0113 00 Cancel switch/WC wp 

70 0114 00 Code blue / cardiac alarm switch wp 

70 0115 00 Pull cord call switch wp 

70 0115 01 Pull cord call switch/WC wp 

70 0117 00 Call switch/WC with cancel switch wp 

70 0118 00 Call switch with privacy switch wp 

70 0119 00 Staff presence combination with call tone wp 

70 0183 00 Cancel switch/WC with call tone wp 


Page 99


Pneumatischer Ruftaster, Best.‐Nr. 70 0106 00 

Taster zur Rufauslösung durch pneumatische Betätigung. Das integrierte Beruhigungslicht 

leuchtet auf, sobald ein Ruf ausgelöst wird. Vorzugsweise hergestellt für den Wandeinbau. 

Pneumatischer Ruftaster/WC, Best.‐Nr. 70 0106 01 

Wie Bestell‐Nr. 70 0106 00, jedoch für WC‐Ruf und WC‐Notruf. 

Hinweis! Die vollständige Installation des Systems ist im technischen Handbuch 

beschrieben. 

Achtung! Die Leiterplatte ist mit elektrostatisch gefährdeten Bauteilen bestückt. 


Pneumatic call switch, order no. 70 0106 00 

One call button with pneumatic function for call activation, complete with integrate reassurance 

lamp. Suitable for wall mounting. 

Pneumatic call switch/WC, order no. 70 0106 01 

As 70 0106 00, but for WC rooms. 


manual. 

Attention! The printed circuit board includes electrostatic sensitive components. 

Avoid touching. 


Montage 

1* Einbaudose 

2 Klemmkralle 

3 Montagerahmen 



5 Leiterplatte (vormontiert) 

6 Tastergehäuse 

7 Luftschlauch 

8 Gummiball 

1. Angeschlossene Anschlussklemme 4 durch den Montagerahmen 3 ziehen. 

2. - Einbaudose Mauerwerk: Den Montagerahmen 3 mit der Klemmkralle 2 an der 

Einbaudose 1 befestigen (Mittenversatz!). 

- Einbaudose Hohlwand: Montagerahmen 3 an den Schraubpunkten der Einbaudose 1 

verschrauben (Mittenversatz!) 

3. Anschlussklemme 4 in die eingebaute Buchse der Leiterplatte 5 stecken. 

4. Tastergehäuse 6 über den Montagerahmen 3 drücken und einrasten lassen. 

5. Falls erforderlich: Den Luftschlauch 7 auf die gewünschte Länge kürzen und den 

Gummiball 8 wieder aufstecken. 





R (ed) = +24 V rot 


Die Ruftaster können zur Bildung von Funktionseinheiten verschiedenen Kanälen 

zugeordnet werden. 

Die Kanalnummern werden an einer markierten Stelle auf der Leiterplatte (P1, P2, P3) 

durch Trennen (Messer) bzw. Verbinden (Löten) eingestellt. 



Beispiel Kanal 6: 


= Lötpunkt 


= 6 



= getrennt 

Demontage 

1. Schraubendreher an der Rastnase ansetzen und Tastergehäuse abhebeln. 

2. Anschlussklemme 4 abziehen. 

3. Schraube am Montagerahmen 3 lösen. 

B 

Y 

R 

Mounting 

1* Back box 

2 Fixing clamp 

3 Mounting frame 

4* Connector (70 0807 00) 


5 Printed circuit board PCB (pre‐mounted) 

6 Switch housing 

7 Air tube 

8 Rubber ball 

1. Pull the cable‐connected connector 4 through the mounting frame 3. 

2. - Back box for solid walls: Use the fixing clamp 2 to fix the mounting frame 3 to the back 

box 1 (centre offset!). 

- Back box for partition walls: Screw the mounting frame 3 to the screw points of the 

back box 1 (centre offset!). 

3. Plug the connector 4 into the socket on the PCB 5. 

4. Push and lock in the switch housing 6 onto the mounting frame 3. 

5. If necessary, shorten the air tube to length and refit the rubber ball. 


from RAN user 

B (lack) = 0V 


R (ed) = +24 V 


If functional units are requested, the switches have to be assigned to different channels. 






= 6 


= broken link 

B 

Y 

R 



Dismantling 

1. Using a screw driver, prize the switch cover from above away from the mounting frame. 

2. Remove the connector 4. 

3. Unscrew the mounting frame 3. 

3 

1 

2 

4 

5 

7 

8 

6 

Einbaudose Hohlwand (17 5100 00), 

Mittenversatz: 

Back box partition wall (17 5100 00), 

Centre offset: 

1 

3 

P1 P2 

P3 

Kanalnummer 


= 0 

= 1 

= 2 

= 3 

= 4 

= 5 

= 6 

= 7 

70 0106 00 

Pneumatischer Ruftaster 

Pneumatic call switch 

70 0106 01 

Pneumatischer Ruftaster/WC 


00 8800 22, 09/11 (Rev. 3.1) 

Page 100


Ruftaster wg, Best.‐Nr. 70 0111 00 

Zwei rote Ruftasten mit gleicher Funktion zum Auslösen von Normalrufen oder Notrufen. 

Ruftaster/WC wg, Best.‐Nr. 70 0111 01 

Zwei rote Ruftasten mit gleicher Funktion zum Auslösen von WC‐Rufen oder WC‐Notrufen. 

Alarmtaster wg, Best.‐Nr. 70 0114 00 

Zwei blaue Alarmtasten zum Auslösen von Alarmen durch das Personal. Vor der 

Alarmauslösung muss die Schutzklappe nach oben geklappt werden. 


beschrieben. 



Call switch wp, order no. 70 0111 00 

Two red call buttons with identical function for raising normal calls or emergency calls. 

Call switch/WC wp, order no. 70 0111 01 

Two red call buttons with identical function for raising WC calls or WC emergency calls. 

Code blue/Cardiac alarm switch wp, order no. 70 0114 00 

Two blue code blue/cardiac alarm buttons with identical function for raising codes 

blue/cardiac alarms by the staff. Protection cover must be lift before pressing a button. 


manual. 



Montage 

1* Einbaudose 




4 Tastergehäuse mit Leiterplatte (vormontiert) 

5 Schutzklappe (nur beim Alarmtaster) 

6 Klemmkralle (bei fehlender Schraubmöglichkeit) 


2. Montagerahmen 2 an den Schraubpunkten der Einbaudose 1 verschrauben. Bei 

fehlender Schraubmöglichkeit dient die Klemmkralle 6 zur Befestigung des 

Montagerahmens. Klemmkralle nicht für Hohlwanddosen geeignet. 

3. Anschlussklemme 3 in die eingebaute Buchse der Leiterplatte im Tastergehäuse 4 

stecken. 


5. Schutzklappe 5 (nur bei Alarmtaster) auf das Tastergehäuse setzen und an den oberen 

beiden Einkerbungen einrasten lassen. 

Mounting 

1* Back box 

4 Switch housing with pre‐installed printed circuit board 


5 Protection cover (Code blue/Cardiac alarm switch only) 

3* Connector (70 0807 00) 6 Fixing clamp (if screw fixing is not possible) 



2. Screw the mounting frame 2 to the back box 1. If screw fixing is not possible, use the 

fixing clamp 6 to fix the mounting frame to the box. The fixing clamp cannot be used 

with back boxes for partition walls. 

3. Plug the connector 3 into the socket on the printed circuit board within the switch 

housing 4 . 


5. Fit the protection cover 5 (only relevant to code blue/cardiac alarm switch) over the 

switch housing and lock in the upper notches. 






R (ed) = +24 V rot 

B 

Y 

R 


Nur wenn die Bildung von Funktionseinheiten gewünscht ist, müssen die Taster 

verschiedenen Kanälen zugeordnet werden. Hierzu muss die Leiterplatte im Tastergehäuse 

4 freigelegt werden. 

Zum Freilegen der Leiterplatte die Rasthaken der Kunststoffkappe einzeln vorsichtig 

lösen. 


durch Trennen (Messer) bzw. Verbinden (Löten) eingestellt. Werkseitig ist immer die 

Kanalnummer 0 eingestellt. 

Die einzustellende Kanalnummer entnehmen Sie dem Installationsplan. 



= 6 


= getrennt 

= Lötpunkt 



Demontage 

1. Schraubendreher an einer der beiden Rastnasen ansetzen und Tastergehäuse 

abheben. 


3. Schrauben am Montagerahmen 2 lösen. 


B (lack) = 0V 

B 


from RAN user 

Y 

R (ed) = +24 V 

R 


Only if functional units are requested, the switches have to be assigned to different 

channels. For this the printed circuit board (PCB) within the switch housing 4 must be 

exposed. 

To expose the PCB, carefully unlock each locking nose separately from the plastic 

cover. 






= 6 


= broken link 



Dismantling 

1. Using a screw driver, prize the switch cover from above or below away from the 

mounting frame. 


3. Unscrew the mounting frame 2 . 

3 

P1 

P2 P3 

1 

6 

2 

4 

= 0 

= 1 

= 2 

= 3 

= 4 

= 5 

= 6 

= 7 

5 

Kanalnummer 


70 0111 00 

Ruftaster wg 

Call switch wp 

70 0111 01 

70 0114 00 

Ruftaster/WC wg 

Alarmtaster wg 


Code blue/Cardiac alarm switch wp 

rot / red rot / red blau / blue 

00 8802 00, 09/11 (Rev. 3.1) 

Page 101


Anwesenheitstaster wg, Best.‐Nr. 70 0112 00 

Zwei verschiedene Anwesenheitstasten zum Ein‐ und Ausschalten der 

Personalanwesenheit von zwei verschiedenen Personalgruppen. 

Grün: Anwesenheit 1, Gelb: Anwesenheit 2 

Abstelltaster/WC wg, Best.‐Nr. 70 0113 00 

Zwei graue Abstelltasten mit gleicher Funktion zur lokalen Abstellung von WC‐Rufen oder 

WC‐Notrufen. Vorzugsweise zur Abstellung von Rufen aus WC‐Räumen, die 

Patientenzimmern zugeordnet sind. 





Staff presence switch wp, order no. 70 0112 00 

Two different presence buttons for activating and deactivating staff presence of two different 

staff groups. 

Green: Staff presence 1, Yellow: Staff presence two 

Cancel switch/WC wp, order no. 70 0113 00 

Two grey cancel buttons with identical function for locally cancelling WC calls or WC 

emergency calls. Preferably for calls from WC rooms en‐suite to a patient room. 


manual. 



Montage 

1* Einbaudose 











stecken. 


Mounting 

1* Back box 



5 Fixing clamp (if screw fixing is not possible) 

3* Connector (70 0807 00) 



2. Screw the mounting frame 2 to the back box 1. 

If screw fixing is not possible, use the fixing clamp 5 to fix the mounting frame to the 

box. The fixing clamp cannot be used with back boxes for partition walls. 


housing 4. 





B 



Y 

R (ed) = +24 V rot 

R 


Nur wenn die Bildung von Funktionseinheiten gewünscht ist, müssen die Taster verschiedenen 

Kanälen zugeordnet werden. Hierzu muss die Leiterplatte im Tastergehäuse 4 freigelegt 

werden. 


lösen. 







= 6 


= getrennt 

= Lötpunkt 



Demontage 


abheben. 




B (lack) = 0V 

B 


from RAN user 

Y 

R (ed) = +24 V 

R 




exposed. 


cover. 






= 6 


= broken link 



Dismantling 





3 

P1 

P2 P3 

1 

5 

2 

4 

= 0 

= 1 

= 2 

= 3 

= 4 

= 5 

= 6 

= 7 

Kanalnummer 


70 0112 00 

Anwesenheitstaster wg 

Staff presence switch wp 

grün / green 

gelb / yellow 

70 0113 00 

Abstelltaster/WC wg 

Cancel switch/WC wp 

grau / grey 

00 8802 01, 09/11 (Rev. 3.1) 

Page 102



Rufzugtaster wg, Best.‐Nr. 70 0115 00 

Taster zur Rufauslösung durch Tast- oder Zugbetätigung. 

Rufzugtaster/WC wg, Best.‐Nr. 70 0115 01 

wie 70 0115 00, jedoch für WC-Rufe bzw. WC-Notrufe. 





Wandmontage / Deckenmontage 

Wandmontage: siehe Abbildung A1. 

Deckenmontage: ACHTUNG: Die Rufschnur muss von der Zugtaster‐Haube 6 in Richtung 

des Tastergehäuses 5 gezogen werden. Eine andere Zugrichtung verhindert die 

Rufauslösung (Abbildung A3). Achten Sie deshalb darauf, dass die Zugtaster‐Haube von 

der Zugrichtung (z.B. Badewanne) abgewandt ist (Abbildung A2). 

Wenn eine Raumwand in der Nähe ist, richten Sie die Zugtaster‐Haube 6 in Richtung der 

Wand aus. Das Tastergehäuse 5 ist dann von der Wand abgewandt. Eine problemlose 

Rufauslösung ist gewährleistet. 

Montage 

1* Einbaudose 

2 Zugtaster-Basis 




6 Zugtaster-Haube 

7 Rufschnur 

8 Rufgriff * nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten. 

1. Angeschlossene Anschlussklemme 4 durch die Zugtaster‐Basis 2 und den 

Montagerahmen 3 ziehen. 

Einbaurichtung von Zugtaster‐Basis und Montagerahmen beachten, siehe Abbildung B! 

2. Montagerahmen 3 auf die Zugtaster‐Basis 2 drücken. 

3. Zugtaster‐Basis 2 inkl. Montagerahmen 3 mit vier Schrauben und Dübeln an die Wand 

schrauben. Eine Befestigung in der Einbaudose ist nicht ausreichend! 

4. Anschlussklemme 4 in die eingebaute Buchse am Taster 5 stecken. 

5. Tastergehäuse 5 auf den Montagerahmen 3 drücken, bis es einrastet. 

Einbaurichtung beachten! Das heißt, Symbole korrekt orientieren. 

6. Die Zugtaster‐Haube 6 von oben auf den Taster schieben, bis sie einrastet. 

7. Die Rufschnur 7 auf die gewünschte Länge kürzen und im Rufgriff 8 neu verknoten. 





R (ed) = +24 V rot 




5 freigelegt werden. Zum Freilegen der Leiterplatte die Rasthaken der Kunststoffkappe 

einzeln vorsichtig lösen. Die Kanalnummern werden an einer markierten Stelle auf der 






= 6 


= getrennt 

B 

Y 

R 

= Lötpunkt 



Demontage 

1. Zugtaster‐Haube 6 nach oben abschieben. Zum Lösen des Scharniers evtl. von unten 

seitlich gegen die Zugtaster‐Haube schlagen. 

2. Tastergehäuse 5 mit Schraubendreher vom Montagerahmen 3 abhebeln. 


4. Befestigungsschrauben von Montagerahmen 3 und Zugtaster‐Basis 2 lösen. 

5. Montagerahmen 3 von Zugtaster‐Basis 2 abheben. 

Pull cord call switch wp, order no. 70 0115 00 

One call button as well as a pull cord for raising a call. 

Pull cord call switch/WC wp, order no. 70 0115 01 

as 70 0115 00, but for WC calls or WC emergency calls. 


manual. 



Wall installation / Ceiling installation 

Wall installation: Refer to figure A1. 

Ceiling installation: ATTENTION: The pull cord has to be pulled away from the pull cord 

switch bonnet 6 into the direction of the switch housing 5. Another pull direction prevents a 

call activation (figure A3). Therefore pay attention, that the pull cord bonnet is turned away 

from the pull direction (eg. bathtub) (figure A2). 

If a room wall is near, turn the pull cord switch bonnet 6 into the direction of the wall. Then 

the switch housing 5 is turned away from the wall. A correct call activation is guaranteed. 

Mounting 

1* Back box 

2 Pull cord switch base 


4* Connector (70 0807 00) 

5 Switch housing with pre‐installed PCB 

6 Pull cord switch bonnet 

7 Pull cord 

8 Red cord grip * not included in product delivery. 

1. Pull the pre‐assembled connector 4 through the pull cord switch base 2 and the 

mounting frame 3. Take into account the correct orientation of the pull cord switch base 

and of the mounting frame as shown in figure B! 

2. Press the mounting frame 3 onto the pull cord switch base 2. 

3. Screw the pull cord switch base 2 incl. the mounting frame 3 on the wall using four 

screws and dowels. A fixing onto the back box is not stable enough! 

4. Plug the connector 4 into the socket on the switch housing 5. 


Note the orientation! I.e. place the symbols in the correct direction. 

6. Push and lock the pull cord switch bonnet 6 from above onto the switch. 

7. If needed, shorten the cord 7 to length and fix the grip 8 by tying a knot accordingly. 


from RAN user 

B(lack) = 0V 

Y(ellow) = RAN 

R(ed) = +24 V 


Only if functional units are requested, the call switches have to be assigned to different channels. 

For this the printed circuit board (PCB) within the switch housing 5 must be exposed. To 

expose the PCB, carefully unlock each locking nose separately from the plastic cover. The 

channel number is configured at the position marked on the PCB (P1, P2, P3) by breaking the 

links (cutter) or reconnecting (solder). The product is pre‐set on channel 0. 

For the channel number to be set, please refer to the appropriate installation drawing. 



= 6 


= broken link 

B 

Y 

R 



Dismantling 

1. Remove up the pull cord switch bonnet 6. To release the hinges you may beat lateral 

from below against the pull cord switch bonnet. 

2. Using a screw driver, lift the switch housing 5 from the mounting frame 3. 


4. Unscrew the fixing screws from the mounting frame 3 and the pull cord switch base 2. 

5. Lift the mounting frame 3 from the pull cord switch base 2. 

Ï 

Ï 

Ï 

Ï 

ÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏÏ 

6 

7 

5 

ÀÀ 

6 5 

7 

Verboten! 

Forbidden! 

1 

6 

7 

4 

8 

P1 P2 P3 

0 = 

1 = 

2 = 

3 = 

4 = 

5 = 

6 = 

7 = 

Kanalnummer 


A1 

Ï 

A2 

ÀÀ ÀÀÀ 

ÀÀÀ 

70 0115 00 

Rufzugtaster wg 

Pull cord call switch wp 

A3 

70 0115 01 

Rufzugtaster/WC wg 


2 

3 

5 

00 8802 04, 06/06 (Rev. 3.0) 

Page 103


Ruftaster/WC mit Abstelltaste wg, Best.‐Nr. 70 0117 00 

Rote Ruftaste und graue Abstelltaste zum Auslösen und Abstellen von WC-Rufen und 

WC-Notrufen. Ruftaste mit Beruhigungslicht und Findelicht. 

Ruftaster mit Privattaste wg, Best.‐Nr. 70 0118 00 

Rote Ruftaste mit Beruhigungslicht und Findelicht zur Rufauslösung. Graue Privattaste zur 

lokalen Schaltung der Mithörsperre. 





Call switch/WC with cancel switch wp, order no. 70 0117 00 

Red call button and grey cancel button for raising and cancelling WC calls and WC 

emergency calls. Call button with reassurance light and location light. 

Call switch with privacy switch, order no. 70 0118 00 

Red call button with reassurance light and location light for raising calls. Grey privacy 

button for local switching of privacy. 


manual. 



Montage 

1* Einbaudose 











stecken. 


Mounting 

1* Back box 




3* Connector (70 0807 00) 







housing 4. 





B 



Y 

R (ed) = +24 V rot 

R 






lösen. 







= 6 


= getrennt 

= Lötpunkt 



Demontage 


abheben. 




B (lack) = 0V 

B 


from RAN user 

Y 

R (ed) = +24 V 

R 




exposed. 


cover. 






= 6 


= broken link 



Dismantling 





3 

P1 

P2 P3 

1 

5 

2 

4 

= 0 

= 1 

= 2 

= 3 

= 4 

= 5 

= 6 

= 7 

Kanalnummer 


70 0117 00 

Ruftaster/WC mit Abstelltaste wg 

Call switch/WC with cancel switch wp 

rot / red 

grau / grey 

70 0118 00 

Ruftaster mit Privattaste wg 

Call switch with privacy switch wp 

rot / red 

grau / grey 

00 8802 02, 09/11 (Rev. 3.1) 

Page 104


Anwesenheits‐Kombination mit Rufton wg, Best.‐Nr. 70 0119 00 

Grüne Anwesenheitstaste mit integriertem Erinnerungslicht zum Ein‐ und Ausschalten der 

Personalanwesenheit. Rote Ruftaste mit Beruhigungslicht und Findelicht zum Auslösen von 

Rufen. Signalgeber zur akustischen Signalisierung nachgesendeter Rufe. 

Abstelltaster/WC mit Rufton wg, Best.‐Nr. 70 0183 00 

Zwei graue Abstelltasten mit integriertem Erinnerungslicht zur lokalen Abstellung von 

WC‐Rufen und WC‐Notrufen. Signalgeber zur akustischen Signalisierung nachgesendeter 

Rufe. Vorzugsweise zur separaten Abstellung von Rufen aus WC-Räumen, die Patientenzimmern 

zugeordnet sind. 





Staff presence combination with call tone wp, order no. 70 0119 00 

Green presence button with integrated reminder light for activating and deactivating of staff 

presence. Red call button with reassurance light and location light for raising calls. Tone 

generator for acoustic signalling of forwarded calls. 

Cancel switch/WC with call tone, order no. 70 0183 00 

Two grey cancel buttons with integrated reminder light for local cancelling of WC calls and 

WC emergency calls. Tone generator for acoustic signalling of forwarded calls. Preferably 

for cancelling of calls in WC rooms en-suite to a patient room. 


manual. 



Montage 

1* Einbaudose 











stecken. 


Mounting 

1* Back box 




3* Connector (70 0807 00) 







housing 4. 





B 



Y 

R (ed) = +24 V rot 

R 






lösen. 







= 6 


= getrennt 

= Lötpunkt 



Demontage 


abheben. 




B (lack) = 0V 

B 


from RAN user 

Y 

R (ed) = +24 V 

R 




exposed. 


cover. 






= 6 


= broken link 



Dismantling 





3 

P1 

P2 P3 

1 

5 

2 

4 

= 0 

= 1 

= 2 

= 3 

= 4 

= 5 

= 6 

= 7 

Kanalnummer 


70 0119 00 

Anwesenheits-Kombination mit Rufton wg 

Staff presence combination with call tone wp 

grün / green 

rot / red 

70 0183 00 

Abstelltaster/WC mit Rufton wg 

Cancel switch/WC with call tone wp 

grau / grey 

00 8802 03, 09/11 (Rev. 3.1) 

Page 105


Page 106 



14.3 Room terminals 


77 0520 00 RoomTerminal Flamenco 


77 0551 00 ControlTerminal with doorplate Flamenco 


Page 107


ComTerminal Flamenco, Best.‐Nr. 77 0510 00 

Universelles Kommunikationsterminal in Gegensprechtechnik inkl. roter Ruftaste, blauer 

Alarmtaste, grüner Anwesenheitstaste (AW1), gelber Anwesenheitstaste (AW2), 

4 Funktionstasten mit situationsabhängiger Belegung, Mikrofon und Lautsprecher. 



Vorsicht! Die Leiterplatte ist mit elektrostatisch gefährdeten Bauteilen bestückt. 


Vorsicht! Lassen Sie das Terminal‐Frontteil nicht auf eine harte Oberfläche fallen 

und setzen es auch nicht einem beträchtlichen Druck oder Stoß aus. Die 

Bedienfront des ComTerminals besteht aus Glas und kann brechen. 

Montage der Terminal‐Rückwand 

ComTerminal Flamenco, order no. 77 0510 00 

Universal communication terminal with two-way speech communication, incl. red call 

button, blue code blue/cardiac alarm button, green presence button (staff 1), yellow 

presence button (staff 2), 4 function keys as soft keys, microphone and loudspeakers. 


manual. 

Caution! The printed circuit board includes electrostatic sensitive components. 


Caution! The operating front cover of the ComTerminal is made of glass. Handle 

with care! The glass could break if it is dropped on a hard surface or receives a 

substantial impact. 

Mounting pattress 

120 mm 

120 mm 

Beachten Sie beim Setzen der Einbaudosen den Platzbedarf 

des ComTerminals. Vom Mittelpunkt der Dose muss nach oben 

und unten ein Platzbedarf von mindestens 120 mm vorgesehen 


120 mm 

120 mm 

When installing the back box consider the space required for the 

complete ComTerminal. Measuring from the centre of the box, the 

available space must be at least 120 mm above and below. 


1. Anschlussleitungen durch den Ausbruch in der Terminal‐Rückwand 2 führen. 

2. Terminal‐Rückwand 2 mit den Schrauben 1 der Einbaudose auf der Einbaudose 

festschrauben. Vorsicht! Die 2 Leitungen 3 zu den Lautsprechern 4 nicht abziehen. 

Hinweis! Wenn die Montage auf einer Einbaudose nicht möglich ist, kann das ComTerminal 

mit Schrauben und Dübeln an der Wand befestigt werden, wobei dieselben Bohrungen in 

der Terminal‐Rückwand benutzt werden. 

Anschließend Anschlussleitungen von Gruppenbus OSYnet und Zimmerbus RAN am 

Anschlussfeld der Terminal‐Rückwand 2 gemäß dem Anschlussplan anschließen (siehe 

Seite “Anschlüsse”). 

Montage des Terminal‐Frontteils 

1. Flachkabel 7 des Terminal‐Frontteils 6 in die zugehörige Buchse auf der 

Terminal‐Rückwand 2 stecken. 

2. Terminal-Frontteil 6 oben auf die Terminal-Rückwand 2 aufsetzen, so dass ein Scharnier 

8 entsteht. Anschließend das Terminal-Frontteil mit leichten Druck (Glasbruchgefahr!) 

auf die Terminal-Rückwand herunterdrücken, bis die Rastnase 9 einrastet. Dabei darauf 

achten, dass das Flachkabel 7 nicht eingeklemmt wird. 

3. Zur Sicherung kann eine Sicherungsschraube 10 unten in die Bohrung unterhalb der 

gelben Anwesenheitstaste eingeschraubt werden. 

Abschließend muss das ComTerminal konfiguriert werden (siehe S. “Konfigurationsanleitung”). 

Demontage 

1. Falls eine Sicherungsschraube 10 unten am ComTerminal eingeschraubt ist, die 

Schraube lösen. 

2. Mit dem Schraubendreher Rastnase 9 vorsichtig nach oben drücken, bis sich das 

Terminal-Frontteil 6 löst. 

3. Das Terminal-Frontteil 6 nach unten abnehmen. 

4. Stecker des Flachkabels 7 von Terminal‐Rückwand 2 abziehen. 

5. Terminal‐Frontteil 6 geschützt ablegen. Vorsicht: Elektrostatisch gefährdete Bauteile! 

Vorsicht: Glas! 

4 

1. Insert the connection cables through the outlet in the pattress 2. 

2. Fix the pattress 2 using the back box screws 1 to the back box. Caution! Do not 

disconnect the wire connections 3 to the loudspeakers 4. 

Note! If mounting on a back box is not possible, the ComTerminal may be fixed to the wall 

with dowels and screws using the same holes in the pattress. 

Afterwards the connection cables to the group bus OSYnet and to the room bus RAN have 

to be connected to the connection field in the pattress 2 according to the connection plan 

(see page “Connections”). 

Mounting front panel 

1. Plug the flat cable 7 of the front panel 6 into the appropriate socket on the connection 

field in the pattress 2. 

2. Place front panel 6 onto the top of the pattress 2 creating a hinge 8. Now press the front 

panel downwards onto the pattress with low pressing power (glass!) until the catch 9 

engages. Make sure that the flat cable 7 is not pinched. 

3. For improved security a security screw 10 can be fitted into the hole below the yellow 

presence button. 

Finally the ComTerminal has to be configured (see page “Configuration Instructions”). 

Dismantling 

1. If a security screw 10 is fitted into the base of the ComTerminal, remove it. 

2. Use a screwdriver to push the catch 9 upwards until the front panel 6 looses. 

3. Remove the front panel 6. 

4. Disconnect the flat cable 7 from the pattress 2. 

5. Lay down the front panel 6 protected. Caution: Electrostatic sensitive components! 

Caution: Glass! 

8 

8 

3 

5 

6 

2 

2 

7 

1 

9 

2 

10 

9 

1* Vier Schrauben der Einbaudose 

2 Terminal‐Rückwand 

3 Zwei Anschlussleitungen 

zu den Lautsprechern 

4 Zwei Lautsprecher 

5* Einbaudose 

6 Terminal‐Frontteil 

7 Flachkabel 

8 Scharnier 

9 Rastnase 

10 Sicherungsschraube (optional) 

* ist nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten 

1* Four back box screws 

2 Pattress 

3 Two connections to the two loudspeakers 

4 Two loudspeakers 

5* Back box 

6 Front panel 

7 Flat cable 

8 Hinge 

9 Catch 

10 Security screw (option) 

* not included 

110 mm 

77 0510 00 

ComTerminal Flamenco ® 

205 mm 

Funktionstasten 

Function keys 

00 8802 97, 08/12 (Rev. 2.0) 

Page 108


ComTerminal Flamenco, Best.‐Nr. 77 0510 00 

Wichtige Hinweise 

Leiterquerschnitte: 0,2 ‐ 2,5 mm 2 

Alle Leitungen für die Sprachübertragung (geschirmte Leitungen) dürfen maximal 30 mm 

abgemantelt werden, damit die Schirmfunktion erhalten bleibt. 

Zur Vermeidung von Kurzschlüssen den Beidraht (SCH‐B) isolieren. 

Schraubendreherklinge: 0,6 x 3,5 mm 

Abisolierlänge der Drähte: 6 mm 

Bei kleinen Leitungsquerschnitten mehrere Leiter pro Klemme möglich. 

ComTerminal Flamenco, order no. 77 0510 00 

Important notes 

Wire cross‐sections: 0.2 - 2.5 mm 2 

All cables for speech transmission (shielded cables) may be only be stripped to a maximum 

of 30 mm to maintain the shielding function. 

Insulate the shield wire (SCH‐B) to prevent short circuiting. 

Screwdriver blade: 0.6 x 3.5 mm 

Strip wire to 6 mm. 

For smaller wire cross sections more than one wire may be inserted in one connection 

terminal. 

Gruppenbus (OSYnet) Zimmerbus (RAN) 

Power 

Spannungsversorgung 

Kabel: NYM 2x2,5 mm 2 

Zimmerbus (RAN) 

mit Sprechen 

(max. 2 Anschlüsse) 

Kabel: 2x IY(ST)Y 2x2x0,8 


mit Sprechen 


Kabel: CCS32‐Kabel 

+24 V 

0 V 

0V 

RAN 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 


ohne Sprechen 

+24 V - Si 

(max. 4 Anschlüsse) RAN 

Kabel: IY(ST)Y 2x2x0,8 

0V 

Gruppenbus OSYnet 

Kabel: CAT5‐Kabel 



+24 V - Si 

RAN 

0V 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

+24 V - Si 

D‐L 

D‐H 

D‐G 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

D‐L 

D‐H 

D‐G 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

}{ 

br 

sw 

gr 

ws 

bl 

rt 

ge 

sw 

ws 

ws-bl 

bl 

ws-gn 

gn 

br 

ws-br 

or 

ws-or 

rt 

bl 

gn 

ws 

br 

ws 

ge 

ws 

rt 

ge 

sw 

ws 

ge 

ws 

sw 

rt 

vom letzten Zimmer oder 

zum nächsten Zimmer 

zur Steckvorrichtung 

Kombi oder Kombi Kanal 

zur Steckvorrichtung 

Kombi oder Kombi Kanal 


vom vorigen Zimmer 

oder zum nächsten Zimmer 



Room bus (RAN) Power 

Group bus (OSYnet) 

Power supply 

Cable: NYM 2x2.5 mm 2 

Room bus (RAN) 

with speech 

(max. 2 connections) 

Cable: 2x IY(ST)Y 2x2x0.8 


with speech 


Cable: CCS32‐Kabel 


without speech 


Cable: IY(ST)Y 2x2x0.8 


Cable: CAT5 cable 



+24 V - Si 

RAN 

0V 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

+24 V - Si 

0V 

RAN 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

+24 V 

+24 V - Si 

RAN 

0V 

D‐L 

D‐H 

D‐G 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

D‐L 

D‐H 

D‐G 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

0 V 

}{ 

brown 

black 

grey 

white 

blue 

shield 

red 

yellow 

black 

white 

white-blue 

blue 

white-green 

green 

brown 

white-brown 

orange 

white-orange 

red 

blue 

green 

white 

brown 

white 

yellow 

white 

red 

yellow 

black 

white 

yellow 

white 

black 

red 

from previous room 

or to next room 

to connection socket 

combi or 


to connection socket 

combi or 


from RAN user 






Anschlussfeld (Schraubklemmen) 

Connection field (screw clamps) 

Lautsprecher‐Anschluss 

Connection to 

loudspeakers 


Power supply 

Gruppenbus 

Group bus 

OSYnet 

77 0510 00 

ComTerminal Flamenco ® 

Zimmerbus 

Room bus 

RAN 

Nicht benutzen! 

Don't use! 

00 8802 97, 08/12 (Rev. 2.0) 

Page 109

Konfigurationsanleitung - Seite 1 D Configuration Instructions - Page 1 GB 

ComTerminal Flamenco, Best.‐Nr. 77 0510 00 ComTerminal Flamenco, order no. 77 0510 00 

1. Konfigurationsmenü starten 1. Start configuration menu 

Funktionstaste ganz links und Funktionstaste ganz rechts gleichzeitig so lange (3 Sek.) 

gedrückt halten, bis das Konfigurationsmenü im Display erscheint. 

Press the left and right function keys simultaneously (3 sec.) until the configuration 

menu is shown in the display. 


Function keys 

Symbole im Konfigurationsmenü: 

= Kreistaste = Markierten Menüpunkt einstellen (und speichern) 

= Pfeiltaste nach oben = In der Liste nach oben wandern 

= Pfeiltaste nach unten = In der Liste nach unten wandern 

= Haustaste = Abbrechen, d.h. zur höheren Menüebene 

zurückkehren ohne zu speichern. 

Symbols in the configuration menu: 

= Circle key = Set (and store) marked menu item 

= Upwards arrow key = Scroll upwards through the list 

= Downwards arrow key = Scroll downwards through the list 

= Home key = Cancel, go back to the higher menu level 

without storing 


Menüpunkt 

Sprache 

Raumtyp 

RAN 

Adresse 

Bedeutung 

Sprache der Displaytexte einstellen, z.B. Deutsch oder Englisch. 

Raumtyp einstellen, z.B. Patientenzimmer. 

RAN Anzahl: Anzahl Zimmergeräte (= RAN Anzahl) einstellen. 

Test RAN: Test, ob Zimmergeräte funktionsbereit sind und korrekt am RAN 

angeschlossen sind. 

Status: Prüfung, ob eingestellte RAN Anzahl mit Anzahl funktionsbereiter 

Zimmergeräte übereinstimmt. 

Zimmer‐Adresse einstellen (1 bis 110 einstellbar) 

Reinigungszeit Sekunden einstellen, die benötigt werden um die Front des ComTerminals 

abzuwischen 

Kontrast Kontrast des ComTerminal‐Displays auf hoch oder niedrig einstellen 

Tastenton Ton bei Drücken der Tasten am ComTerminal ein‐ oder ausschalten 

Info 

Version der Software im ComTerminal anzeigen lassen. 

Audio Test Menüpunkt nur zur Verwendung durch Tunstall‐Techniker 

Tastenfunktion Funktion der Alarmtaste und der Anwesenheitstasten am ComTerminal 

ein‐ oder ausschalten (Ein = Standardeinstellung) 

Reset Verwendung nur durch Tunstall‐Techniker. (ComTerminal neu starten) 

Menu Item Meaning 

Language Selecting the user language (e.g. English or German). 

Room type Selecting the room type (e.g. Patient room). 

RAN RAN number: Setting of number of room devices (= RAN number). 

Test RAN: Test if room devices are ready to operate and if they are 

correctly connected to the RAN. 

Status: Check whether the stored RAN number is equal to the number 

of operational room devices. 

Address Setting of room address (1 until 110 available) 

Cleaning time Setting the time (seconds) how long it takes to clean (wipe) the front 

of the ComTerminal 

Contrast Setting the display contrast to “high” or “low”. 

Key sound Switching the key sound on or off (on = recommended) 

Info 

Displaying the ComTerminal's software version. 

Audio Test Function use only for Tunstall technicians. 

Key Function Switching on or of the function of Alarm Key, Presence Key 1 and 

Presence Key 2 (On = standard setting). 

Reset Function use only for Tunstall technicians. (Restart the ComTerminal) 

2. Zwingend erforderliche Einstellungen 2. Entering of necessary settings 

Sprache einstellen (wenn Menüpunkt vorhanden) 

Selecting the user language (if the menu item is available) 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Sprache” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mark ”Language” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten gewünschte Sprache markieren: D = Deutsch, GB = Englisch, E = 

Spanisch, F = Französisch, NL = Niederländisch, I = Italienisch. “Selbstdefiniert” = eine 

weitere Sprache, wenn diese mit der SystemOrganizer‐Software hinterlegt wurde. 

Mark the desired language using the arrow keys: D = German; GB = English; E = Spanish; 

F = French; NL = Dutch; I = Italian. “Custom” = another language, if this is stored 

using the SystemOrganizer software. 

Kreistaste drücken, um markierte Sprache zu speichern. 

Press the circle key to store the marked language. 

Raumtyp einstellen 

Selecting the room type 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Raumtyp” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mark “Room type” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten gewünschten Raumtyp markieren: 

- Patientenzimmer 

- Patientenzimmer mit Abstelltaste für WC-Ruf im ComTerminal 

- Dienstzimmer (Notrufe werden als Normalrufe signalisiert) 

- Kinderzimmer (Keine Taste zum Einschalten der Mithörsperre im ComTerminal, 

Mithörsperre AUS) 

- Anschlussterminal (Tasten und Display im ComTerminal außer Betrieb) 

Kreistaste drücken, um markierten Raumtyp zu speichern. 

RAN Anzahl einstellen (0 - 30) 

RAN Anzahl = Anzahl Zimmergeräte (Taster, Steckvorrichtungen, Zimmerleuchten etc.), die 

am ComTerminal über RAN angeschlossen sind (Kein Birntaster, keine PBK Hand). 

Achtung, Ausnahme! Eine 4‐teilige Zimmerleuchte (Best.‐Nr. 77 0170 10 oder 77 0171 10) 

gilt als zwei Zimmergeräte. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “RAN” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “RAN Anzahl” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten RAN‐Anzahl des Zimmers markieren. 

Kreistaste drücken, um die markierte RAN‐Anzahl zu speichern. 

Zimmer-Adresse einstellen (1 - 110) 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Adresse” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten gewünschte Adresse markieren. 

Kreistaste drücken, um die markierte Adresse zu speichern. 

Mark the desired room type using the arrow keys: 

- Patient room 

- Patient room with cancel key for WC call at ComTerminal 

- Staff room (emergency calls are signalled as normal calls) 

- Children's room (no key to switch the privacy function at ComTerminal, Privacy OFF) 

- Connection terminal (keys and display at ComTerminal non-operational) 

Press the circle key to store the marked room type. 

Setting of RAN number (0 - 30) (Room Area Network) 

RAN number = Number of devices in the room (switches, connection sockets, room lamps, 

etc.) which are connected to the ComTerminal via RAN. (No pear push switch, no patient 

handset). Attention, exception! One room lamp with 4 sections (order no. 77 0170 10 or 77 

0171 10) is equivalent to two room devices. 

Mark “RAN” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mark “RAN number” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mark the desired room number for the room using the arrow keys. 

Press the circle key to store the marked address. 

Setting of room address (1 - 110) 

Mark “Address” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mark the desired room address using the arrow keys. 


2. Optionale Einstellungen (Teil 1) bei Bedarf vornehmen 2. Entering of optional settings (section 1) 

Reinigungszeit einstellen (5 – 30 Sekunden) 

Die Reinigungszeit legt fest, wie lange die Tasten des ComTerminals außer Funktion sind, 

nachdem die Taste Clean gedrückt wurde (Zeit zum Abwischen der Bedienfront). 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Reinigungszeit” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten gewünschte Reinigungszeit (in Sekunden) markieren. 

Kreistaste drücken, um markierte Reinigungszeit zu speichern. 

Kontrast des ComTerminal‐Displays einstellen (hoch, niedrig) 

Je nach Umgebungslicht ist die Einstellung “hoch” oder “niedrig” besser lesbar. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Kontrast” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “hoch” oder “niedrig” markieren. 

Kreistaste drücken, um markierten Kontrast zu speichern. 

Tastenton ausschalten / einschalten 

Auf Wunsch kann der Tastenton der ComTerminal‐Tasten ausgeschaltet werden. Die 

Einstellung “Tastenton Ein” wird jedoch empfohlen. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Tastenton” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Ein” oder “Aus” markieren. 

Kreistaste drücken, um die markierte Auswahl zu speichern. 

Setting of cleaning time (5 – 30 seconds) 

The cleaning time defines how long the ComTerminal keys are not operational after the 

Clean key has been pressed (time for wiping the front). 

Mark “Cleaning time” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mark the desired cleaning time using the arrow keys. 

Press the circle key to store the marked cleaning time. 

Setting of display contrast (high, low) 

Depending on the ambient light a high or low display contrast is better legible. 

Mark “Contrast” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mark “high” or “low” using the arrow keys. 

Press the circle key to store the marked selection. 

Switching the key sound off or on 

If required the ComTerminal key sound can be switched off. But the setting “Key sound On” 

is recommended. 

Mark “Key Sound” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mark “On” or “Off” using the arrow keys. 


00 8802 97, 08/12 (Rev. 2.0) 

Page 110


ComTerminal Flamenco, Best.‐Nr. 77 0510 00 ComTerminal Flamenco, order no. 77 0510 00 

2. Optionale Einstellungen (Teil 2) bei Bedarf vornehmen 2. Entering of optional settings (section 2) 

Softwareversion anzeigen lassen 

Displaying the software version 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Info” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mark “Info” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Softwareversion des ComTerminals wird angezeigt. 

The ComTerminal's software version is displayed. 

Haustaste drücken um zum Menü zurückzukehren. 

Press the home key to return to the menu. 

Tastenfunktion ausschalten / einschalten 

In der Werkseinstellung des ComTerminal sind die Alarmtaste und beide AW‐Tasten (AW = 

Anwesenheit) funktionsbereit. In begründeten Ausnahmefällen ist es möglich die 

Tastenfunktion von diesen Tasten auszuschalten. 

Switching on or of the key function 

With the factory settings the alarm key and both presence keys are operational. In 

well‐founded exceptional cases you can switch of the key function for these keys. 

Alarmtaste (blaues Symbol) 

Alarm Key (blue symbol) 

AW‐Taste 2 (gelb) 

AW‐Taste 1 (grün) 

Presence Key 2 (yellow) 

Presence Key 1 (green) 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Tastenfunktion” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten gewünschte Taste (Alarmtaste oder AW‐Taste) markieren; 

dann Kreistaste drücken. 



Achtung! Ausgeschaltete Tasten sind im Pflegebetrieb nicht verfügbar! 

Mark “Key Function” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mark the desired key (alarm key or presence key) using the arrow keys. Then 

press the circle key. 



Attention! Switched off keys are not available for nursing staff! 

3. Zimmerbus RAN prüfen 3. Checking room bus RAN 

Status 

Prüfung, ob eingestellte RAN Anzahl (siehe oben “RAN Anzahl einstellen”) mit Anzahl 

funktionsbereiter Zimmergeräte übereinstimmt. 


Mit den Pfeiltasten “Status” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Anzeige: OK: ComTerminal hat gemeldet, dass eingestellte RAN Anzahl gleich Anzahl 

funktionsbereiter Zimmergeräte ist. 

Anzeige: Fehler: ComTerminal hat gemeldet, dass eingestellte RAN Anzahl nicht gleich 

Anzahl funktionsbereiter Zimmergeräte ist. 

Zum Verlassen der Anzeige Haustaste drücken. Bei Fehler “Test RAN” durchführen. 

Test RAN 

Test, ob Zimmergeräte funktionsbereit und korrekt am RAN angeschlossen sind. 


Test Starten: Mit den Pfeiltasten “Test RAN” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Die LEDs aller angeschlossenen Zimmergeräte müssen blinken. (Geräte, die nicht 

blinken, sind falsch angeschlossen oder defekt. Defekte Geräte austauschen. Falsch 

angeschlossene Geräte korrekt anschließen) 

Prüfen, ob Anzahl angeschlossener Zimmergeräte gleich der eingestellten RAN Anzahl 

ist. Falls eingestellte RAN‐Anzahl falsch ist, diese nach dem RAN Test wie oben beschrieben 

einstellen. 

Test beenden: Haustaste drücken. 

4. Konfigurationsmenü verlassen 4. Exit the configuration menu 

Wenn keine Einstellungen mehr vorgenommen werden sollen und alle Tests beendet sind, 

müssen Sie das Konfigurationsmenü verlassen. 

Haustaste so oft drücken, bis die normale Betriebsanzeige angezeigt wird. 

Hinweis: Wenn drei Minuten keine Funktionstaste gedrückt wird, wird das 

Konfigurationsmenü automatisch verlassen. 

Status 

Check whether the stored RAN number (see above “Setting of RAN number”) is equal to the 

number of operational room devices. 


Mark “Status” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Display: OK: ComTerminal has reported: Stored RAN number is equal to the number of 

operational room devices. 

Display: Error: ComTerminal has reported: Stored RAN number is not equal to the 


Press the home key to end. In case of an error carry out “Test RAN”. 

Test RAN 

Test if room devices are ready to operate and if they are correctly connected to the RAN. 

Check the correct setting of the RAN number. 


Test start: Mark “Test RAN” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

The LEDs of all connected room devices must flash. (Non-flashing devices are wrongly 

connected or defective. Replace defective devices. Correct any wrong connection) 

Compare the number of connected room devices with the stored RAN number. If the 

stored RAN number is not equal to the number of connected room devices, correct the 

RAN number setting after the RAN test as described above. 

End of test: Press the home key. 

When all settings are performed and all tests are finished, exit the configuration menu. 

During this procedure all settings are stored. 

Press home key until normal operation display appears. 

Note: If for a period of three minutes no function key is pressed, the system will leave the 

configuration menu. 


00 8802 97, 08/12 (Rev. 2.0) 

Page 111


ZimmerTerminal Flamenco, Best.‐Nr. 77 0520 00 

Terminal zum universellen Einsatz in Patientenzimmern, Dienstzimmern und allgemeinen 

Funktionsräumen, ohne Sprechkommunikation. Rote Ruftaste, blaue Alarmtaste, grüne 

Anwesenheitstaste (AW1), gelbe Anwesenheitstaste (AW2) und 4 Funktionstasten Das 

ZimmerTerminal steuert und überwacht alle Zimmerfunktionen gemäß DIN VDE 0834. 

Direkter Anschluss an den Gruppenbus (OSYnet) und den Zimmerbus (RAN). 





Room Terminal Flamenco, order no. 77 0520 00 

Room terminal designed for universal use in patient rooms, duty rooms and general 

function rooms, without speech communication. Red call button, blue code blue/cardiac 

alarm button, green presence button (staff 1), yellow presence button (staff 2) and 4 

function keys as soft keys. Control and monitoring of all room functions in compliance with 

DIN VDE 0834. Direct connection to the group bus (OSYnet) and the room bus (RAN). 


manual. 



Montage der Terminal‐Rückwand 

Mounting pattress 

120 mm 

120 mm 

Beachten Sie beim Setzen der Einbaudosen den Platzbedarf 

des ZimmerTerminals. Vom Mittelpunkt der Dose muss nach 

oben und unten ein Platzbedarf von mindestens 120 mm 

vorgesehen werden. 

120 mm 

120 mm 

When installing the back box consider the space required for the 

complete Room Terminal. Measuring from the centre of the box, the 

available space must be at least 120 mm above and below. 


1. Anschlussleitungen durch den Ausbruch in der Terminal‐Rückwand 2 führen. 

2. Terminal‐Rückwand 2 mit den Schrauben 1 der Einbaudose auf der Einbaudose 

festschrauben. 

Hinweis! Wenn die Montage auf einer Einbaudose nicht möglich ist, kann das 

ZimmerTerminal mit Schrauben und Dübeln an der Wand befestigt werden, wobei dieselben 

Bohrungen in der Terminal‐Rückwand benutzt werden. 

Anschließend Anschlussleitungen von Gruppenbus OSYnet, Zimmerbus RAN und 

Spannungsversorgung am Anschlussfeld der Terminal‐Rückwand 2 gemäß dem 

Anschlussplan anschließen (siehe Seite “Anschlüsse”). 

Montage des Terminal‐Frontteils 

1. Flachkabel 5 des Terminal‐Frontteils 4 in die zugehörige Buchse auf der 

Terminal‐Rückwand 2 stecken. 

2. Terminal-Frontteil 4 oben auf die Terminal-Rückwand 2 aufsetzen, so dass ein Scharnier 

6 entsteht. Anschließend das Terminal-Frontteil mit leichten Druck auf die 

Terminal-Rückwand herunterdrücken, bis die Rastnase 7 einrastet. Dabei darauf achten, 

dass das Flachkabel 5 nicht eingeklemmt wird. 

3. Zur Sicherung kann eine Sicherungsschraube 8 unten in die Bohrung unterhalb der 

gelben Anwesenheitstaste eingeschraubt werden. 

Abschließend muss das ZimmerTerminal konfiguriert werden (siehe S. 

“Konfigurationsanleitung”). 

Demontage 

1. Falls eine Sicherungsschraube 8 unten am ZimmerTerminal eingeschraubt ist, die 

Schraube lösen. 

2. Mit dem Schraubendreher Rastnase 7 vorsichtig nach oben drücken, bis sich das 

Terminal-Frontteil 4 löst. 

3. Das Terminal-Frontteil 4 nach unten abnehmen. 

4. Stecker des Flachkabels 5 von Terminal‐Rückwand 2 abziehen. 

5. Terminal‐Frontteil 4 geschützt ablegen. Vorsicht: Elektrostatisch gefährdete Bauteile! 

1. Insert the connection cables through the outlet in the pattress 2. 

2. Fix the pattress 2 using the back box screws 1 to the back box. 

Note! If mounting on a back box is not possible, the Room Terminal may be fixed to the wall 

with dowels and screws using the same holes in the pattress. 

Afterwards the connection cables to the group bus OSYnet, to the room bus RAN and to the 

power supply have to be connected to the connection field in the pattress 2 according to the 

connection plan (see page “Connections”). 

Mounting front panel 

1. Plug the flat cable 5 of the front panel 4 into the appropriate socket on the connection 

field in the pattress 2. 

2. Place front panel 4 onto the top of the pattress 2 creating a hinge 6. Now press the front 

panel downwards onto the pattress with low pressing power until the catch 7 engages. 

Make sure that the flat cable 5 is not pinched. 

3. For improved security a security screw 8 can be fitted into the hole below the yellow 

presence button. 

Finally the Room Terminal has to be configured (see page “Configuration Instructions”). 

Dismantling 

1. If a security screw 8 is fitted into the base of the Room Terminal, remove it. 

2. Use a screwdriver to push the catch 7 upwards until the front panel 4 looses. 

3. Remove the front panel 4. 

4. Disconnect the flat cable 5 from the pattress 2. 

5. Lay down the front panel 4 protected. Caution: Electrostatic sensitive components! 

6 

6 

4 

3 

4 

2 

2 

5 

1 

7 

2 

8 

7 


2 Terminal‐Rückwand 

3* Einbaudose 

4 Terminal‐Frontteil 

5 Flachkabel 

6 Scharnier 

7 Rastnase 

8 Sicherungsschraube (optional) 

* ist nicht im Lieferumfang enthalten 

1* Four back box screws 

2 Pattress 

3* Back box 

4 Front panel 

5 Flat cable 

6 Hinge 

7 Catch 

8 Security screw (option) 

* not included 

110 mm 

77 0520 00 

ZimmerTerminal Flamenco ® 

Room Terminal Flamenco ® 

205 mm 


Function keys 

00 8801 65, 05/10 (Rev. 1.0) 

Page 112


ZimmerTerminal Flamenco, Best.‐Nr. 77 0520 00 






Room Terminal Flamenco, order no. 77 0520 00 






terminal. 

Gruppenbus (OSYnet) Zimmerbus (RAN) Power 




ohne Sprechen 







+24 V 

0 V 

+24 V - Si 

RAN 

0V 

D‐L 

D‐H 

D‐G 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

D‐L 

D‐H 

D‐G 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

rt 

ge 

sw 

ws 

ws-bl 

bl 

ws-gn 

gn 

br 

ws-br 

or 

ws-or 

rt 

bl 

gn 

ws 

br 

ws 

ge 

ws 








Hinweis! Die Anschlüsse NF 1a, NF 1b, NF 2a und NF 2b sind in folgenden 

Installationen nicht erforderlich: Es sind keine ComTerminals (= Terminals mit 

Sprachübertragung) an diesem Gruppenbus OSYnet angeschlossen UND es 

sollen auch in Zukunft keine ComTerminals an diesen Gruppenbus OSYnet 

angeschlossen werden. 



Power supply 










+24 V - Si 

+24 V 

RAN 

0V 

D‐L 

D‐H 

D‐G 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

D‐L 

D‐H 

D‐G 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

0 V 

red 

yellow 

black 

white 

white-blue 

blue 

white-green 

green 

brown 

white-brown 

orange 

white-orange 

red 

blue 

green 

white 

brown 

white 

yellow 

white 



from RAN user 





Note! The connections NF 1a, NF 1b, NF 2a and NF 2b are not required in the 

following installations: There are no ComTerminals (= terminals with speech) 

connected to this group bus OSYnet AND there shall not be connected any 

ComTerminals to this group bus OSYnet in the future. 


Anschlussfeld (Schraubklemmen) 

Connection field (screw clamps) 


Power supply 

Gruppenbus 

Group bus 

OSYnet 

77 0520 00 

ZimmerTerminal Flamenco ® 

Room Terminal Flamenco ® 

Zimmerbus 

Room bus 

RAN 


Don't use! 

00 8801 65, 05/10 (Rev. 1.0) 

Page 113


ZimmerTerminal Flamenco, Best.‐Nr. 77 0520 00 Room Terminal Flamenco, order no. 77 0520 00 


Funktionstaste ganz links und Funktionstaste ganz rechts gleichzeitig so lange (3 Sek.) Press the left and right function keys simultaneously (3 sec.) until the configuration 




Function keys 













Menüpunkt 

Sprache 

Raumtyp 

RAN 

Adresse 

Kontrast 

Tastenton 

Info 

Reset 



Raumtyp einstellen, z.B. Patientenzimmer. 






Zimmer‐Adresse einstellen (1 bis 110 einstellbar) 

Kontrast des ZimmerTerminal‐Displays auf hoch oder niedrig einstellen 

Ton bei Drücken der Tasten am ZimmerTerminal ein‐ oder ausschalten 

Version der Software im ZimmerTerminal anzeigen lassen. 

Verwendung nur durch Tunstall‐Techniker. (ZimmerTerminal neu starten) 

Menu Item 

Language 

Room type 

RAN 

Address 

Contrast 

Key sound 

Info 

Reset 

Meaning 

Selecting the user language (e.g. English or German). 

Selecting the room type (e.g. Patient room). 

RAN number: Setting of number of room devices (= RAN number). 





Setting of room address (1 until 110 available) 

Setting the display contrast to “high” or “low”. 

Switching the key sound on or off (on = recommended) 

Displaying the Room Terminal's software version. 

Function use only for Tunstall technicians. (Restart the Room Terminal) 















Raumtyp einstellen 

Selecting the room type 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Raumtyp” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mark “Room type” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten gewünschten Raumtyp markieren: 

- Patientenzimmer 

- Patientenzimmer mit Abstelltaste für WC-Ruf im ZimmerTerminal 

- Dienstzimmer (Notrufe werden als Normalrufe signalisiert) 

- Anschlussterminal (Tasten und Display im ZimmerTerminal außer Betrieb) 

Kreistaste drücken, um markierten Raumtyp zu speichern. 



am ZimmerTerminal über RAN angeschlossen sind (Kein Birntaster). 











Mark the desired room type using the arrow keys: 

- Patient room 

- Patient room with cancel key for WC call at Room Terminal 

- Staff room (emergency calls are signalled as normal calls) 

- Connection terminal (keys and display at Room Terminal non-operational) 

Press the circle key to store the marked room type. 



etc.) which are connected to the Room Terminal via RAN. (No pear push switcht). Attention, 

exception! One room lamp with 4 sections (order no. 77 0170 10 or 77 0171 10) is 

equivalent to two room devices. 









2. Optionale Einstellungen bei Bedarf vornehmen 2. Entering of optional settings 

Kontrast des ZimmerTerminal‐Displays einstellen (hoch, niedrig) 






Auf Wunsch kann der Tastenton der ZimmerTerminal‐Tasten ausgeschaltet werden. Die 







Softwareversion des ZimmerTerminals wird angezeigt. 








If required the Room Terminal key sound can be switched off. But the setting “Key sound 

On” is recommended. 






The Room Terminal's software version is displayed. 


00 8801 65, 05/10 (Rev. 1.0) 

Page 114


ZimmerTerminal Flamenco, Best.‐Nr. 77 0520 00 Room Terminal Flamenco, order no. 77 0520 00 


Status 





Anzeige: OK: ZimmerTerminal hat gemeldet, dass eingestellte RAN Anzahl gleich Anzahl 


Anzeige: Fehler: ZimmerTerminal hat gemeldet, dass eingestellte RAN Anzahl nicht 

gleich Anzahl funktionsbereiter Zimmergeräte ist. 


Test RAN 









einstellen. 








Status 





Display: OK: Room Terminal has reported: Stored RAN number is equal to the number of 


Display: Error: Room Terminal has reported: Stored RAN number is not equal to the 



Test RAN 

















00 8801 65, 05/10 (Rev. 1.0) 

Page 115


ControlTerminal Flamenco ® , Best.‐Nr. 77 0550 00 

Das ControlTerminal steuert und überwacht alle Zimmerfunktionen gemäß DIN VDE 0834. 


Außerdem Funktion als Zimmerleuchte zur optischen Anzeige von allen Rufarten und 

Personalanwesenheiten sowie zusätzliche Anzeige für WC‐Ruf. Wandmontage. 


beschrieben. 

Hinweis! Vor der Montage muss das ControlTerminal mit dem ControlTerminal 

ConfigSet, Best.-Nr. 77 0920 00, konfiguriert werden. Wie Sie hierzu vorgehen, 

entnehmen Sie der integrierten Online-Hilfe. 



ControlTerminal Flamenco ® , order no. 77 0550 00 

Control and monitoring of all room functions in compliance with DIN VDE 0834. Direct 

connection to the group bus (OSYnet) and the room bus (RAN). 

Furthermore optical signalling of all call types and staff presences as well as additional 

display for WC call. Wall mounting. 

Note! The complete installation of the system is described in the technical manual. 

Note! Prior to mounting the ControlTerminal has to be configured using the 

ControlTerminal ConfigSet, order no. 77 0920 00. How to do this is described in the 

integrated online help. 



Montage mit Schraubbefestigung 

Mounting with screw fixing 


Sie können zwischen zwei Montage-Varianten wählen. In diesem Abschnitt A „Montage mit 

Schraubbefestigung“ ist beschrieben, wie Sie das ControlTerminal vollständig auf der 

Montageplatte festschrauben. Im Abschnitt C „Montage mit Steckbefestigung“ ist 

beschrieben, wie Sie das ControlTerminal nur über zwei Anschlussklemmen an der 

Montageplatte befestigen. Die Montage-Variante A dauert länger als C. Aber bei Variante A 

wird das ControlTerminal stabiler befestigt als bei C. 

1* Einbaudose 

2** Montageplatte mit Anschlussklemmen 



5** Zwei Befestigungsschrauben 

6 Leiterplatte 

7 Befestigungsschraube 

8 4 LED-Module 

9 Dekorrahmen 

10 Zwei Befestigungsschrauben 


Separat bestellen: 

* Einbaudose (inkl. vier Schrauben) 

** Montagekit, Bestell-Nr. 77 0960 00 

1. Leitungen gemäß Kapitel „Anschlüsse“ dieser Verpackungsbeilage an die 

Anschlussklemmen (Schraubklemmen) auf der Montageplatte 2 anschließen. Dabei 

zwei Einlegebrücken wie gezeigt einlegen. 

2. Montageplatte 2 mit den vier Schrauben der Einbaudose 3 an der Einbaudose 1 

festschrauben. Einbaurichtung beachten: Klemme für Spannungsversorgung oben. 

3. Gehäuse‐Rückwand 4 mit den beiden Befestigungsschrauben 5 auf der Montageplatte 

2 festschrauben. 

4. Leiterplatte 6 auf Anschlussklemmen aufdrücken und mit der Befestigungsschraube 7 

auf der Gehäuse-Rückwand 4 festschrauben. 

5. Die vier LED‐Module gemäß Abbildung B auf die Leiterplatte stecken. 

6. Dekorrahmen 9 mit den beiden Befestigungsschrauben 10 auf die Gehäuse‐Rückwand 

4 schrauben. 

7. Lichtkuppel mit Trenneinsatz 11 auf den Dekorrahmen 9 drücken, bis sie einrastet. 

1* 

2** 

3* 

3* 

3* 

3* 

5** 



5** 

You can choose between two mounting options. In this section A “Mounting with screw 

fixing“ is written, how you completely screw the ControlTerminal to the mounting plate. In 

section C “Mounting with plug fixing“ is written, how you you fix the ControlTerminal to the 

mounting plate only via two connectors. For mounting option A you need more time. 

Therefore the ControlTerminal will be stronger fixed using option A. 

1* Back box 

2** Mounting plate with connectors 

3* Four back box fixing screws 

4 Pattress 

5** Two fixing screws 

6 Printed circuit board (PCB) 

7 One fixing screw 

8 4 LED modules 


10 Two fixing screws 


Order separately: 

* Back box (incl. four screws) 

** Mounting kit, order no. 77 0960 00 

1. Connect the connection wires according to chapter “Connections” of this product leaflet 

to the connectors (screw clamps) on the mounting plate 2. Thereby insert two insertion 

bridges as shown. 

2. Fit the mounting plate 2 to the back box 1 using the four back box screws 3. For the 

correct mounting direction the connector for power supply must be at the top. 

3. Fit the pattress 4 with the two fixing screws 5 to the mounting plate 2. 

4. Press the PCB 6 to the connectors and fit the PCB with the fixing screw 7 to the 

pattress 4. 

5. Plug the four LED modules onto the PCB according to the figure B. 

6. Fit the decorative frame 9 with the two fixing screws 10 onto the pattress 4. 

7. Press the light dome with the insert module 11 onto the decorative frame 9 until it locks 

in place. 

LED-Module 

LED modules 

rot: Rufe 




red: Calls 

green: Staff 1 

yellow: Staff 2 


4 

6 

7 

8 

10 

10 

9 

11 

77 0550 00 


00 8801 75, 04/2013 (Rev. 2.0) 

Page 116


ControlTerminal Flamenco ® , Best.‐Nr. 77 0550 00 ControlTerminal Flamenco ® , order no. 77 0550 00 











Montage mit Steckbefestigung 

Sie können zwischen zwei Montage-Varianten wählen. In Abschnitt A „Montage mit 


Montageplatte festschrauben. In diesem Abschnitt C „Montage mit Steckbefestigung“ ist 




1* Einbaudose 







9 Dekorrahmen 






1. Leitungen gemäß Anschlussplan an die Anschlussklemmen (Schraubklemmen) auf der 

Montageplatte 2 anschließen. Dabei zwei Einlegebrücken gemäß Anschlussplan 

einlegen. 


festschrauben. Einbaurichtung beachten: 4-polige Klemme für Spannungsversorgung 

oben. 

3. Gehäuse-Rückwand 4 mit eingebauter Leiterplatte 6 (mit Schraube 7 verschraubt) auf 

die Montageplatte 2 aufsetzen. Vorsichtig in der Mitte der Leiterplatte 7 drücken. 

Drücken Sie bis zum Anschlag, so dass Stecker und Buchsen der Anschlussklemmen 

sehr fest miteinander verbunden sind. Achtung! Schutzmaßnahmen gegen 

elektrostatische Entladungen beachten. 

4. Die vier LED‐Module 8 gemäß Abbildung B auf die Leiterplatte stecken. 


4 schrauben. 


Mounting with plug fixing 

You can choose between two mounting options. In section A “Mounting with screw fixing“ is 

written, how you completely screw the ControlTerminal to the mounting plate. In this section 

C “Mounting with plug fixing“ is written, how you you fix the ControlTerminal to the mounting 

plate only via two connectors. For mounting option A you need more time. Therefore the 

ControlTerminal will be stronger fixed using option A. 

1* Back box 



4 Pattress 










1. Connect the connection wires according to the connection plan to the connectors (screw 

clamps) on the mounting plate 2. Thereby insert two insertion bridges according to the 

connection plan. 


correct mounting direction the 4 pole connector for power supply must be at the top. 

3. Place the pattress 4 with the pre-mounted PCB 6 (fixed with screw 7) onto the mounting 

plate 2. Press the centre of the PCB very carefully. Press up to the stop, so that plugs 

and sockets of the connectors are very firmly connected. Attention! Observe protection 

measures against electrostatic discharges. 

4. Plug the four LED modules 8 onto the PCB according to the figure B. 



in place. 

1 

2 

3* 

3* 

4 

3* 

3* 

6 

Montagevariante mit Steckbefestigung 

Mounting option with plug fixing 

7 

10 

Demontage 

Dismantling 

1. 

1. 

2. 


8 

10 

9 

11 

Demontage 


Dismantling 


77 0550 00 

ControlTerminal Flamenco ® 

00 8801 75, 04/2013 (Rev. 2.0) 

Page 117


ControlTerminal Flamenco ® , Best.‐Nr. 77 0550 00 






ControlTerminal Flamenco ® , order no. 77 0550 00 






terminal. 


Gruppenbus (OSYnet) Zimmerbus (RAN) Stromversorg. 




ohne Sprechen 





(AWG 23) 

* siehe 

Hinweis unten! 



* siehe 


+24 V Einlegebrücke 

+24 V 

0 V 

(00 0220 52) 

Einlegebrücke 



0 V (00 0220 52) 

+24 V RAN 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

RAN 

0V 

D‐L 

D‐H 

D‐G 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

rt 

ge 

sw 

ws 

ws-bl 

bl 

ws-gn 

gn 

br 

ws-br 

or 

ws-or 




* Hinweis! Die Adern NF 1a, NF 1b, NF 2a und NF 2b sind nur am Gruppenbus OSYnet 

vorhanden, wenn am selben Gruppenbus auch ComTerminals (= Terminals mit Sprachübertragung) 

angeschlossen sind. Diese Adern werden an dem ControlTerminal nicht 

angeschlossen. Sie müssen jeweils mit einer Verbindungsdosenklemme (Bestell-Nr. 00 

0222 88, Leitungsdurchmesser 0,6 - 0,8 mm) durchverbunden werden. 



Power supply 








(AWG 23) 

* refer to 

note below! 

+24 V insertion bridge 

+24 V 

(00 0220 52) 


0 V 

insertion bridge or to next room 

0 V (00 0220 52) 

+24 V RAN 

RAN 

0V 

D‐L 

D‐H 

D‐G 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

red 

yellow 

black 

white 

white-blue 

blue 

white-green 

green 

brown 

white-brown 

orange 

white-orange 

rt 


red 

D‐L 

D‐L 

bl 


blue 

D‐H 

D‐H 

gn 

green 

D‐G 


ws 


D‐G white 

NF 1a 

br 

NF 1a brown 

* 

NF 1b 

ws 

NF 1b white 

* refer to * 

NF 2a 

ge 

note below! NF 2a yellow 

* 

NF 2b ws NF 2b white 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

from RAN user 





* Note! The wires NF 1a, NF 1b, NF 2a and NF 2b exist only at the group bus 

OSYnet, if ComTerminals (= terminals with speech) are connected to the same 

group bus. These wires are not connected to the ControlTerminal. Each of them 

has to be connected through using the push-wire connector (order no. 00 0222 

88, wire diameter 0.6 - 0.8 mm). 

Anschlussklemmen (Schraubklemmen) 

Connectors (screw clamps) 


Power supply 

+24 V +24 V 0 V 0 V 


Insertion bridge 



4-polige Anschlussklemme 

4pole connector 


8 pole connector 

0V RAN +24V 

RAN 

DG 

DH 

DL 


Don't use! 

Zimmerbus 

Room bus 

RAN 

Gruppenbus 

Group bus 

OSYnet 

77 0550 00 

ControlTerminal Flamenco ® 

00 8801 75, 04/2013 (Rev. 2.0) 

Page 118


ControlTerminal mit Türschild Flamenco ® , Best.‐Nr. 77 0551 00 

Das ControlTerminal steuert und überwacht alle Zimmerfunktionen gemäß DIN VDE 0834. 


Außerdem Funktion als Zimmerleuchte zur optischen Anzeige von allen Rufarten und 

Personalanwesenheiten sowie zusätzliche Anzeige für WC‐Ruf. Türschild als 

Beschriftungsfeld für die Raumbezeichnung. Wandmontage. 


beschrieben. 






ControlTerminal with doorplate Flamenco ® , order no. 77 0551 00 

Control and monitoring of all room functions in compliance with DIN VDE 0834. Direct 

connection to the group bus (OSYnet) and the room bus (RAN). 

Furthermore optical signalling of all call types and staff presences as well as additional 

display for WC call. Doorplate as label field for room designation. Wall mounting. 










Sie können zwischen zwei Montage-Varianten wählen. In diesem Abschnitt A „Montage mit 


Montageplatte festschrauben. Im Abschnitt C „Montage mit Steckbefestigung“ ist 




1* Einbaudose 




5** Zwei Befestigungsschrauben 




9 Dekorrahmen 



12 Namensschild (Höhe x Breite: 70 x 92 mm) 





1. Leitungen gemäß Kapitel „Anschlüsse“ dieser Verpackungsbeilage an die 

Anschlussklemmen (Schraubklemmen) auf der Montageplatte 2 anschließen. Dabei 

zwei Einlegebrücken wie gezeigt einlegen. 


festschrauben. Einbaurichtung beachten: Klemme für Spannungsversorgung oben. 

3. Gehäuse‐Rückwand 4 mit den beiden Befestigungsschrauben 5 auf der Montageplatte 

2 festschrauben. 

4. Leiterplatte 6 auf Anschlussklemmen aufdrücken und mit der Befestigungsschraube 7 

auf der Gehäuse-Rückwand 4 festschrauben. 

5. Die vier LED‐Module gemäß Abbildung B auf die Leiterplatte stecken. 


4 schrauben. 


8. Namensschild 12 und Schutzabdeckung 13 einlegen. 

1* 

2** 

3* 

3* 

3* 

3* 

5** 



5** 

You can choose between two mounting options. In this section A “Mounting with screw 

fixing“ is written, how you completely screw the ControlTerminal to the mounting plate. In 

section C “Mounting with plug fixing“ is written, how you you fix the ControlTerminal to the 

mounting plate only via two connectors. For mounting option A you need more time. 

Therefore the ControlTerminal will be stronger fixed using option A. 

1* Back box 



4 Pattress 

5** Two fixing screws 







12 Label strip (hxw: 70 x 92 mm) 

13 Protection cover 




1. Connect the connection wires according to chapter “Connections” of this product leaflet 

to the connectors (screw clamps) on the mounting plate 2. Thereby insert two insertion 

bridges as shown. 


correct mounting direction the connector for power supply must be at the top. 

3. Fit the pattress 4 with the two fixing screws 5 to the mounting plate 2. 

4. Press the PCB 6 to the connectors and fit the PCB with the fixing screw 7 to the 

pattress 4. 

5. Plug the four LED modules onto the PCB according to the figure B. 



in place. 


LED-Module 

LED modules 

rot: Rufe 




red: Calls 

green: Staff 1 

yellow: Staff 2 


4 

6 

7 

8 

10 

10 

11 

9 

12 

13 

77 0551 00 

ControlTerminal mit Türschild Flamenco 


00 8801 94, 04/2013 (Rev. 2.0) 

Page 119


ControlTerminal Flamenco ® , Best.‐Nr. 77 0551 00 ControlTerminal Flamenco ® , order no. 77 0551 00 











Montage mit Steckbefestigung 

Sie können zwischen zwei Montage-Varianten wählen. In Abschnitt A „Montage mit 


Montageplatte festschrauben. In diesem Abschnitt C „Montage mit Steckbefestigung“ ist 




1* Einbaudose 







9 Dekorrahmen 



12 Namensschild (Höhe x Breite: 70 x 92 mm) 





Mounting with plug fixing 

You can choose between two mounting options. In section A “Mounting with screw fixing“ is 

written, how you completely screw the ControlTerminal to the mounting plate. In this section 

C “Mounting with plug fixing“ is written, how you you fix the ControlTerminal to the mounting 

plate only via two connectors. For mounting option A you need more time. Therefore the 

ControlTerminal will be stronger fixed using option A. 

1* Back box 



4 Pattress 







12 Label strip (hxw: 70 x 92 mm) 

13 Protection cover 




1. Leitungen gemäß Anschlussplan an die Anschlussklemmen (Schraubklemmen) auf der 

Montageplatte 2 anschließen. Dabei zwei Einlegebrücken gemäß Anschlussplan 

einlegen. 


festschrauben. Einbaurichtung beachten: 4-polige Klemme für Spannungsversorgung 

oben. 

3. Gehäuse-Rückwand 4 mit eingebauter Leiterplatte 6 (mit Schraube 7 verschraubt) auf 

die Montageplatte 2 aufsetzen. Vorsichtig in der Mitte der Leiterplatte 7 drücken. 

Drücken Sie bis zum Anschlag, so dass Stecker und Buchsen der Anschlussklemmen 

sehr fest miteinander verbunden sind. Achtung! Schutzmaßnahmen gegen 

elektrostatische Entladungen beachten. 

4. Die vier LED‐Module 8 gemäß Abbildung B auf die Leiterplatte stecken. 


4 schrauben. 


7. Namensschild 12 und Schutzabdeckung 13 einlegen. 

1 

2 

3* 

3* 

3* 

3* 

6 

Montagevariante mit Steckbefestigung 

Mounting option with plug fixing 

7 

1. Connect the connection wires according to the connection plan to the connectors (screw 

clamps) on the mounting plate 2. Thereby insert two insertion bridges according to the 

connection plan. 


correct mounting direction the 4 pole connector for power supply must be at the top. 

3. Place the pattress 4 with the pre-mounted PCB 6 (fixed with screw 7) onto the mounting 

plate 2. Press the centre of the PCB very carefully. Press up to the stop, so that plugs 

and sockets of the connectors are very firmly connected. Attention! Observe protection 

measures against electrostatic discharges. 

4. Plug the four LED modules 8 onto the PCB according to the figure B. 



in place. 


Demontage 

Dismantling 

1. 

2. 


4 

8 

10 

10 

11 

1. 

9 

12 

13 

Demontage 


Dismantling 


77 0551 00 

ControlTerminal mit Türschild Flamenco 


00 8801 94, 04/2013 (Rev. 2.0) 

Page 120


ControlTerminal mit Türschild Flamenco ® , Best.‐Nr. 77 0551 00 






ControlTerminal with doorplate Flamenco ® , order no. 77 0551 00 






terminal. 


Gruppenbus (OSYnet) Zimmerbus (RAN) Stromversorg. 




ohne Sprechen 





(AWG 23) 

* siehe 




* siehe 


+24 V Einlegebrücke 

+24 V 

0 V 

(00 0220 52) 




0 V (00 0220 52) 

+24 V RAN 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

* 

RAN 

0V 

D‐L 

D‐H 

D‐G 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

D‐L 

D‐H 

D‐G 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

rt 

ge 

sw 

ws 

ws-bl 

bl 

ws-gn 

gn 

br 

ws-br 

or 

ws-or 

rt 

bl 

gn 

ws 

br 

ws 

ge 

ws 






* Hinweis! Die Adern NF 1a, NF 1b, NF 2a und NF 2b sind nur am Gruppenbus OSYnet 

vorhanden, wenn am selben Gruppenbus auch ComTerminals (= Terminals mit Sprachübertragung) 

angeschlossen sind. Diese Adern werden an dem ControlTerminal nicht 

angeschlossen. Sie müssen jeweils mit einer Verbindungsdosenklemme (Bestell-Nr. 00 

0222 88, Leitungsdurchmesser 0,6 - 0,8 mm) durchverbunden werden. 



Power supply 








(AWG 23) 

* refer to 

note below! 



* refer to 

note below! 

+24 V insertion bridge 

+24 V 

(00 0220 52) 


0 V 

insertion bridge or to next room 

0 V (00 0220 52) 

+24 V RAN 

* 

* 

* 

* 

RAN 

0V 

D‐L 

D‐H 

D‐G 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

D‐L 

D‐H 

D‐G 

NF 1a 

* 

NF 1b 

* 

NF 2a 

* 

NF 2b 

* 

red 

yellow 

black 

white 

white-blue 

blue 

white-green 

green 

brown 

white-brown 

orange 

white-orange 

red 

blue 

green 

white 

brown 

white 

yellow 

white 

from RAN user 





* Note! The wires NF 1a, NF 1b, NF 2a and NF 2b exist only at the group bus 

OSYnet, if ComTerminals (= terminals with speech) are connected to the same 

group bus. These wires are not connected to the ControlTerminal. Each of these 

has to be connected through using the push-wire connector (order no. 00 0222 

88, wire diameter 0.6 - 0.8 mm). 

Anschlussklemmen (Schraubklemmen) 

Connectors (screw clamps) 


Power supply 

+24 V +24 V 0 V 0 V 









0V RAN +24V 

RAN 

DG 

DH 

DL 


Don't use! 

Zimmerbus 

Room bus 

RAN 

Gruppenbus 

Group bus 

OSYnet 

77 0551 00 

ControlTerminal mit Türschild Flamenco ® 

ControlTerminal with doorplate Flamenco ® 

00 8801 94, 04/2013 (Rev. 2.0) 

Page 121


Page 122 



14.4 Connection sockets 

70 0171 03 Connection socket with call switch 

70 0171 50 Connection socket with call switch, bedhead unit 

70 0424 00 Connection socket combi 

70 0434 00 Connection socket combi, bedhead unit 

70 0449 00 Connection socket combi 

70 0448 00 Connection socket combi, bedhead unit 



Page 123


Steckvorrichtung mit Ruftaste, Best.‐Nr. 70 0171 03 

Steckvorrichtung mit zwei 8‐poligen Steckbuchsen zum Anschluss von Rufgeräten, wie z.B. 

Birntastern oder medizinischen Überwachungsgeräten. Der Anschluss für ein drittes 

Rufgerät (externer Ruftaster) erfolgt von der Rückseite mit einer speziellen 

Anschlussleitung. 





Connection socket with call switch, order no. 70 0171 03 

Connection socket with two 8pole jacks for connection of call devices like pear push 

switches or medical monitoring devices. The connection for a third call device (external call 

switch) is made on the back side with a special connection cable. 


manual. 




Montage 

1* Einbaudose 


3 Montagerahmen mit Leiterplatte (vormontiert) 


4 Abdeckung 

5 Klemmkralle (bei fehlender 

Schaubmöglichkeit) 

1. Anschlussklemme 2 in die eingebaute Buchse (grün) der Leiterplatte 3 stecken. 

2. Wenn gewünscht: Klemme der Anschlussleitung (50 0308 02) für das externe Rufgerät 

in die eingebaute Buchse (schwarz) auf der Leiterplatte 3 stecken. 




4. Abdeckung 4 über den Montagerahmen 3 drücken und einrasten lassen. 

Anschlüsse 

Zum Anschluss als externe Rufgeräte dürfen nur Öffner‐Kontakte verwendet werden. Der 

Anschluss erfolgt über die Anschlussleitung, Best.Nr. 50 0308 02 (Länge: 50 cm). 

Die maximale Leitungslänge für den externen Rufanschluss beträgt 2,5 m. 

Bettennummer einstellen 

Über den Programmierschalter 1, 2 und 3 der Leiterplatte kann die entsprechende 

Bettennummer eingestellt werden. 

*1 Achtung: Diagnostikruf nur in Verbindung mit eingestellter Bettennummer. 

Bei Bettennummer 6 kann kein Diagnostikruf verwendet werden. 

Demontage 

1. Schraubendreher an einer der beiden Rastnasen ansetzen und Abdeckung abheben. 



1 

2 

5 

Mounting 

1* Back box 

2* Connector (70 0807 01) 

3 Mounting frame with 

printed circuit board (pre‐mounted) 

4 Cover 

5 Fixing clamp (if screw fixing is 

not possible) 

* not included in delivery. 

1. Plug the connector 2 into the green socket on the printed circuit board 3. 

2. If required: Plug the terminal of the connection cable (50 0308 02) for the external call 

device into the black socket on the printed circuit board 3. 

3. Fix the mounting frame 3 using the screwpoints of the back box 1. If screw fixing is not 

possible, use the fixing clamp 5 to fix the mounting frame to the box. The fixing clamp 

cannot be used with back boxes for partition walls. 

4. Fit the cover 4 over the mounting frame 3 and lock it. 

Connections 

As external call devices only normally-closed contacts may be used. The external call 

device is connected via the special connection cable, order no. 50 0308 02 (length: 50 cm). 

The maximum cable length for the external call device is 2.5 m. 

Setting the bed number 

The corresponding bed number can be specified by means of the coding switches 1, 2 and 3 

of the printed circuit board. 

*1 Attention: Diagnostic call only in combination with programmed bed number. 

With bed number 6 no diagnostic call can be used. 

Dismantling 

1. Place the screwdriver in one of the two notches and take off the cover. 

2. Remove the screws at the mounting frame 3. 


vom RAN‐Teilnehmer 

from RAN user 

Lichtanschaltung / Light control 

B(lack) = 0V schwarz 

Y(ellow) = RAN gelb 

R(ed) = +24 V rot 

L (ight) = Licht weiß 

B(lack) = 0V schwarz 

Impulsdauer / pulse duration 

150 ms, 24 V DC, max. 200 mA 

Anschluss externes Rufgerät: 

Connection external call device: 

B 

Y 

R 

L 

2 

Buchsen 

jacks 

3 

Beruhigungslicht / reassurance light 

+24V 

4 

0V 

Rufeingang / call input 

P3 P2 P1 PG NC 

ON 

= Bett / bed 1 

3 Rückseite 

back side 

50 0308 02 

externes Rufgerät 

external call device 

RAN + Licht 

RAN & light 

1 2 3 4 5 

Werkseitige Einstellung 

PG = nicht verändern 

NC = nicht verwendet 

Factory setting 

PG = do not change 

NC = not used 





= Bett / bed 6 *1 

70 0171 03 

Steckvorrichtung mit Ruftaste 

Connection socket with call switch 

00 8800 79, 06/06 (Rev. 4.0) 

Page 124


Steckvorrichtung mit Ruftaste, Kanal, Best.‐Nr. 70 0171 50 

Steckvorrichtung mit zwei 8‐poligen Steckbuchsen zum Anschluss von Rufgeräten, wie z.B. 

Birntastern oder medizinischen Überwachungsgeräten. Der Anschluss für ein zusätzliches, 

externes Rufgerät inkl. Findelicht und Beruhigungslicht erfolgt von der Rückseite mit einer 

speziellen Anschlussleitung. Zwei Schaltausgänge für Lichtschaltung. Einbau in 

medizinische Versorgungseinheit. 





Elektromagnetische Verträglichkeit! Durch unzureichende Entstörung von Leuchtstofflampen 

in medizinischen Versorgungseinheiten kann es zu Störungen der Rufanlage 

kommen. Unter Umständen lassen sich diese externen Störungen durch den Einbau von 

Entstörgliedern (Varistor‐Schaltungen) vermeiden. Die Varistor‐Schaltungen sind bei den 

Herstellern der medizinischen Versorgungseinheiten zu beziehen. Tunstall bietet hierfür das 

Überspannungsschutzfilter 230 V (Bestell‐Nr. 70 0890 97) an. 

Das EMV‐Verhalten von verschiedenen medizinischen Versorgungseinheiten kann sehr 

unterschiedlich sein. Sogar zwei Versorgungseinheiten des gleichen Typs können sich 

unterschiedlich verhalten, wenn sie unterschiedlich installiert wurden. 

In medizinischen Versorgungseinheiten gelten für die Verlegung der Leitungen der Rufanlage 

die Bestimmungen von DIN EN ISO 11197. 

Codierschalter einstellen 

Connection socket with call switch, bedhead unit, order no. 70 0171 50 

Connection socket with two 8-pole sockets for connection of call devices like pear push 

switches or medical monitoring devices. The connection of an additional external call 

device incl. location light and reassurance light is made on the back side with a special 

connection cable. Two outputs for light control. Mounting in a medical supply unit. 


manual. 



Electromagnetic compatibility! Due to insufficient suppression at fluorescent lamps in 

medical supply units faults in the call system may occur. These external interferences 

possibly can be avoided by installing suppressor elements (varistor circuits). Varistor circuits 

are available from the manufacturers of the medical supply units. Tunstall offers a 

proven overvoltage filter 230 V (order no. 70 0890 97). 

Medical supply units may differ clearly in EMC behaviour. Even two supply units of the 

same type may differ, if the installation is different. 

When laying call system cables in medical supply units the regulations of European standard 

ISO 11197 have to be followed. 

Setting coding switches 

OFF 

OFF 

Bett‐Nr. 

Externes Rufgerät 

Bed no. 

External call device 


Bett-Nr.: 

= Bett 1 

= Bett 2 

= Bett 3 

= Bett 4 

Externes Rufgerät: 

= Kein externes Rufgerät angeschlossen. 

= Externes Rufgerät ist Schließer. 

= Externes Rufgerät ist Öffner. 

= Bett 5 

= Bett 6 *1 

Codierschalter 4 muss immer in Position OFF stehen. 

*1 Achtung: Diagnostikrufe können nur verwendet werden, wenn ein Bett‐Nr. eingestellt 

ist. Bei Bett‐Nr. 6 kann kein Diagnostikruf verwendet werden. 

Montage 

Der Einbau der Steckvorrichtung in die medizinische Versorgungseinheit ist von der 

jeweiligen Ausführung der Versorgungseinheit abhängig. Der Einbau erfolgt durch den 

Hersteller der medizinischen Versorgungseinheit. 

Bed no.: 

= Bed 1 

= Bed 2 

= Bed 3 

= Bed 4 

External call device: 

= No external call device connected. 

= Normally open contact. 

= Normally closed contact. 

= Bed 5 

= Bed 6 *1 

Coding switch 4 must always be set to OFF. 

*1 Attention: A diagnostic call can only be used, if a bed number is set. 

With bed number 6 no diagnostic call can be used. 

Mounting 

The mounting depends on the individual model of the medical supply unit. The connection 

socket is mounted by the manufacturer of the medical supply unit. 

Rückwärtige Montage: / Mounting from backside: 

Anschlussklemme, 5-polig (Best.-Nr. 00 0211 37) 

Connector, 5 pole (order no. 00 0211 37) 

RAN + Licht 

RAN & light 



Verbindungsleitung (Best.‐Nr. 50 0308 02) 

Connection cable (order no. 50 0308 02) 

Ruftaste 

Call button 

Steckbuchsen 

Sockets 

55 mm 

70,5 mm 

Steckvorrichtung mit Ruftaste Kanal 

Connection socket with call switch bedhead unit 

Medizinische Versorgungseinheit 


55 mm 

70,5 mm 

70 0171 50 

Steckvorrichtung mit Ruftaste, Kanal 

Connection socket with call switch, bedhead unit 

00 8801 81, 10/11 (Rev. 2.0) 

Page 125


Zum Anschluss als externes Rufgerät darf ein Öffner‐ oder ein Schließer-Kontakt verwendet 

werden. Der Anschluss erfolgt über die Anschlussleitung, Best.-Nr. 50 0308 02 (Länge: 

50 cm). Die maximale Leitungslänge für den externen Rufanschluss beträgt 2,5 m. 

As external call devices only normally-closed contacts may be used. The external call 

device is connected via the special connection cable, order no. 50 0308 02 (length: 50 cm). 

The maximum cable length for the external call device is 2.5 m. 

Anschlussklemme, 5-polig 

(Best.-Nr. 00 0211 37) 

RAN + Licht 


Connector, 5 pole 


RAN & light 



(Best.‐Nr. 50 0308 02) 

Connection cable 


RAN und Licht anschließen: 

0V schwarz 

links 

Connecting RAN and light: 

0V black 

left-hand 

vom RAN‐Teilnehmer RAN gelb 

+24V rot 

from RAN user 

RAN yellow 

+24V red 

Lichtanschaltung 1 

light control 1 

Lichtanschaltung 2 

light control 2 

Die Impulsdauer (24 V DC, max. 200 mA) entspricht 

der Dauer des Tastendrucks. 

rechts 

Anschlussklemme 

Best.‐Nr. 00 0211 37 

The pulse duration (24 V DC, 200 mA max.) is the 

same as the duration of depressing the button. 

right-hand 

Connector 


Externes Rufgerät als Öffner anschließen: 

Beruhigungslicht 

+24V 

links 

Connecting external call device as normally closed contact: 

left-hand 

reassurance light 

+24V 

Rufeingang 

Externes Rufgerät als Schließer (z.B. Siemens Mediset) anschließen: 

Beruhigungslicht 

+24V 

Rufeingang 

56kOhm 

rechts 


Best.‐Nr. 50 0308 02 

links 

rechts 


Best.‐Nr. 50 0308 02 

call input 

Connecting external call device as normally open contact (e.g. Siemens Mediset): 

reassurance light 

+24V 

call input 

56kOhm 

right-hand 



left-hand 

right-hand 




70 0171 50 

Steckvorrichtung mit Ruftaste, Kanal 

Connection socket with call switch, bedhead unit 

00 8801 81, 10/11 (Rev. 2.0) 

Page 126


Steckvorrichtung Kombi, Best.‐Nr. 70 0424 00 

Kombinierte Steckvorrichtung mit zwei unterschiedlichen Steckbuchsen zum Anschluss 

von Bedien- und Rufgeräten. Vorgesehen zur Übertragung von Rufen, ELA-Programmen 

und zur Steuerung von 2 Relais zur Lichtschaltung. Vorzugsweise hergestellt für den 

Wandeinbau. 





Connection socket combi, order no. 70 0424 00 

A combined connection socket with two different sockets for connection of patient units and 

call devices. Designed for transmission of calls, entertainment programmes and control of two 

relays for light switching. Suitable for wall mounting. 


manual. 




Montage 

1. Buchsenelement 1 in die Einbaudose stecken. 

2. Montagerahmen 2 zusammen mit dem Buchsenelement auf die Einbaudose schrauben. 

3. Beide Stecker 3 mit den Steckbuchsen verbinden (Stecker A in Buchse A, Stecker B in 

Buchse B). 

4. Abdeckplatte 4 auf den Montagerahmen 2 drücken. 

Anschluss 

Verwendbare Leitungsquerschnitte: 0,55 - 1 mm Ø. 

Abgeschirmte Leitungen für LS, MIC bis auf max. 30 mm absetzen! 

Zur Vermeidung von Kurzschlüssen den Beidraht (SCH) isolieren. 

Nur einen Schaltdraht pro Klemme einstecken. 

Handhabung der Klemmen mit lötfreier Anschlusstechnik nach dem Steckklemmprinzip: 

1. Leiter 8 mm abisolieren. 

2. Abisolierten Leiter bis zum Anschlag in die Klemme stecken. 

3. Zum Lösen des Leiters einen Schraubendreher mit einer Klinge 2,5 x 0,4 mm oder 3,5 x 

0,5 mm in die Öffnung stecken und den Leiter herausziehen. 

Hinweis! Zum Anschluss des Schirmdrahts Schraubendreher in die Öffnung stecken und 

Federkontakt mit dem Schraubendreher geöffnet halten, während Sie die Schirmleitung 

einführen. Anschließend korrekte Kontaktbelegung prüfen durch Ziehen an der Leitung. 

TV 

In Verbindung mit der Anschaltung eines TV‐Geräts ist die Bedienung und der zur 

Verfügung stehende Funktionsumfang unterschiedlich und abhängig von dem verwendeten 

TV‐Gerät sowie der integrierten Steuerung. Genaue Einzelheiten der Anschaltung und der 

Funktionen sollten vor der Installation mit dem Auftraggeber geklärt werden. 

Bettennummer und TV‐Option einstellen 

Bettennummer 1 bis 6 einstellen: Mit den Schaltern P3, P2, P1 wie in der Tabelle 

abgebildet einstellen. Beispiel.: Bettenummer 1 = P3 off, P2 off, P1 on . 

TV auf ON: Hörfunkbetrieb über Tuner im TV-System. 

TV auf OFF: Hörfunkbetrieb über ELA 

PG‐Schalter nicht verändern. 

*1 Achtung: Bei Bettennummer 6 kann kein Diagnostik-Ruf verwendet werden. 

4 

A 

3 

B 

2 

1 

Mounting 

1. Fit the socket 1 into the back box. 

2. Screw the mounting frame 2 together with the socket onto the back box. 

3. Connect both plugs 3 with the sockets (A in A, B in B). 

4. Push the cover 4 onto the mounting frame 2. 

Connection 

Useable wire gauges: 0.55 - 1 mm Ø 

Shielded wires for LS, MIC: Strip to max. 30 mm! 

Insulate the guide wire (SCH) to prevent short circuiting. 

Connect only one wire per terminal. 

Handling of terminals with solderless connection technique: 

1. Strip the wire (8 mm). 

2. Insert the stripped wire into the terminal until it stops. 

3. For detaching the wire insert a screw driver with a tip of 2.5 x 0.4 mm or 3.5 x 0.5 mm 

into the opening and pull out the wire. 

Note! For connecting the shield wire, use the screw driver to hold the spring contact open, 

while you are inserting the shield wire. Afterwards check for a firm wire contact by pulling at 

the wire. 

TV 

The available TV functions depend on the TV set in use. 

Before the final installation, technicians shall check with the ordering party for the project to 

clarify the details regarding the connection and the functions. 

Setting bed number and TV option 

Setting of bed numbers 1 to 6: Use switches P3, P2, P1 as shown in the table. 

Example: Bed number 1 = P3 OFF, P2 OFF, P1 ON 

TV to ON: Radio sound via tuner in TV system. 

TV to OFF: Radio sound via Entertainment (ELA). 

PG switches: Do not change. 

*1 Attention: With bed number 6 diagnostic call is not possible. 

A 

Obere oder rechte Seite 

top or right side 

1b 

1a 

2b 

2a 

3b 

3a 

4b 

4a 

5b 

5a 

B 

10 

9 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

Schirmleitung 

shield wire 

Schraubendreher 

screw driver 

P3 P2 P1 

1 off off on 

2 off on off 

3 off on on 

4 on off off 

5 on off on 

ON 

OFF 

1 2 3 4 5 

6 on 

on 

off 

*1 

P3 P2 P1 PG 

TV 

70 0424 00 

Steckvorrichtung Kombi 


00 8800 74, 10/11 (Rev. 3.0) 

Page 127


ELA 

ELA1a 

ELA1b 

ELA2a 

ELA2b 

ELA3a 

ELA3b 

ELA4a 

ELA4b 

ELA5a 

ELA5b 

}{ 

}{ 

}{ 

}{ 

}{ 

25 V 

ELA vom Zimmer 

}{ 

paarig verseilt 

Ie 

Entertainment 

ELA1a 

ELA1b 

ELA2a 

ELA2b 

ELA3a 

ELA3b 

ELA4a 

ELA4b 

ELA5a 

ELA5b 

}{ 

}{ 

}{ 

}{ 

}{ 

25 V 

Ie 

Entertainment from room 

}{ 

twisted pair 


TV 

Licht 







TV‐Ton zum Bett 

24V 

RAN 

0V 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

Anschaltung Lichtrelais 

OV 

Leselicht LT 1 

Raumlicht LT 2 

24V 

0V 

RAN 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

}{ 

ge 

ws 

rt 

ge 

sw 

ws 

ge 

ws 

sw 

rt 

br 

sw 

gr 

ws 

bl 

vom ComTerminal oder 


Is 



Is 

vom TV‐System 

25Veff, 3 KOhm, 200 mW pro Bett 

zum Relais Lichtschaltung 

Pulsdauer 150 ms, 

24 V DC, max. 200 mA 


TV 

Light 








Cable: CCS32 cable 

TV sound to the bed 

Connection of light relay 

24V 

RAN 

0V 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

24V 

0V 

RAN 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

OV 

reading light LT 1 

room light LT 2 

}{ 

yellow 

white 

red 

yellow 

black 

white 

yellow 

white 

black 

red 

brown 

black 

grey 

white 

blue 

shield 

from ComTerminal 

or connection socket 

combi 



combi 

Is 

from TV system 

25Veff, 3 KOhm, 200 mW per bed 

to light switching relay 

pulse duration 150 ms, 

24 V DC, max. 200 mA 

Is 


A 

B 

1b 

1a 

2b 

2a 

3b 

3a 

4b 

4a 

5b 

5a 

10 

9 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

70 0424 00 



00 8800 74, 10/11 (Rev. 3.0) 

Page 128


Steckvorrichtung Kombi Kanal, Best.‐Nr. 70 0434 00 


von Bedien- und Rufgeräten. Vorgesehen zur Übertragung von Rufen, ELA-Programmen 

und zur Steuerung von 2 Relais zur Lichtschaltung. 

Vorzugsweise hergestellt für den Einbau in medizinische Versorgungseinheiten. 

Connection socket combi bedhead unit, order no. 70 0434 00 

Combined connection socket with two different sockets for connection of patient handsets and 

other call devices. Designed for transmission of calls, entertainment programmes and control 

of two relays for light switching. 

Suitable for mounting in medical supply units. 






in medizinischen Versorgungseinheiten kann es zu Störungen der Rufanlage kommen. 

Unter Umständen lassen sich diese externen Störungen durch den Einbau von Entstörgliedern 

(Varistor‐Schaltungen) vermeiden. Die Varistor‐Schaltungen sind bei den Herstellern zu 

beziehen. Tunstall bietet hierfür das Überspannungsschutzfilter 230 V (70 0890 97) an. 







manual. 






are commercially available from electric/electronic suppliers. Tunstall offers a proven overvoltage 

filter 230 V (order no. 70 0890 97). 

Medical supply units may differ clearly in EMC behaviour. Even two supply units of the same 

type may differ, if the installation is different. 




Steckvorrichtung einstellen 

Folgende Einstellungen müssen vor Einbau der Steckvorrichtung gemacht werden: 

1. Bettennummer einstellen 

Bett-Nr. Jumper gesteckt: 

Bett 1 P1 

Bett 2 P2 

Bett 3 P1, P2 (werkseitige Einstellung) 

Bett 4 P3 

Bett 5 P1, P3 

Bett 6*) P2, P3 

*) Bei Bett-Nr. 6 kann kein Diagnostikruf verwendet werden. 

2. Lichtoption 

Jumper offen: Separate Ausgänge LT1 und LT2 für die Lichtrelais 

(Lichttasten separat) 

Jumper gesteckt: Ausgänge LT1 und LT2 sind verbunden (Lichttasten parallel). 

In diesem Fall nur ein Relais anschließen. 

3. TV‐Option 

Jumper 1 gesteckt: Hörfunkbetrieb über ELA (werkseitige Einstellung). 

Jumper 2 gesteckt: Hörfunkbetrieb über Tuner im TV‐System. 

4. TV-Tonkanal TV1 - TV4 

Für diese Einstellung werden immer 2 Jumper gesteckt. 

Bei sternförmig verteiltem TV‐Ton wird der Tonkanal entsprechend der Bett‐Nummer 

eingestellt. 


Bett 1 TV1 

Bett 2 TV2 

Bett 3 TV3 

Bett 4 TV4 

Bei parallel verteiltem TV-Ton wird der Tonkanal 1 gewählt. 

TV-Ton 

Die verfügbaren TV-Funktionen hängen von dem verwendeten TV-Gerät ab. Einzelheiten 

der Anschaltung und der Funktionen sollten vor der Installation mit dem Auftraggeber 

geklärt werden. 

Montage 


jeweiligen Ausführung der Versorgungseinheit abhängig. 

1. Gehäuse der medizinischen Versorgungseinheit öffnen. 

2. Steckvorrichtung einsetzen. 

3. Das Flachbandkabel zum Anschluss an die mediz. Versorgungseinheit aufstecken. 

4. Bei vorhandenem Bettenlicht auch den Anschluss zum Lichtrelais aufstecken. 

5. Gehäuse der medizinischen Versorgungseinheit schließen. 

Setting the connection socket 

Before mounting the connection socket please adjust as follows: 

1. Setting of bed numbers 

Bed no. jumper placed: 

Bed 1 P1 

Bed 2 P2 

Bed 3 P1, P2 (factory setting) 

Bed 4 P3 

Bed 5 P1, P3 

Bed 6*) P2, P3 

*) When using bed number 6 no diagnostic call can be used. 

2. Light option 

Jumper open: Separate outputs LT1 and LT2 for the light relays 

(light switches are separate). 

Jumper placed: Outputs LT1 and LT2 are connected (light switches are 

parallel). In this case connect only one relay. 

3. TV option 

Jumper 1 placed: Radio via entertainment system (factory setting). 

Jumper 2 placed: Radio via tuner in TV system. 

4. TV tone TV1 - TV4 

For this settings, always place 2 jumpers. 

Where star-type distribution of TV tone is provided, the tone channel is set in reference to 

the bed number. 

Bed no. Jumper placed: 

Bed 1 TV1 

Bed 2 TV2 

Bed 3 TV3 

Bed 4 TV4 

Where TV tone is parallel, select tone channel 1. 

TV-Ton 

The available TV functions depend on the TV set in use. Before the final installation, 

technicians shall check with the ordering party for the project to clarify the details regarding 

the connection and the functions. 

Mounting 

After the settings are made the connection socket is mounted into the medical supply unit. 

The mounting depends on the individual model of the medical supply unit. 

1. Open the housing of the medical supply unit. 

2. Put in the connection socket. 

3. Put on the flat band cable to the medical supply unit. 

4. If there is bedlight available put on also the connection to the light relay. 

5. Close the housing of the medical supply unit. 

Bett‐Nummer 

bed number 

Anschluss Versorgungseinheit 

connection supply unit 

Anschluss Leselicht 

Impulsdauer 150 ms, 

24 V Gleichspannung, 

max. 200 mA 

connection reading light 

pulse duration +24 V 

150 ms, OV 

24 V DC LT1 

max. 200 mA NC 

P3 P2 P1 

TV1 TV2 TV3 TV4 

1 2 

70 0434 00 

Steckvorrichtung Kombi Kanal 

Connection socket combi bedhead unit 

Lichtoption 

light option 

TV‐Option 

TV option 

TV‐Tonkanal 

TV tone channel 

00 8800 75, 10/11 (Rev. 4.1) 

Page 129

Anschlüsse am Anschlussfeld D Connections to connection field GB 

ELA 

}{ 

}{ 

}{ 

}{ 

}{ 

6 

7 

21 

22 

23 

ELA1a 

ELA1b 

ELA2a 

ELA2b 

ELA3a 

Ie 

6 

7 

21 

22 

23 

ELA1a 

ELA1b 

ELA2a 

ELA2b 

ELA3a 

24 

25 

ELA3b 

ELA4a 

ELA vom Zimmer 

24 

25 

ELA3b 

ELA4a 

26 ELA4b 

26 ELA4b 

27 ELA5a 

}{ 

27 ELA5a 

}{ 

28 ELA5b 


28 ELA5b 

Entertainment 

}{ 

}{ 

}{ 

}{ 

Ie 

Entertainment from room 

}{ 

twisted pair 



Kabel: 

2x IY(ST)Y 2x2x0,8 

1 

11 

40 

24V 

RAN 

0V 

rt 

ge 

sw 

ws 

Romm bus (RAN) 


Cable: 


1 

11 

40 

24V 

RAN 

0V 

red 

yellow 

black 

white 


TV 



Kabel: 

CCS32‐Kabel 

TV‐Ton zum Bett 

37 LS 

36 MIC 

35 SCH B 

1 

40 

11 

37 

36 

35 

24V 

0V 

RAN 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

}{ 

ge 

ws 

sw 

rt 

br 

sw 

gr 

ws 

bl 

vom ComTerminal 


Abgeschirmte Leitungen für LS, MIC dürfen 

maximal 30 mm abgemantelt werden! 


TV 



Cable: 

CCS32‐Kabel 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

24V 

0V 

RAN 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

TV sound to the bed 

4 TV1a 

4 TV1a 

5 TV1b }{ 

5 TV1b }{ 

31 TV2a 

31 TV2a 

32 TV2b 

}{ 

32 TV2b 

}{ 

29 TV3a 

vom Fernsehsystem 

}{ 

Ia 

29 TV3a 

}{ 

30 TV3b 

30 TV3b 

33 TV4a 

33 TV4a 

}{ 

}{ 

34 TV4b 

}{ 

34 TV4b 


Is 

Is 

37 

36 

35 

1 

40 

11 

37 

36 

35 

}{ 

yellow 

white 

black 

red 

brown 

black 

grey 

white 

blue 

shield 


Is 


Is 

Shielded wires for LS, MIC: strip to max. 30 mm! 

from TV system 

}{ 

twisted pair 

Ia 


Licht 


39 

9 

OV 

LT 2 

zum Relais Raumlicht 

Ia 

Pulsdauer 150 ms, 

24 V DC, max. 200 mA 

Light 

Connection of light relay 

39 

9 

OV 

LT 2 

to room light relay 

pulse duration 150 ms, 

24 V DC, max. 200 mA 

Ia 

70 0434 00 

Steckvorrichtung Kombi Kanal 

Connection socket combi bedhead unit 

Anschlussfeld Versorgungseinheit (Beispiel) 

Connection field supply unit (example) 

Flachkabel zu Steckvorrichtung 

Kombi Kanal 

Flat cable to connection 

socket combi bedhead unit 

40 

1 

Klemmennummern wie Flachkabel 

Terminal numbers as flat cable 

OV 

OV 

MIC 

TV4b 

TV2b 

TV3b 

ELA5b 

ELA4b 

ELA3b 

ELA2b 

OV 

OV 

OV 

FB3 

FB1 

OV 

OV 

ELA1a 

TV1a 

+24V 

40 

38 

36 

34 

32 

30 

28 

26 

24 

22 

20 

18 

16 

14 

12 

10 

8 

6 

4 

2 

OV 

LS 

SCHB 

TV4a 

TV2a 

TV3a 

ELA5a 

ELA4a 

ELA3a 

ELA2a 

OV 

OV 

FB4 

FB2 

RAN 

LT2 

ELA1b 

TV1b 

+24V 

+24V 

39 

37 

35 

33 

31 

29 

27 

25 

23 

21 

19 

17 

15 

13 

11 

9 

7 

5 

3 

1 

40 

39 

38 

20 

18 

3 

2 

1 

24 V Drahtbrücken / wire links − 0 V 

(unbedingt erforderlich) 

(absolutely required) 

00 8800 75, 10/11 (Rev. 4.1) 

Page 130


Steckvorrichtung Kombi Universal, Best.‐Nr. 70 0449 00 


von Bedien- und Rufgeräten. Vorgesehen zur Übertragung von Rufen und zur Weiterleitung 

von Steuersignalen für externe Aktoren. Vorzugsweise hergestellt für den Wandeinbau. 

Verwendung nur in Verbindung mit PBK Hand Universal, Best.-Nr. 74 0748 00 und 

RAN-Schnittstelle Universal, Best.‐Nr. 70 0848 00. 





Connection socket combi universal, order no. 70 0449 00 


other call devices. Designed for transmission of calls and for routing of control signals for 

external actuators. Suitable for wall mounting. 

Use only in combination with patient handset universal, order no. 74 0748 00, and RAN interface 

universal, order no. 70 0848 00. 


manual. 




Montage 

1. Buchsenelement 1 in die Einbaudose stecken. 

2. Montagerahmen 2 zusammen mit dem Buchsenelement auf die Einbaudose schrauben. 

3. Beide Stecker 3 mit den Steckbuchsen verbinden (Stecker A in Buchse A, Stecker B in 

Buchse B). 

4. Abdeckplatte 4 auf den Montagerahmen 2 drücken. 

Anschluss 

Verwendbare Leitungsquerschnitte: 0,55 - 1 mm Ø. 

Abgeschirmte Leitungen für LS, MIC bis auf max. 30 mm absetzen! 

Zur Vermeidung von Kurzschlüssen den Beidraht (SCH) isolieren. 

Nur einen Schaltdraht pro Klemme einstecken. 

Handhabung der Klemmen mit lötfreier Anschlusstechnik nach dem Steckklemmprinzip: 

1. Leiter 8 mm abisolieren. 

2. Abisolierten Leiter bis zum Anschlag in die Klemme stecken. 

3. Zum Lösen des Leiters einen Schraubendreher mit einer Klinge 2,5 x 0,4 mm oder 3,5 x 

0,5 mm in die Öffnung stecken und den Leiter herausziehen. 

Hinweis! Zum Anschluss des Schirmdrahts Schraubendreher in die Öffnung stecken und 

Federkontakt mit dem Schraubendreher geöffnet halten, während Sie die Schirmleitung 

einführen. Anschließend korrekte Kontaktbelegung prüfen durch Ziehen an der Leitung. 


Bettennummer 1 bis 6 einstellen: Mit den Schaltern P3, P2, P1 wie in der Tabelle 

abgebildet einstellen. Beispiel.: Bettenummer 1 = P3 off, P2 off, P1 on . 

PG‐, und TV-Schalter nicht verändern. 

*1 Achtung: Bei Bettennummer 6 kann kein Diagnostik-Ruf verwendet werden. 

4 

A 

3 

B 

2 

1 

Mounting 

1. Fit the socket 1 into the back box. 

2. Screw the mounting frame 2 together with the socket onto the back box. 

3. Connect both plugs 3 with the sockets (A in A, B in B). 

4. Push the cover 4 onto the mounting frame 2. 

Connection 

Useable wire gauges: 0.55 - 1 mm Ø 

Shielded wires for LS, MIC: Strip to max. 30 mm! 

Insulate the guide wire (SCH) to prevent short circuiting. 

Connect only one wire per terminal. 

Handling of terminals with solderless connection technique: 

1. Strip the wire (8 mm). 

2. Insert the stripped wire into the terminal until it stops. 

3. For detaching the wire insert a screw driver with a tip of 2.5 x 0.4 mm or 3.5 x 0.5 mm 

into the opening and pull out the wire. 

Note! For connecting the shield wire, use the screw driver to hold the spring contact open, 

while you are inserting the shield wire. Afterwards check for a firm wire contact by pulling at 

the wire. 

Setting bed number 

Setting of bed numbers 1 to 6: Use switches P3, P2, P1 as shown in the table. 

Example: Bed number 1 = P3 OFF, P2 OFF, P1 ON 

PG and TV switches: Do not change. 

*1 Attention: With bed number 6 diagnostic call is not possible. 

A 



1b 

1a 

2b 

2a 

3b 

3a 

4b 

4a 

5b 

5a 

B 

10 

9 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

Schirmleitung 

shield wire 

Schraubendreher 

screw driver 

P3 P2 P1 

1 off off on 

2 off on off 

3 off on on 

4 on off off 

5 on off on 

ON 

OFF 

1 2 3 4 5 

6 on 

on 

off 

*1 

P3 P2 P1 PG 

TV 

70 0449 00 

Steckvorrichtung Kombi Universal 

Connection socket combi universal 

00 8801 42, 03/12 (Rev. 1.0) 

Page 131





24V 

RAN 

0V 

rt 

ge 

sw 

ws 




24V 

RAN 

0V 

red 

yellow 

black 

white 





LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

24V 

0V 

RAN 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

}{ 

ge 

ws 

sw 

rt 

br 

sw 

gr 

ws 

bl 


Steckvorrichtung 


Steckvorrichtung 

Is 

Is 




Cable: CCS32 cable 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

24V 

0V 

RAN 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

}{ 

yellow 

white 

black 

red 

brown 

black 

grey 

white 

blue 

shield 



Is 



Is 

Nicht-dimmbares Licht 

Dimmbares Licht 


Leselicht 

OV 

LT 1 


Anschaltung Lichtsteuerung (inkl. Dimmfunktion) 

z.B. Digital dimmbares elektronisches Vorschaltgerät 

OSRAM QUICKTRONIC Intelligent mit DALI-Schnittstelle. 

Leselicht 

OV 

LT 1 


zum Relais Lichtschaltung 

24 V‐Signal für die Dauer des 

Lichttastendrucks. Die Ausgänge 

sind mit 60 mA belastbar. 


Lichttastendrucks. Die Ausgänge 

sind mit 60 mA belastbar. 

Schaltrelais (24 V / 230 V) 

Non-dimmable light 

Dimmable light 

Connection of light relays 

OV 



Connection of light control (incl. dimming function) 

e.g. Digitally dimmable electronic ballast 

OSRAM QUICKTRONIC Intelligent with DALI interface. 

24 V signal for the length of 

time the light button remains 

OV 

pressed. The outputs may be 


loaded with 60 mA. 




time the light button remains 

pressed. The outputs may be 


switching relay 

(24 V / 230 V) 


OSRAM 

QUICKTRONIC Intelligent 

mit DALI‐Schnittstelle 

OSRAM 


with DALI interface 



A 

B 

1b 

1a 

2b 

2a 

3b 

3a 

4b 

4a 

5b 

5a 

10 

9 

8 

7 

6 

5 

4 

3 

2 

1 

1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

7 

8 

9 

10 

11 

70 0449 00 

Steckvorrichtung Kombi Universal 

Connection socket combi universal 

00 8801 42, 03/12 (Rev. 1.0) 

Page 132


Steckvorrichtung Kombi Kanal Universal, Best.‐Nr. 70 0448 00 


von Bedien- und Rufgeräten. Vorgesehen zur Übertragung von Rufen und zur Weiterleitung 

von Steuersignalen für externe Aktoren. 

Verwendung nur in Verbindung mit PBK Hand Universal, Best.-Nr. 74 0748 00 und 

RAN-Schnittstelle Universal, Best.‐Nr. 70 0848 00. 

Vorgesehen zum Einbau in medizinische Versorgungseinheiten. 

Connection socket combi bedhead unit universal, order no. 70 0448 00 


other call devices. Designed for transmission of calls and for routing of control signals for 

external actuators. 

Use only in combination with patient handset universal, order no. 74 0748 00, and RAN interface 

universal, order no. 70 0848 00. 

Suitable for mounting in medical supply units. 






in medizinischen Versorgungseinheiten kann es zu Störungen der Rufanlage kommen. 

Unter Umständen lassen sich diese externen Störungen durch den Einbau von Entstörgliedern 

(Varistor‐Schaltungen) vermeiden. Die Varistor‐Schaltungen sind bei den Herstellern zu 

beziehen. Tunstall bietet hierfür das Überspannungsschutzfilter 230 V (70 0890 97) an. 







manual. 






are commercially available from electric/electronic suppliers. Tunstall offers a proven overvoltage 

filter 230 V (order no. 70 0890 97). 

Medical supply units may differ clearly in EMC behaviour. Even two supply units of the same 

type may differ, if the installation is different. 




Steckvorrichtung einstellen 

Folgende Einstellungen müssen vor Einbau der Steckvorrichtung gemacht werden: 

1. Bettennummer einstellen 


Bett 1 P1 

Bett 2 P2 

Bett 3 P1, P2 (werkseitige Einstellung) 

Bett 4 P3 

Bett 5 P1, P3 

Bett 6*) P2, P3 

*) Bei Bett-Nr. 6 kann kein Diagnostikruf verwendet werden. 

2. Lichtoption 

Jumper offen: Separate Ausgänge LT1 und LT2 für die Lichtsteuerung/Lichtrelais 

(Lichttasten separat) 

Jumper gesteckt: Ausgänge LT1 und LT2 sind verbunden (Lichttasten parallel). 

In diesem Fall nur eine Lichtsteuerung/ein Lichtrelais anschließen. 

Montage 


jeweiligen Ausführung der Versorgungseinheit abhängig. 

1. Gehäuse der medizinischen Versorgungseinheit öffnen. 

2. Steckvorrichtung einsetzen. 

3. Das Flachbandkabel zum Anschluss an die mediz. Versorgungseinheit aufstecken. 

4. Bei vorhandenem Leselicht auch den Anschluss zur Lichtsteuerung/Lichtrelais 

aufstecken. 

5. Gehäuse der medizinischen Versorgungseinheit schließen. 

Setting the connection socket 

Before mounting the connection socket please adjust as follows: 

1. Setting of bed number 

Bed no. jumper placed: 

Bed 1 P1 

Bed 2 P2 

Bed 3 P1, P2 (factory setting) 

Bed 4 P3 

Bed 5 P1, P3 

Bed 6*) P2, P3 

*) When using bed number 6 no diagnostic call can be used. 

2. Light option 

Jumper open: Separate outputs LT1 and LT2 for the light control / light relays 

(light switches are separate). 

Jumper placed: Outputs LT1 and LT2 are connected (light switches are 

parallel). In this case connect only one light control / light relay. 

Mounting 

After the settings are made the connection socket is mounted into the medical supply unit. 

The mounting depends on the individual model of the medical supply unit. 

1. Open the housing of the medical supply unit. 

2. Put in the connection socket. 

3. Put on the flat band cable to the medical supply unit. 

4. If there is readinglight available put on also the connection to the light control/light 

relays. 

5. Close the housing of the medical supply unit. 

Bett‐Nummer 

bed number 

Anschluss Versorgungseinheit 

connection supply unit 

Anschluss Lichtsteuerung Leselicht 

24 V‐Signal für die Dauer des Lichttastendrucks. 

Der Ausgang ist mit 60 mA belastbar. 

Nicht-dimmbares / dimmbares Licht wie bei 

Raumlicht, siehe nächste Seite. 

Connection light control for reading light 

24 V signal for the length of time the light 

switch remains pressed. The output may be 


Non-dimmable and dimmable light same as 

for room light, refer to next page. 

OV 

LT 1 

+24 V 

OV 

LT1 

NC 

P3 P2 P1 

1 2 

TV1 TV2 TV3 TV4 

Lichtoption 

light option 

70 0448 00 

Steckvorrichtung Kombi Kanal Universal 

Connection socket combi bedhead unit universal 

00 8801 41, 03/12 (Rev. 1.0) 

Page 133

Anschlüsse am Anschlussfeld D Connections to connection field GB 



Kabel: 

2x IY(ST)Y 2x2x0,8 

1 

11 

40 

24V 

RAN 

0V 

rt 

ge 

sw 

ws 

Romm bus (RAN) 


Cable: 


1 

11 

40 

24V 

RAN 

0V 

red 

yellow 

black 

white 




Kabel: 

CCS32‐Kabel 

37 

36 

35 

1 

40 

11 

37 

36 

35 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

24V 

0V 

RAN 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

}{ 

ge 

ws 

sw 

rt 

br 

sw 

gr 

ws 

bl 



Is 

Is 




Cable: 

CCS32‐Kabel 

37 

36 

35 

1 

40 

11 

37 

36 

35 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

24V 

0V 

RAN 

LS 

MIC 

SCH B 

}{ 

yellow 

white 

black 

red 

brown 

black 

grey 

white 

blue 

shield 


Is 


Is 

Abgeschirmte Leitungen für LS, MIC dürfen 

maximal 30 mm abgemantelt werden! 

Shielded wires for LS, MIC: strip to max. 30 mm! 

Nicht-dimmbares Licht 

Dimmbares Licht 

Anschaltung Lichtrelais Raumlicht 

39 

9 

OV 

LT 2 

Anschaltung Lichtsteuerung Raumlicht (inkl. Dimmfunktion) 

z.B. Digital dimmbares elektronisches Vorschaltgerät 

OSRAM QUICKTRONIC Intelligent mit DALI-Schnittstelle. 

39 

9 

OV 

LT 2 

zum Relais Raumlicht 

Ia 


Lichttastendrucks. Der Ausgang 

ist mit 60 mA belastbar. 


Lichttastendrucks. Der Ausgang 

ist mit 60 mA belastbar. 

Schaltrelais (24 V / 230 V) 

Non-dimmable light 

Dimmable light 

Connection of light relay for room light 

39 

9 

OV 

LT 2 

Connection of light control for room light (incl. dimming function) 

e.g. Digitally dimmable electronic ballast 

OSRAM QUICKTRONIC Intelligent with DALI interface. 

39 

9 

OV 

LT 2 


room light 


time the light switch remains 

pressed. The output may be 



time the light switch remains 

pressed. The output may be 


switching relay 

(24 V / 230 V) 

Ia 


OSRAM 


mit DALI‐Schnittstelle 

OSRAM 


with DALI interface 

Flachkabel zu Steckvorrichtung 

Kombi Kanal Universal 

Flat cable to connection socket 

combi bedhead unit universal 

Anschlussfeld Versorgungseinheit (Beispiel) 

Connection field supply unit (example) 

40 

1 



OV 

OV 

MIC 

TV4b 

TV2b 

TV3b 

ELA5b 

ELA4b 

ELA3b 

ELA2b 

OV 

OV 

OV 

FB3 

FB1 

OV 

OV 

ELA1a 

TV1a 

+24V 

40 

38 

36 

34 

32 

30 

28 

26 

24 

22 

20 

18 

16 

14 

12 

10 

8 

6 

4 

2 

OV 

LS 

SCHB 

TV4a 

TV2a 

TV3a 

ELA5a 

ELA4a 

ELA3a 

ELA2a 

OV 

OV 

FB4 

FB2 

RAN 

LT2 

ELA1b 

TV1b 

+24V 

+24V 

39 

37 

35 

33 

31 

29 

27 

25 

23 

21 

19 

17 

15 

13 

11 

9 

7 

5 

3 

1 

40 

39 

38 

20 

18 

3 

2 

1 

24 V Drahtbrücken / wire links − 0 V 

(unbedingt erforderlich) 

(absolutely required) 

70 0448 00 

Steckvorrichtung Kombi Kanal Universal 

Connection socket combi bedhead unit universal 

00 8801 41, 03/12 (Rev. 1.0) 

Page 134


Steckvorrichtung ComStation, Best.‐Nr. 74 0452 30 

Datensteckdose zum Anschluss einer ComStation CT , einer ComStation T , einer 

ComStation BUS-C , einer ComStation BUS , eines Tischadapters für ComTerminal, einer 

EccoLine ComStation, einer ComStation L200 oder einer Concento Hauptabfrage. 

Vorzugsweise hergestellt für den Wandeinbau. 

Passend für zweiteilige Einbaudose (Einbaudose nicht im Lieferumfang) 

15-polige Buchse als Datensteckdose. 

Vorbereitet für 15-poligen Stecker mit mechanischer Verriegelung. 

4 Steckklemmen zum Anschluss der 24 V Stromversorgung bis 2,5 mm 2 . 

Anschlüsse als Steckklemmen für Massivdraht, ø 0,55 - 1 mm. 

Kontaktbelastung: max. 3 A 


beschrieben. 

Connection socket ComStation, order no. 74 0452 30 

Data socket for connection of a ComStation CT , a ComStation T , a ComStation BUS-C , a 

ComStation BUS , a desktop adapter for ComTerminal, an EccoLine ComStation, a 

ComStation L200, or a Concento main console. 

Preferably made for wall mounting. 

Suitable for 2-gang back box (back box not included with delivery) 

15 pole socket as data socket 

Prepared for 15 pole plug with mechanical locking mechanism 

4 plug-in terminals up to 2.5 mm 2 for connection of the 24 V supply voltage 

Connection as plug-in terminals for solid wire of ø 0.55 - 1 mm. 

Contact current: max. 3 A 


manual. 

Abmessungen / Dimensions: 

Montage / Mounting: 

152 mm 

81 mm 


ComStation CT Flamenco, Best.‐Nr./order no. 77 0606 00 

ComStation T Flamenco, Best.-Nr./order no. 77 0606 20 

ComStation CT , Best.‐Nr. 77 0601 00A (Produkt wurde ersetzt durch 77 0606 00) 

ComStation CT , order no. 77 0601 00A (Product was replaced by 77 0606 00) 

0V 

+24V 

2 

11 

1 

9 

wire cross section: 0.5 - 2.5 mm 2 2 

6 

74 0452 30 

7 

8 

Verbindungsdosenklemme, 5-polig (00 0210 21) 

9 

Leitungsquerschnitt 0,5 - 2,5 mm 2 

1 

* push‐wire connector, 5 pole (00 0210 21) 

11 

Hinweis für ComStation T (77 0606 20)! Die Anschlüsse NF 1a, NF 1b, NF 2a 

und NF 2b sind in folgenden Installationen nicht erforderlich: Es wird in 

Zukunft keine ComStation CT (mit Sprechkommunikation, 77 0606 00) an 

diese Steckvorrichtung angeschlossen werden. 

Note for ComStation T (77 0606 20)! The connections NF 1a, NF 1b, NF 2a 

and NF 2b are not required in the following installations: There shall not be 

connected a ComStation CT (with speech, 77 0606 00) to this connection 

socket in the future. 

3 

4 

10 

8 

7 

0V 

+24V 

* 

0V 

+24V Ip (Spannungsversorgung / power supply) 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

DL 

DH 

DG 

DG 

DG 

DG 

DH 

DL 

NF 2b 

NF 2a 

NF 1b 

NF 1a 

0V 

+24V 

0 V 

24V 

RAN 

OSYnet (Gruppenbus / group bus) 


Ip (Spannungsversorgung / power supply) 

RAN (Zimmerbus / room bus) 

74 0452 30 



00 8802 46, 04/13 (Rev. 8.1) 

Page 135


ComStation BUS-C , Best.-Nr./order no. 77 0605 50 

ComStation BUS , Best.‐Nr. 77 0605 00 (Produkt wurde ersetzt durch 77 0605 50) 

ComStation BUS , order no. 77 0605 10 (Product was replaced by 77 0605 50) 

0V 

+24V 

11 

10 

9 

5 

7 

8 

0V 

+24V Ip (Spannungsversorgung / power supply) 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

DL 


DH 

DG 

6 

* 

DG 

DG 

DG 

74 0452 30 

Verbindungsdosenklemme, 5-polig (00 0210 21) 

Leitungsquerschnitt 0,5 - 2,5 mm 2 

* push‐wire connector, 5 pole (00 0210 21) 

wire cross section: 0.5 - 2.5 mm 2 

8 

7 

5 

9 

10 

11 

0V 

+24V 

DH 

DL 

NF 2b 

NF 2a 

NF 1b 

NF 1a 

0V 

+24V 


Ip (Spannungsversorgung / power supply) 

EccoLine ComStation, Best.‐Nr. 74 3200 00A 

EccoLine ComStation, order no. 74 3200 10A 

+24V 

0V 

11 

10 

9 

6 

8 

7 

3 

1 

3 

2 

NF-a 

NF-b 

NF-SCH 

D-0V 

D-H 

D-L 

0V 

Beep 

0V 

AW 

IY(St)Y 2x2x0,8 

IY(St)Y 2x2x0,8 

Summer (Best.-Nr. 00 0420 28), bei Bedarf 

Buzzer (order no. 00 0420 28), if required 

Zimmerleuchte Universal, 

Best.-Nr. 77 0182 10 

Room lamp Universal, 



+24V 

0V 

74 0452 30 

11 

10 

9 

6 

8 

7 

3 

1 

NF-a 

NF-b 

NF-SCH 

D-0V 

D-H 

D-L 

0V 

Beep 

Summer (Best.‐Nr. 00 0420 28), bei Bedarf 

Buzzer (Best.‐Nr. 00 0420 28), if required 

3 

2 

0V 

AW 

Zimmer‐Signalleuchte, 

Best.‐Nr. 10 1201 00 

Room signal lamp, 


00 8802 46, 04/13 (Rev. 8.1) 

Page 136


14.5 Consoles 

77 0602 00 ComStation PC 

77 0606 00 ComStation CT Flamenco 

77 0606 20 ComStation T Flamenco 

77 0610 00 ManagementCenter PC 


Page 137

Page 138

Konfigurationsanleitung - Seite 1 - D Configuration Instructions - Page 1 - GB 

ComStation CT Flamenco, Best.‐Nr. 77 0606 00 

Terminal in Gegensprechtechnik, vorgesehen zur Tischaufstellung am Dienststützpunkt, 

inkl. roter Ruftaste, blauer Alarmtaste, grüner Anwesenheitstaste (AW1), gelber 

Anwesenheitstaste (AW2), 4 Funktionstasten mit situationsabhängiger Belegung, Mikrofon 

und Lautsprecher. 



Vorsicht! Lassen Sie die ComStation CT nicht auf eine harte Oberfläche fallen und 

setzen es auch nicht einem beträchtlichen Druck oder Stoß aus. Die Bedienfront der 

ComStation CT besteht aus Glas und kann brechen. 

ComStation CT Flamenco, order no. 77 0606 00 

Terminal with two-way speech communication, designed for desktop installation in the 

nurse station, incl. red call button, blue code blue/cardiac alarm button, green presence 

button (staff 1), yellow presence button (staff 2), 4 function keys as soft keys, microphone 

and loudspeakers. 


manual. 

Caution! The operating front cover of the ComStation CT is made of glass. Handle 

with care! The glass could break if it is dropped on a hard surface or receives a 

substantial impact. 






Function keys 














Menüpunkt Bedeutung 

Sprache Sprache der Displaytexte einstellen, z.B. Deutsch oder Englisch. 

RAN RAN Anzahl: Anzahl Zimmergeräte (= RAN Anzahl) einstellen. 





Adresse Zimmer‐Adresse einstellen (1 bis 110 einstellbar) 

Reinigungszeit Sekunden einstellen, die benötigt werden um die Front der ComStation CT 

abzuwischen 

Kontrast Kontrast des ComStation CT ‐Displays auf hoch oder niedrig einstellen 

Tastenton Ton bei Drücken der Tasten an der ComStation CT ein‐ oder ausschalten 

Störungston Lautstärke des Tons beim Auftreten von Störungen einstellen 

Info 

Version der Software in der ComStation CT anzeigen lassen. 

Audio Test Menüpunkt nur zur Verwendung durch Tunstall‐Techniker 

Tastenfunktion Funktion der Alarmtaste und der Anwesenheitstasten an der ComStation CT 

ein‐ oder ausschalten (Ein = Standardeinstellung) 

Reset Verwendung nur durch Tunstall‐Techniker. (ComStation CT neu starten) 



RAN RAN number: Setting of number of room devices (= RAN number). 





Address Setting of room address (1 until 110 available) 

Cleaning time Setting the time (seconds) how long it takes to clean (wipe) the front 

of the ComStation CT 

Contrast Setting the display contrast to “high” or “low”. 

Key sound Switching the key sound on or off (on = recommended) 

Fault tone Setting the fault tone volume to soft, medium, loud or off. 

Info 

Displaying the ComStation's software version. 

Audio Test Function use only for Tunstall technicians. 

Key Function Switching on or of the function of Alarm Key, Presence Key 1 and 

Presence Key 2 (On = standard setting). 

Reset Function use only for Tunstall technicians. (Restart the ComStation CT ) 
















über RAN angeschlossen sind (Kein Birntaster, keine PBK Hand). 











Reinigungszeit einstellen (10 – 30 Sekunden) 

Die Reinigungszeit legt fest, wie lange die Tasten der ComStation CT außer Funktion sind, 

nachdem die Taste Clean gedrückt wurde (Zeit zum Abwischen der Bedienfront). 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Reinigungszeit” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten gewünschte Reinigungszeit (in Sekunden) markieren. 

Kreistaste drücken, um markierte Reinigungszeit zu speichern. 



etc.) which are connected via RAN. (No pear push switch, no patient handset). Attention, 

exception! One room lamp with 4 sections (order no. 77 0170 10 or 77 0171 10) is 

equivalent to two room devices. 









Setting of cleaning time (10 – 30 seconds) 

The cleaning time defines how long the ComStation CT keys are not operational after the 

Clean key has been pressed (time for wiping the front). 

Mark “Cleaning time” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mark the desired cleaning time using the arrow keys. 

Press the circle key to store the marked cleaning time. 

74 0452 30 



77 0606 00 

ComStation CT Flamenco ® 

00 8801 74, 06/10 (Rev. 1.0) 

Page 139

Konfigurationsanleitung - Seite 2 - D Configuration Instructions - Page 2 - GB 


Kontrast des ComStation CT ‐Displays einstellen (hoch, niedrig) 






Auf Wunsch kann der Tastenton der Tasten an der ComStation CT ausgeschaltet werden. 

Die Einstellung “Tastenton Ein” wird jedoch empfohlen. 




Störungston leise, mittel, laut oder aus 

Warnung! Der Ton, der auf Störungen aufmerksam macht, darf nur dann ausgeschaltet 

werden, wenn sichergestellt ist, dass Störungen auf andere Art sicher angezeigt werden. 

Bei der Lautstärke des Störungstons kann gewählt werden zwischen leise, mittel und laut. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Störungston” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Leise”, „Mittel“, “Laut” oder „Aus“ markieren. 




Softwareversion der ComStation CT wird angezeigt. 








If required the ComStation CT key sound can be switched off. But the setting “Key sound On” 





Fault tone volume soft, medium, loud or off 

Warning! The tone that attracts attention for a fault may only be turned off, if it is made sure, 

that the attention is attracted in another way. The volume of the fault tone can be set to soft, 

medium or loud. 

Mark “Fault Tone” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mark “Soft“, “Medium“, “Loud“ or „Off“ using the arrow keys. 




The ComStation's software version is displayed. 


Tastenfunktion ausschalten / einschalten 

In der Werkseinstellung der ComStation CT sind die Alarmtaste und beide AW‐Tasten (AW = 

Anwesenheit) funktionsbereit. In begründeten Ausnahmefällen ist es möglich die 

Tastenfunktion von diesen Tasten auszuschalten. 

Switching on or of the key function 

With the factory settings the alarm key and both presence keys are operational. In 

well‐founded exceptional cases you can switch of the key function for these keys. 

Alarmtaste (blaues Symbol) 

Alarm Key (blue symbol) 

AW‐Taste 2 (gelb) 

AW‐Taste 1 (grün) 

Presence Key 2 (yellow) 

Presence Key 1 (green) 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Tastenfunktion” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten gewünschte Taste (Alarmtaste oder AW‐Taste) markieren; 

dann Kreistaste drücken. 



Achtung! Ausgeschaltete Tasten sind im Pflegebetrieb nicht verfügbar! 


Status 





Anzeige: OK: ComStation CT hat gemeldet, dass eingestellte RAN Anzahl gleich Anzahl 


Anzeige: Fehler: ComStation CT hat gemeldet, dass eingestellte RAN Anzahl nicht gleich 



Test RAN 









einstellen. 


Mark “Key Function” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mark the desired key (alarm key or presence key) using the arrow keys. Then 

press the circle key. 



Attention! Switched off keys are not available for nursing staff! 

Status 





Display: OK: ComStation CT has reported: Stored RAN number is equal to the number of 


Display: Error: ComStation CT has reported: Stored RAN number is not equal to the 



Test RAN 























74 0452 30 



77 0606 00 

ComStation CT Flamenco ® 

00 8801 74, 06/10 (Rev. 1.0) 

Page 140


ComStation T Flamenco, Best.‐Nr. 77 0606 20 

Terminal ohne Sprechkommunikation, vorgesehen zur Tischaufstellung am 

Dienststützpunkt, inkl. roter Ruftaste, blauer Alarmtaste, grüner Anwesenheitstaste (AW1), 

gelber Anwesenheitstaste (AW2) und 4 Funktionstasten mit situationsabhängiger Belegung. 



ComStation T Flamenco, order no. 77 0606 20 

Terminal without speech communication designed for desktop installation in the nurse 

station, incl. red call button, blue cardiac alarm button, green presence button (staff 1), 

yellow presence button (staff 2) and 4 function keys as soft keys. 


manual. 






Function keys 






zurückkehren ohne zu speichern 








Menüpunkt 

Sprache 

RAN 

Adresse 

Kontrast 

Tastenton 

Störungston 

Info 

Reset 








Zimmer‐Adresse einstellen (1 bis 110 einstellbar). 

Kontrast des ComStation T ‐Displays auf hoch oder niedrig einstellen. 

Ton bei Drücken der Tasten an der ComStation T ein‐ oder ausschalten. 

Lautstärke des Tons beim Auftreten einer Störung einstellen. 

Revision der Software in der ComStation T anzeigen lassen. 

Verwendung nur durch Tunstall‐Techniker. (ComStation T neu starten) 



RAN RAN Number: Setting of number of room devices (= RAN number). 





Address Setting of room address (1 until 110 available). 

Contrast Setting the ComStation T display contrast to “high” or “low”. 

Key sound Switching the key sound for ComStation T on or off (on = recommended). 

Fault tone Setting the fault tone volume to soft, medium, loud or off. 

Info Displaying the software revision of the ComStation T . 

Reset Function use only for Tunstall technicians. (Restart the ComStation T ) 







Spanisch, F = Französisch, NL = Niederländisch, I = Italienisch. 

 




über RAN angeschlossen sind (Kein Birntaster). 












F = French; NL = Dutch; I = Italian. 



etc.) which are connected via RAN. (No pear push switch). Attention, exception! One room 

lamp with 4 sections (order no. 77 0170 10 or 77 0171 10) is equivalent to two room 

devices. 



Mark the desired RAN number for the room using the arrow keys. 

Press the circle key to store the marked RAN number. 





74 0452 30 



77 0606 20 

ComStation T Flamenco ® 

00 8801 14, 11/12 (Rev. 1.0) 

Page 141


ComStation T Flamenco, Best.‐Nr. 77 0606 20 ComStation T Flamenco, order no. 77 0606 20 


Kontrast des ComStation T ‐Displays einstellen (hoch, niedrig) 






Auf Wunsch kann der Tastenton der ComStation T ‐Tasten ausgeschaltet werden. Die 





Störungston leise, mittel, laut oder aus 

Warnung! Der Ton, der auf Störungen aufmerksam macht, darf nur dann ausgeschaltet 

werden, wenn sichergestellt ist, dass Störungen auf andere Art sicher angezeigt werden. 

Bei der Lautstärke des Störungstons kann gewählt werden zwischen leise, mittel und laut. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Störungston” markieren; dann Kreistaste drücken. 

Mit den Pfeiltasten “Leise”, „Mittel“, “Laut” oder „Aus“ markieren. 


Softwarerevision anzeigen lassen 


Softwarerevision der ComStation T wird angezeigt. 


Setting of ComStation T display contrast (high, low) 






If required the ComStation T key sound can be switched off. But the setting “Key sound On” 





Fault tone volume soft, medium, loud or off 

Warning! The tone that attracts attention for a fault may only be turned off, if it is made sure, 

that the attention is attracted in another way. The volume of the fault tone can be set to soft, 

medium or loud. 

Mark “Fault Tone” using the arrow keys. Then press the circle key. 

Mark “Soft“, “Medium“, “Loud“ or „Off“ using the arrow keys. 


Displaying the software revision 


The software revision for the ComStation T is displayed. 



Status 





Anzeige: OK: ComStation T hat gemeldet, dass eingestellte RAN Anzahl gleich Anzahl 


Anzeige: Fehler: ComStation T hat gemeldet, dass eingestellte RAN Anzahl nicht gleich 



Test RAN 






angeschlossene Geräte korrekt anschließen.) 



einstellen. 








Status 





Display: OK: ComStation T has reported: Stored RAN number is equal to the number of 


Display: Error: ComStation T has reported: Stored RAN number is not equal to the 



Test RAN 






connected or defective. Replace defective devices. Correct any wrong connection.) 











74 0452 30 



77 0606 20 

ComStation T Flamenco ® 

00 8801 14, 11/12 (Rev. 1.0) 

Page 142

LCD-Monitor 

Switch 

OSY- 

ControlCenter 

Power Supply 

ST26 

NFxxa 

NFxxb 

11 

12 

In 

NF-a 11 

NF-b 12 

Netzwerk 

CONNECTION 

COMBINATION 

ANSCHL.KOMBINATION 

04870010 

Telephone 

for teleservice 

Telefon für 

Fernwartung 

80431900 

00064028 

LIMITER 

SHARK 

2,5m 

ISDN 

2,5m 

IOIOIB/COM2 RJ45 

SYSTEM COMPUTER 

PrimusGlobal 

+ 


77070000 

Speech Unit 

SPRECHSTELLE 

50070500A 

230V~ 

230V~ 

* 

230V~ 

USV 

230V~ 

21900000 

Power Suply 

Netzgerät 

77340000 

+UPS/USV: 

77340100 

77 0610 00 

230V~ 

230V~ 

* = Option 

In= IY(St)Y 2x2x0,8 

TUNSTALL GmbH 

Aend.-I. Art der Aend. Datum Name 

Gez. 

09.07.08 WENDKER 

Page Gepr. 143 

CONNECTION PLAN ANSCHLUSSPLAN 


Order No.: / Best.-Nr.: 

77061000 

PC 

Drawing No.: / Zeichn.Nr.: 

97 1 1048 4 0 7


Page 144 



14.6 Interfaces in the room 

70 0360 10 IR TV control module universal 

70 0360 11 IR TV control module universal Audio 

70 0840 00 RAN interface normal call 

70 0841 00 RAN interface code blue / cardiac alarm 

70 0842 00 RAN interface telephone call 

70 0860 00 RAN interface TV 

70 0848 00 RAN interface universal 

70 0880 00 RAN interface with speech 

11 5350 00 Telephone interface relay 


Page 145


IR TV-Steuermodul universal, Best.‐Nr. 70 0360 10 

Schnittstelle zur Steuerung eines handelsüblichen TV‐Geräts mit Infrarot‐Signalen. 



Voraussetzungen 

Steckvorrichtung Kombi (70 0424 00) und Steckvorrichtung Kombi Kanal (70 0434 00) ermöglichen 

die TV‐Ansteuerung in Verbindung mit PBK Hand (74 0747 00), der RAN-Schnittstelle TV 

(70 0860 00) und IR TV-Steuermodul universal. 

IR TV-Steuermodul universal (70 0360 10) ermöglicht die Steuerung von handelsüblichen TV- 

Geräten mit Infrarot-Signalen. Zusätzlich erforderlich: Kabelsatz zum IR TV-Steuermodul 

(70 0360 20), Adressierstecker zum IR TV-Steuermodul (70 0360 30) und einmalig die Dienstleistung 

Programmierung TV-Steuermodul (70 0360 50). 

Hinweis: Eine Tonübertragung zur PBK Hand findet nicht statt. 

Programmierung 

Das IR TV‐Steuermodul ist erst funktionsfähig, wenn der Steuercode des benutzten TV‐Gerätetyps 

programmiert ist. Diese Programmierung wird von Tunstall GmbH durchgeführt 

(Bestell‐Nr. 70 0360 50). 

Montage 

Befestigung an der Rückwand des TV‐Geräts z.B. mit Klebepads. 

Betten zuordnen (Adressierung) 

In der Werkseinstellung wird das IR TV‐Steuermodul von allen angeschlossenen Patientenbediengeräten 

(PBK) angesteuert. So ändern Sie die Einstellung: 

1. Um das IR TV‐Steuermodul in den Adressiermodus zu versetzen, stecken Sie den 

Adressierstecker (Bestell‐Nr. 70 0360 30) in die mittlere Buchse. 

Nach ca. 5 Sekunden wechselt das IR TV‐Steuermodul in den Adressiermodus. 

2. Drücken Sie nacheinander an allen PBKs, die dieses TV‐Gerät steuern sollen, die Taste 

”TV einschalten” bzw. ”TV‐Programm vorwärts”. 

3. Ziehen Sie den Adressierstecker wieder ab. 

Die Betten sind zugeordnet. 

Hinweis! Wenn der Adressierstecker gesteckt und wieder abgezogen wird, ohne dass eine 

PBK ausgelöst wird, werden die Befehle von allen angeschlossenen PBKs akzeptiert 

(Auslieferungszustand). Es gilt immer die zuletzt gelernte Einstellung. 

IR TV control module universal, order no. 70 0360 10 

Interface for control of a standard TV set using infrared signals. 


Requirements 

Connection socket Combi (70 0424 00) and connection socket Combi bedhead unit 

(70 0434 00) allow TV control in combination with patient handset (74 0747 00), RAN 

interface TV (70 0860 00) and IR TV control module universal (70 0360 10). 

IR TV control module universal (70 0360 10) allows the control of standard TV sets using 

infrared signals. Additionally needed: Kit for IR TV control module (70 0360 20), Addressing 

plug for IR TV control module (70 0360 30) and one‐time TV control module programming 

service (70 0360 50). 

Note: No tone transmission to patient handset. 

Programming 

Before the IR TV control module can be used, the control code of the used TV type has to 

be programmed. This programming is done by Tunstall GmbH (order no. 70 0360 50). 

Mounting 

Fixing on the back part of the TV set e.g. by using sticky pads. 

Assigning beds (Addressing) 

With factory settings the IR TV control module is controlled by all connected patient handsets. 

This is how you change this setting: 

1. Plug the addressing plug (order no. 70 0360 30) into the middle socket. 

After 5 seconds the IR TV control module changes to addressing mode. 

2. Press in succession the button ”TV on” / ”Programme +” at all patient units, which shall 

control the TV set. 

3. Disconnect the addressing plug. 

Thr beds are assigned. 

Note! If you press no button between plugging and disconnecting the addressing plug, the 

IR TV control module is controlled by all connected patient handsets (delivery state). 

Always the last learned setting is valid. 


Entertainment 

ELA 

Ie 

70 0424 00 

RAN 

70 0860 00 

Daten 

Data 

74 0747 00 

00 0280 40 

70 0360 10 

70 0360 20 

IR 

70 0360 10 

IR 

70 0360 10 

IR 

70 0360 10 

IR TV-Steuermodul universal 

IR TV control module universal 

PBK Hand 

Patient handset 

74 0747 00 

00 0280 40 

Adressierstecker 

Addressing plug 

70 0360 30 

00 8802 84, 03/11 (Rev. 3.0) 

Page 146

Anschlussplan (Beispiel) D Connection Diagram (example) GB 

OSYnet + Ip 

OSYnet + Ip 

Is 

47 

47 

1 2 

3 45 

6 7 

Bed 1 / Bett 1 

77 0510 00 



for mounting to 35 mm rail 

Montagefüße für 

Tragschiene 35 mm 

70 0360 10 

70 0360 10 

00 0280 39 surface / Aufputz 

00 0280 40 recesssed / Unterputz 

RJ 45 connection 

socket 

RJ 45 Dose 

2 

3 

7 

70 0360 20 

3 

IR 


IR 

70 0360 20 socket 

70 0360 20 

70 0360 20 

RJ 45 Dose 

TV control signals / TV−Steuersignale 

8 

11 

2 

0V 

RAN 

+24V 

1 

2 

3 

70 0860 00 



3 

6 

7 

+24V 

Uout+ 

Uout− 

3 

Supply unit / Versorgungseinheit 

74 0747 00 

74 0747 00 

6 

7 

3 

7 

2 

3 

7 



Connection 

field 

Anschlussfeld 

1 x per room RAN interface TV 

1 x pro Zimmer RAN-Schnittstelle TV 


Connection field supply unit: 

Anschlussfeld Versorgungseinheit: 

0V 

0V 

MIC 

TV4b 

TV2b 

TV3b 

ELA5b 

ELA4b 

ELA3b 

ELA2b 

0V 

0V 

0V 

FB3 

FB1 

0V 

0V 

ELA1a 

TV1a 

+24V 



40 

38 

36 

34 

32 

30 

28 

26 

24 

22 

20 

18 

16 

14 

12 

10 

8 

6 

4 

2 

0V 

LS 

SCHB 

TV4a 

TV2a 

TV3a 

ELA5a 

ELA4a 

ELA3a 

ELA2a 

0V 

0V 

FB4 

FB2 

RAN 

LT2 

ELA1b 

TV1b 

+24V 

+24V 

39 

37 

35 

33 

31 

29 

27 

25 

23 

21 

19 

17 

15 

13 

11 

9 

7 

5 

3 

1 

40 

39 

38 

20 

18 

3 

2 

1 

The shielded cores for LS and MIC are a twisted pair 

and should be stripped to a maximum of 30 mm! 

Die abgeschirmte Leitungen für LS und MIC sind 

paarig verseilt und dürfen max. 30 mm abgemantelt 


Bed 

number 

Bed number: 

Set 

jumper 

Bed 1 = P1 

Bed 2 = P2 

Bed 3 = P1, P2 

Bed 4 = P3 

Bed 5 = P1, P3 

Bed 6 = P2, P3 

Betten 

Nummer 

Bettennummer: 

P3 P2 P1 

Jumper Lage der 

steckt Jumper 


RJ 45 

Western socket 

Westernbuchse 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

24 V wire links / Drahtbrücken − 0 V 

(mandatory / unbedingt erforderlich) 

Notes: 

- Setting of bed numbers and other options are effected by placing jumpers in the 

appropriate positions at connection socket (70 0434 00). 

- When using bed number 6 no diagnostic call can be used. 

Hinweise: 

- Die Einstellung der Bettennummer und der anderen Optionen erfolgt durch Jumper 

auf der jeweiligen Steckvorrichtung (70 0434 00). 

- Bei Verwendung von Bettennummer 6 kann kein Diagnostikruf verwendet werden. 

Bett 1 = P1 

Bett 2 = P2 

Bett 3 = P1,P2 

Bett 4 = P3 



Jumpers 

position 

70 0434 00 70 0434 00 

3 

2 

P3 P2 P1 

Werkseinstellung 

Uout+ 

+24V 

Uout− 


00 8802 84, 03/11 (Rev. 3.0 ) 

Page 147


IR TV-Steuermodul universal Audio, Best.‐Nr. 70 0360 11 

Schnittstelle zur Steuerung eines handelsüblichen TV‐Geräts mit Infrarot‐Signalen. 

Integrierter Audioverstärker zur Ansteuerung eines Bediengeräts. Die Ausgangslautstärke 

kann mit einem Programmiergerät in definierten Grenzen geregelt werden. Beim Einsatz ist 

die Abstimmung der Audiopegel mit den eingesetzten Endgeräten zu beachten. 



IR TV control module universal Audio, order no. 70 0360 11 

Interface for control of a standard TV set using infrared signals. Integrated audio amplifier 

for control of a patient handset. The output volume can be adjusted within definite limits 

using a programming tool. The audio levels have to be adapted to the patient handsets. 


Voraussetzungen 

Steckvorrichtung Kombi, TVL (70 0424 50) und Steckvorrichtung Kombi Kanal, TVL 

(70 0434 50) ermöglichen die TV‐Ansteuerung in Verbindung mit PBK Hand (74 0747 00), 

der RAN-Schnittstelle TV (70 0860 00) und dem IR TV-Steuermodul Audio (70 0360 11). 

Achtung! Bei den Steckvorrichtungen handelt es sich um Modelle, die nur für diese 

Anwendung benutzt werden. 

IR TV-Steuermodul universal Audio ermöglicht die Steuerung und Tonübertragung von 

handelsüblichen TV-Geräten mit Infrarot-Signalen. Zusätzlich erforderlich: Kabelsatz zum 

IR TV-Steuermodul Audio (70 0360 21), Adressierstecker zum IR TV-Steuermodul 

(70 0360 30) und einmalig die Dienstleistung Programmierung TV-Steuermodul 

(70 0360 50). 

Programmierung 

Das IR TV‐Steuermodul ist erst funktionsfähig, wenn der Steuercode des benutzten 

TV‐Gerätetyps programmiert ist. Diese Programmierung wird von Tunstall GmbH 

durchgeführt (Bestell‐Nr. 70 0360 50). 

Requirements 

Connection socket Combi, TVL (70 0424 50) and connection socket Combi, TVL bedhead 

unit (70 0434 50) allow TV control in combination with patient handset (74 0747 00), RAN 

interface TV (70 0860 00) and IR TV control module universal Audio (70 0360 11). 

Warning! These connections sockets are used only for this application. 

IR TV control module universal Audio allows the control and tone transmission from 

standard TV sets using infrared signals. Additionally needed: Kit for IR TV control module 

Audio (70 0360 21), Addressing plug for IR TV control module (70 0360 30) and one-time 

TV control module programming service (70 0360 50). 

Programming 

Before the IR TV control module can be used, the control code of the used TV model has to 

be programmed. This programming is done by Tunstall GmbH (order no. 70 0360 50). 


Montage 

Befestigung an der Rückwand des TV‐Geräts z.B. mit Klebepads. 

Betten zuordnen (Adressierung) 

Im Auslieferungszustand wird das IR TV‐Steuermodul von allen angeschlossenen Patientenbediengeräten 

(PBK) angesteuert. So ändern Sie die Einstellung: 

1. Um das IR TV‐Steuermodul in den Adressiermodus zu versetzen, stecken Sie den 

Adressierstecker (Bestell‐Nr. 70 0360 30) in die zweite Buchse von links. 

Nach ca. 5 Sekunden wechselt das IR TV‐Steuermodul in den Adressiermodus. 

2. Drücken Sie nacheinander an allen PBKs, die dieses TV‐Gerät steuern sollen, die Taste 

”TV einschalten” bzw. ”TV‐Programm vorwärts”. 

3. Ziehen Sie den Adressierstecker wieder ab. 

Die Betten sind zugeordnet. 

Hinweis! Wenn der Adressierstecker gesteckt und wieder abgezogen wird, ohne dass eine 

PBK ausgelöst wird, werden die Befehle von allen angeschlossenen PBKs akzeptiert 

(Auslieferungszustand). Es gilt immer die zuletzt gelernte Einstellung. 

Entertainment 

ELA 

Ie 

70 0424 50 

Ton 

Tone 

74 0747 00 

Mounting 

Fixing on the back part of the TV set e.g. by using sticky pads. 

Assigning beds (Addressing) 

In delivery state the IR TV control module is controlled by all connected patient handsets. This 

is how you change this setting: 

1. Plug the addressing plug (order no. 70 0360 30) into the second socket from the left. 

After 5 seconds the IR TV control module changes to addressing mode. 

2. Press in succession the button ”TV on” / ”Programme +” at all patient units, which shall 

control the TV set. 

3. Disconnect the addressing plug. 

The beds are assigned. 

Note! If you press no button between plugging and disconnecting the addressing plug, the 

IR TV control module is controlled by all connected patient handsets (delivery state). 

Always the last learned setting is valid. 

Scart 

RAN 

70 0360 11 

IR 

IR 

70 0860 00 

Daten 

Data 

00 0280 40 

70 0360 21 

SCART 

70 0360 11 

PBK Hand 

Patient handset 

SCART 

70 0360 11 

IR 

70 0360 11 

IR TV-Steuermodul universal Audio 

IR TV control module universal Audio 

74 0747 00 

00 0280 40 

Adressierstecker 

Addressing plug 

70 0360 30 

00 8802 85, 03/11 (Rev. 3.0) 

Page 148


OSYnet + Ip 

OSYnet + Ip 

Is 

47 

47 

1 2 

3 4 5 

6 7 


77 0510 00 





70 0360 11 

70 0360 11 

70 0360 21 70 0360 21 



00 0280 39 surface / Aufputz RJ 45 connection 

IR 

IR 

socket 

00 0280 40 recesssed / Unterputz socket 

70 0360 21 

70 0360 21 

70 0360 21 

RJ 45 Dose 

70 0360 21 

RJ 45 Dose 

2 

2 

2 

TV tone 1 / TV −Ton 1 1 

3 TV control signals / TV−Steuersignale 

3 

3 



6 

7 

7 

3 +24V 

2 

0V 

RAN 

+24V 

2 

70 0860 00 

Uout+ 

3 7 6 Uout− 





3 


74 0747 00 

74 0747 00 

4 1 5 6 

31 

32 

1 

6 

3 

6 

7 

1 

6 

2 

3 

7 

TV tone 2 / TV−Ton 2 


Connection 

field 

8 

11 

2 

Anschlussfeld 

1 

2 

0V 

0V 

MIC 

TV4b 

TV2b 

TV3b 

ELA5b 

ELA4b 

ELA3b 

ELA2b 

0V 

0V 

0V 

FB3 

FB1 

0V 

0V 

ELA1a 

TV1a 

+24V 




40 

38 

36 

34 

32 

30 

28 

26 

24 

22 

20 

18 

16 

14 

12 

10 

0V 

LS 

SCHB 

TV4a 

TV2a 

TV3a 

ELA5a 

ELA4a 

ELA3a 

ELA2a 

0V 

0V 

FB4 

FB2 

RAN 

LT2 

ELA1b 

TV1b 

+24V 

+24V 

Bed 

number 

Bed number: TV tone channel: 

Set 

jumper 

Bed 1 = P1 

Bed 2 = P2 

Bed 3 = P1, P2 

Bed 4 = P3 

Bed 5 = P1, P3 

Bed 6 = P2, P3 

P3 P2 P1 

− For stellate TV tone 

set as bed number 

− Where TV tone is parallel, 

select tone channel 1 


Jumpers 

position 

70 0434 50 



9 

7 

5 

3 

1 

8 

6 

4 

2 

39 

37 

35 

33 

31 

29 

27 

25 

23 

21 

19 

17 

15 

13 

11 

40 


(mandatory / unbedingt erforderlich) 

Notes: 




Hinweise: 




39 

38 

3 

2 

1 

20 

18 

The shielded cores for LS and MIC are a twisted pair and 

should be stripped to a maximum of 30 mm! 

Die abgeschirmte Leitungen für LS und MIC sind paarig 

verseilt und dürfen max. 30 mm abgemantelt werden. 

Betten 

Nummer 

Bett 1 = P1 

Bett 2 = P2 


Bett 4 = P3 



Jumpers 

position 

Bettennummer: TV-Tonkanal: 

70 0434 50 

Jumper Lage der Lage der 

steckt Jumper 

Jumper 

P3 P2 P1 

−Bei sternförmigen 

TV−Ton wie Betten− 

nummer einstellen. 

−Bei parallelem TV−Ton 

auf Tonkanal 1 einstellen. 

werkseitige Einstellung 

RJ 45 


Westernbuchse 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

TVa Uout+ TVb 

Uout− 

+24V 


00 8802 85, 03/11 (Rev. 3.0) 

Page 149


RAN‐Schnittstelle Normalruf, Best.‐Nr. 70 0840 00 

Schnittstelle zur Verbindung von Rufgeräten mit dem Zimmerbus (RAN). Die Schnittstelle 

stellt einen Schalteingang für Normalruf und einen Ausgang als Finde- und Beruhigungslicht 

zur Verfügung. Über Codierschalter kann der Ruf mit einer Bettenkennung versehen 


RAN‐Schnittstelle Normalruf mit automatischer Rufabstellung, Best.‐Nr. 70 0840 01 

wie 70 0840 00, jedoch mit automatischer Rufabstellung. Der Ruf wird automatisch 

abgestellt, wenn der Kontakt des angeschlossenen Rufgeräts wieder geöffnet wird. 

Achtung: Die RAN‐Schnittstelle, Bestell‐Nr. 70 0840 01, funktioniert erst, wenn eine 

Bettennummer eingestellt wurde, siehe B. 

RAN‐Schnittstelle Alarmruf, Best.‐Nr. 70 0841 00 

Schnittstelle zur Verbindung von Rufgeräten mit dem Zimmerbus (RAN). Die Schnittstelle 

stellt einen Schalteingang für Alarmruf und einen Ausgang als Finde- und Beruhigungslicht 

zur Verfügung. 

RAN‐Schnittstelle Alarmruf mit automatischer Rufabstellung, Best.‐Nr. 70 0841 01 

wie 70 0841 00, jedoch mit automatischer Rufabstellung. Der Ruf wird automatisch 

abgestellt, wenn der Kontakt des angeschlossenen Rufgeräts wieder geöffnet wird. 





Vorsicht! Führen Sie die Installation nur im spannungsfreien Zustand aus. Sonst 

könnte die RAN‐Schnittstelle beschädigt werden. 

RAN interface normal call, order no. 70 0840 00 

Interface for connection of call devices to the room bus (RAN). The interface has a 

switching input for normal calls and an output for location and reassurance light. The bed 

identification can be set by coding switches. 

RAN interface normal call with automatic call cancelling, order no. 70 0840 01 

as 70 0840 00, but with automatic call cancelling. The call is cancelled, when the contact of 

the connected call device is opened again. 

Attention: The RAN interface, order no. 70 0840 01, only works, after a bed number has 

been set, see B. 

RAN interface code blue / cardiac alarm, order no. 70 0841 00 

Interface for connection of call devices to the room bus (RAN). The interface has a 

switching input for codes blue / cardiac alarm and an output for location and reassurance 

light. 

RAN interface code blue/cardiac alarm with automatic call cancelling, order no. 70 0841 01 

as 70 0841 00, but with automatic call cancelling. The call is cancelled, when the contact of 

the connected call device is opened again. 


manual. 



Caution! During installation the power supply should be switched off to ensure 

zero-potential status. Otherwise, the RAN interface could be damaged. 

Montage 

Montage der RAN‐Schnittstellen mit den mitgelieferten Halterungen auf eine 

35 mm‐Z-Schiene oder in eine Einbaudose. 

Mounting 

Mounting the RAN interface with the delivered mounts on a 35 mm Z-rail or in a back box. 


Anschluss 

Schaltausgang 

U out = 24 V; I out max. = 10 mA 

Findelichtfunktion 

I FL max. = 0,5 mA 

Externer Taster S1 

min. Schaltstrom: 0,1 mA, 5 V DC 

max. Leitungslänge an Punkt 4, 5, 6, 7 = 5 m 

Connection 

Switch output 

U out = 24 V; I out max. = 10 mA 

Location light function 

I LL max. = 0.5 mA 

External switch S1 

min. switching current: 0.1 mA, 5 V DC 

max. wiring length at point 4, 5, 6, 7 = 5 m 

Bettennummer einstellen (nur bei 70 0840 00, 70 0840 01) Setting bed number (only for 70 0841 00, 70 0841 01) 

An der RAN-Schnittstelle Normalruf mit automatischer Rufabstellung (70 0840 01) muss die 

entsprechende Bettennummer eingestellt werden. An der RAN-Schnittstelle Normalruf (70 

0840 00) kann die entsprechende Bettennummer eingestellt werden. 

Hierzu werden Codierschalter 1, 2 und 3 verwendet. 

*1 Achtung! Bei Bettennummer 6 im Zimmer kann kein Diagnostikruf verwendet werden. 

Hinweis: Wenn die Einstellung der Bettennummer geändert wurde, muss ein Reset für 

diese RAN‐Schnittstelle durchgeführt werden, d.h. 24 Volt ausschalten und anschließend 

wieder einschalten. 

70 0840 00 

70 0840 01 

70 0841 00 

70 0841 01 

ON 

At the RAN interface normal call with automatic call cancelling (70 0840 01) the corresponding 

bed number has to be set. At the RAN interface normal call (70 0840 00) the corresponding bed 

number can be set. 

For this, use the code switches 1, 2 and 3. 

*1 Attention: If there is bed number 6 in the room, a diagnostic call cannot be used. 

Note: After the bed number setting was changed, this RAN interface must be reset by switching 

off and on the 24 V power supply. 

70 0840 00 

70 0840 01 

ON 

1 2 3 4 5 

Werkseinstellung: 

4 = OFF, nicht verändern! 

Factory setting: 

4 = OFF, do not change! 

RAN 

1 2 3 4 5 

Codierschalter 5: 

Funktion des Tasters 

ON = Öffner 

OFF = Schließer 

Codierschalter 

Coding switches 

Bett 

Bed 

= 0 

= 1 

= 2 

= 3 

= 4 

= 5 

= 6*1 

S 1 

Coding switch 5: 

switch function 

ON = normally closed contact 

OFF = normally open contact 

70 0840 0X 

RAN-Schnittstelle Normalruf 

RAN interface normal call 

70 0841 0X 

RAN-Schnittstelle Alarmruf 

RAN interface code blue / cardiac alarm 

00 8800 45, 09/11 (Rev. 7.0) 

Page 150


RAN-Schnittstelle Telefonruf, Best.‐Nr. 70 0842 00 

Schnittstelle zur Verbindung eines Telefonanschaltrelais (Bestell‐Nr. 11 5350 00) oder eines 

Telefonkontaktes an den Zimmerbus (RAN). 







RAN interface telephone call, order no. 70 0842 00 

Interface for connection of a telephone interface relay (order no. 11 5350 00) to the room bus 

(RAN). 


manual. 





Montage 

Montage der RAN‐Schnittstellen mit den mitgelieferten Halterungen auf eine 

35 mm‐Z-Schiene oder in eine Einbaudose. 

Anschluss 

Mounting 

Mounting the RAN interface with the delivered mounts on a 35 mm Z-rail or in a back box. 

Connection 

Anschlussfeld vom ComTerminal 

ComTerminal's connection field 

0V 

RAN 

+24V 

Zur Leitungsführung des Zimmerbus RAN 

lesen Sie das Technische Handbuch. 

For the arrangement of the room bus RAN 

please refer to the technical manual. 

+24V 3 

11 5350 00 

4 


Telephone interface relais 

0V 

RAN 

1 

2 

5 

70 0842 00 

RAN‐Schnittstelle Telefonruf 

RAN interface telephone call 

Telefonnetz 

Telephone network 

77 0182 10 

Zimmerleuchte Universal 

Room lamp Universal 

weißes Leuchtfeld 

white light section 


70 0842 00 

RAN-Schnittstelle Telefonruf 


00 8800 45, 09/11 (Rev. 7.0) 

Page 151


RAN-Schnittstelle TV, Best.‐Nr. 70 0860 00 

Schnittstelle zur Verbindung des Zimmerbus (RAN) und der Fernsehsteuerung. 

In Verbindung mit PBK Hand und Steckvorrichtung Kombi (70 0424 00) / Steckvorrichtung 

Kombi Kanal (70 0434 00) steht die Möglichkeit der Bedienung des Patientenfernsehens 

zur Verfügung. 

Die Schnittstelle überträgt alle erforderlichen Signale zur Bedienung für die Fernsehsteuerung. 

Hinweis! Dieser RAN-Teilnehmer muss nicht am Raumterminal (z.B. ComTerminal) 

angemeldet werden. Wenn eine RAN-Schnittstelle TV installiert wird, ändern Sie die 

Anzahl der RAN-Teilnehmer am Raumterminal nicht. 







RAN interface TV, order no. 70 0860 00 

Interface for connection of TV control to the room bus (RAN). 

With the patient handset plugged into the connection socket combi (70 0424 00) or connection 

socket comb bedhead unit (70 0434 00), the patient is able to control the TV. 

The interface transmits all of required signals to operate the TV control. 

Note! This RAN user has not to be registered at the room terminal (e.g. ComTerminal). If a 

RAN interface TV is installed, do not change the RAN number at the room terminal. 


manual. 





Montage 

Einbau in medizinische Versorgungseinheit oder in eine Einbaudose. 


Die Einstellung der Bettennummer und der anderen Optionen erfolgt durch Jumper auf der 

jeweiligen Steckvorrichtung (70 0434 00). 

Achtung! Bei Bettennummer 6 im Zimmer kann kein Diagnostikruf verwendet werden. 

Mounting 

Installation in the medical supply unit or a back box. 

Setting bed number 

Setting of bed numbers and other options are effected by placing jumpers in the appropriate 

positions at connection socket (70 0434 00). 

Attention: If there is bed number 6 in the room, a diagnostic call cannot be used. 


47 

1 2 3 4 5 

67 

47 

Montagefüße für Tragschiene 35 mm 

Mounts for mounting on 35 mm supporting rail 

RAN 

zur TV-Steuereinheit 

to TV control unit 

Schaltausgang 

Output 

U out = 24 V 

I out max. = 10 mA 

Anschlusspunkte 6 und 7: 

max. Leitungslänge 12 m 

Connection points 6 and 7: 

max. cable length 12 m 

70 0860 00 

RAN-Schnittstelle TV 

RAN interface TV 

00 8800 68, 04/13 (Rev. 7.0) 

Page 152


OSYnet + Ip 

OSYnet + Ip 

Is 

47 

47 

1 2 

3 4 5 

6 7 





74 7005 22/13 

or / oder 74 7005 26/13 



77 0510 00 



74 7005 22/13 






2 


socket 

RJ 45 Dose 

2 

TV tone 1 / TV −Ton 1 3 

3 TV control signals / TV−Steuersignale 

2 

1 

6 

7 


socket 

RJ 45 Dose 

2 

2 

0V 

RAN 

+24V 

70 0860 00 

Uout+ 

Uout− 

3 



70 0434 00 


74 0747 00 

74 0747 00 

4 1 5 6 

31 

32 

1 

6 

6 

7 

3 

7 

1 

6 

3 

7 





Connection 

field 

8 

11 

2 

Anschlussfeld 

3 

6 

7 

1 

2 

3 

+24V 






The shielded cores for LS and MIC are a twisted pair and 

should be stripped to a maximum of 30 mm! 

Die abgeschirmte Leitungen für LS und MIC sind paarig 

verseilt und dürfen max. 30 mm abgemantelt werden. 

RJ 45 


Westernbuchse 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

OV 

OV 

MIC 

TV4b 

TV2b 

TV3b 

ELA5b 

ELA4b 

ELA3b 

ELA2b 

OV 

OV 

OV 

FB3 

FB1 

OV 

OV 

ELA1a 

TV1a 

+24V 

40 

38 

36 

34 

32 

30 

28 

26 

24 

22 

20 

18 

16 

14 

12 

10 

OV 

LS 

SCHB 

TV4a 

TV2a 

TV3a 

ELA5a 

ELA4a 

ELA3a 

ELA2a 

OV 

OV 

FB4 

FB2 

RAN 

LT2 

ELA1b 

TV1b 

+24V 

+24V 

Bed 

number 

Bed number: TV tone channel: 

Set 

jumper 

Bed 1 = P1 

Bed 2 = P2 

Bed 3 = P1, P2 

Bed 4 = P3 

Bed 5 = P1, P3 

Bed 6 = P2, P3 

P3 P2 P1 

− For stellate TV tone 

set as bed number 

− Where TV tone is parallel, 

select tone channel 1 


Jumpers 

position 

70 0434 00 



9 

7 

5 

3 

1 

8 

6 

4 

2 

39 

37 

35 

33 

31 

29 

27 

25 

23 

21 

19 

17 

15 

13 

11 

40 


(manatory / unbedingt erforderlich) 

3 

2 

Notes: 




Hinweise: 




39 

38 

20 

18 

3 

2 

1 

Betten 

Nummer 

Bett 1 = P1 

Bett 2 = P2 


Bett 4 = P3 



Jumpers 

position 

Bettennummer: TV-Tonkanal: 

Jumper Lage der Lage der 

steckt Jumper 

Jumper 

P3 P2 P1 

−Bei sternförmigen 

TV−Ton wie Betten− 

nummer einstellen. 

−Bei parallelem TV−Ton 

auf Tonkanal 1 einstellen. 

werkseitige Einstellung 

+24V 


00 8800 68, 04/13 (Rev. 7.0) 

Page 153


RAN-Schnittstelle Universal, Best.‐Nr. 70 0848 00 

Schnittstelle zur Ausgabe von Aktorsignalen in Verbindung mit Patientengerät PBK Hand 

Universal, Best.-Nr. 74 0748 00, und Steckvorrichtung Kombi Universal, Best.-Nr. 

70 0449 00, oder Steckvorrichtung Kombi Kanal Universal, Best.-Nr. 70 0448 00. 

Die RAN-Schnittstelle Universal liefert Schaltausgänge zur Steuerung von Aktoren z.B. 

einer Jalousiesteuerung. 

Hinweis! Dieser RAN-Teilnehmer darf nicht am Raumterminal (z.B. ComTerminal) 

angemeldet werden. Wenn eine RAN-Schnittstelle Universal installiert wird, ändern Sie die 

Anzahl der RAN-Teilnehmer am Raumterminal nicht. 





RAN interface universal, order no. 70 0848 00 

Interface for output of actuator signals in connection with patient handset universal, order 

no. 74 0748 00, and connection socket combi universal, order no. 70 0449 00, or 

connection socket combi bedhead unit universal, order no. 70 0448 00. 

The RAN interface universal provides switching outputs for controlling actuators, such as a 

blinds control system. 

Note! This RAN user has not to be registered at the room terminal (e.g. ComTerminal). If a 

RAN interface universal is installed, do not change the RAN number at the room terminal. 


manual. 



Bettennummer einstellen (wenn erforderlich) 

In der Werkseinstellung der RAN-Schnittstelle Universal können die angeschlossenen 

Aktoren (z.B. Jalousiesteuerung) von allen Betten aktiviert werden. Wenn die Aktoren nur 

von einem Bett gesteuert werden sollen, muss die Bettennummer per Jumper auf der 

Rückseite der Leiterplatte eingestellt werden: 

1. Gehäuse an einer Seite aufschrauben. 

2. Leiterplatte herausziehen. 

3. Jumper P1, P2, P3 entsprechend Abb. C einstellen. 

Montage 

Montage auf 35 mm Hutschiene. Hierzu mit dem Kunststoff-Rastelement der 

RAN-Schnittstelle auf der Hutschiene einrasten. 

Setting bed number (if required) 

In the factory setting the connected acuators (e.g. blinds control system) can be activated 

from all beds. If the actuators shall be controlled by one bed only, the bed number has to be 

set using the jumpers on the backside of the PCB. 

1. Unscrew one casing cover. 

2. Pull out the PCB. 

3. Set jumpers P1, P2, P3 according to figure C. 

Mounting 

Mounting on 35 mm supporting rail by using the snap-on element on the backside of the RAN 

interface. 

+24V 

RAN 

0V 

40,5 mm 


75,5 mm 

71,5 mm 

Rastelement 

Snap-on element 

OUT1 + OUT 2: 

Potentialfreie Schließer‐Kontakte 

Max. Kontaktbelastung: 60 mA / 24 V 

Potential free closing contacts 

Maximum contact load: 60 mA / 24 V 

PPK Hand Universal Taste: 

Patient handset universal key: 

OUT 1 

OUT 2 

PPK Hand Universal Taste: 

Patient handset universal key: 

z.B. Jalousie aufwärts 

e.g. Blinds up 

z.B. Jalousie abwärts 

e.g Blinds down 

Leiterplatte (Rückseite) 

PCB (backside) 

Jumper / Jumpers: 

P1P2 P3 

= Alle Betten (Werkseinstellung) 

= All beds (factory setting) 

= Bett 1 / Bed 1 


P1P2 P3 




P1P2 P3 


= Jumper gesteckt / Jumper set 

= Jumper nicht gesteckt / Jumper not set 

70 0848 00 

RAN-Schnittstelle Universal 

RAN interface universal 

00 8801 40, 03/12 (Rev. 1.0) 

Page 154


RAN‐Schnittstelle mit Sprechen, Best.‐Nr. 70 0880 00 

Schnittstelle zum Anschluss eines Patiententerminals an den Zimmerbus (RAN). 







RAN interface with speech, order no. 70 0880 00 

Interface for connecting a patient terminal to the room bus (RAN). 


manual. 





Montage 

Die RAN-Schnittstelle wird in eine zweiteilige Einbaudose eingebaut oder mittels der zwei 

Halterungen auf einer 35 mm-Z-Schiene befestigt. 

Mounting 

The RAN interface is mounted into a 2-gang back box or is fixed on a 35 mm Z rail by the two 

mounts. 

. . 

Halterungen 

mounts 

Anschlüsse 

Connections 


MIC 

LS 

SCH 

0V 

+24V 

RAN 

Zimmerbus RAN 

0V 

MIC−IN 

LS−OUT 

MIC−GND 

0V 

+24V 

BL 

RT 

Interne Verbindung zur Steckvorrichtung 

z.B. MediSET GS 

Leitungslänge max. 5 m 

(Details siehe Installationsunterlagen des Herstellers) 


Über die Jumper auf der Leiterplatte kann die entsprechende Bettennummer eingestellt 

werden. Hierzu werden Codierschalter 1, 2 und 3 verwendet. 

= Bett 1 

MIC 

LS 

SCH 

0V 

+24V 

RAN 

Room bus RAN 

0V 

MIC−IN 

LS−OUT 

MIC−GND 

0V 

+24V 

BL 

RT 

Internal connection to connection socket 

e.g. MediSET GS 

Cable length max. 5 m 

(For details refer to manufacturer's instructions) 

Setting the bed number 

Use the jumpers on the board to set the appropriate bed number. Use code switches 1, 2, 3. 

= Bed 1 

= Bett 2 

= Bett 3 

= Bett 4 

= Bed 2 

= Bed 3 

= Bed 4 

= Bett 5 

= Bed 5 

= Bett 6 *1 

= Bed 6 *1 

*1 Achtung: Bei Bettennummer 6 kann kein Diagnostikruf verwendet werden. *1 Attention: Diagnostic call not possible with bed number 6. 

70 0880 00 

RAN-Schnittstelle mit Sprechen 

RAN interface with speech 

00 8801 00, 01/09 (Rev. 5.0) 

Page 155


Telefonanschaltrelais, Best.‐Nr. 11 5350 00 

zur Anschaltung von analogen Telefonen an eine Rufanlage, zur Weiterleitung von Anrufen 

als Telefonruf. 

Rufspannung: 32 - 80 V AC 

Stromversorgung: 5 - 40 V 

EIN-/AUS-Schalter 

Schaltausgang: Wechselkontakt 

Rufpausenüberbrückung einstellbar 

Schaltdauer des Ausgangskontakts einstellbar 

Abmessungen (HxBxT): 70 x 35 x 70 mm 

Montage auf 35 mm-Hutschiene 

Hinweis! Die vollständige Installation des Systems ist im Technischen Handbuch 

beschrieben. 

Telephone interface relay, order no. 11 5350 00 

for connecting analogues telephones to a nurse call system. A telephone call will be 

displayed as a call in the nurse call system. 

Call voltage: 32 - 80 V AC 

Power supply: 5 - 40 V 

ON/OFF switch (ON = EIN, OFF = AUS) 

Output: N/C, N/O contact 

Bridging of call intervalls can be set 

Power-on time can be set. 

Dimensions (HxWxD): 70 x 35 x 70 mm 

Mounting on a 35 mm top hat rail. 


manual. 

Montage 

1. Schalten Sie die Anlage spannungsfrei. 

2. Setzen Sie das Telefonanschaltrelais auf die Hutschiene und lassen es einrasten. 

3. Anschlüsse wie in der folgenden Abbildung gezeigt vornehmen. 

4. Anlage wieder in Betrieb nehmen. 

5. Schalten Sie das Telefonanschaltrelais ein, indem Sie den EIN/AUS-Schalter 

eindrücken. 

Anschlüsse 

Mounting 

1. Power down the equipment. 

2. Place the telephone interface relay on the top hat rail and click it into place. 

3. Connect as shown in the diagram below. 

4. Restart the equipment. 

5. Switch on the telephone interface relay by pressing down the ON/OFF switch. 

Connections 


Anschlussfeld vom ComTerminal 

ComTerminal's connection field 

0V 

RAN 

+24V 

Zur Leitungsführung des Zimmerbus RAN 

lesen Sie das Technische Handbuch. 

For the arrangement of the room bus RAN 

please refer to the technical manual. 

+24V 3 

11 5350 00 

4 


Telephone interface relais 

0V 

RAN 

1 

2 

5 

70 0842 00 

RAN‐Schnittstelle Telefonruf 


Telefonnetz 

Telephone network 

77 0182 10 

Zimmerleuchte Universal 

Room lamp Universal 

weißes Leuchtfeld 

white light section 

Potentiometer einstellen 

Wenn das Telefonanschaltrealis eingeschaltet ist, wird der Schaltkontakt geschlossen, 

sobald die Telefonrufspannung anliegt. Wie lange der Schaltkontakt geschlossen bleibt, 

hängt davon ab, wie die beiden Potentiometer “Rufpausenüberbrückung“ und 

“Einschaltdauer“ eingestellt sind. 

Rufpausenunterdrückung einstellen 

Mit dem Potentiometer zur Rufpausenüberbrückung wird die Zeit festgelegt, die der 

Schaltkontakt länger geschlossen ist, als das Telefonanschaltrelais angesteuert wird. Der 

Einstellbereich ist linear geteilt und liegt zwischen 0 und 12 Sekunden. Ist die eingestellte 

Zeit größer als die Pause bei der Ansteuerung durch die Telefonrufspannung, so bedeutet 

dies, dass der Schaltkontakt ohne Unterbrechung geschlossen bleibt, bis die gesamte 

Ansteuerung abgebrochen wird (Ende des Rufes). Ist die eingestellte Zeit kleiner als die 

Ansteuerungspause, so ergibt sich die Schalt zeit des Kontaktes aus der 

Signalisierungszeit, verlängert um die eingestellte Überbrückungszeit. 

Einschaltdauer einstellen 

Mit dem Potentiometer für die Einschaltdauer kann die Zeit, in der der Schaltkontakt 

geschlossen ist, begrenzt werden. Der Einstellbereich ist nicht linear geteilt und liegt 

zwischen 0,25 und ca. 12 Sekunden. Wird das Potentiometer auf “Dauer“ gestellt, so 

bedeutet dies keine Begrenzung, d. h. der Schaltkontakt bleibt bis zum Ende der 

Ansteuerung geschlossen. 

Potentiometer Setting 

When the telephone interface relay is operational, the switching contact is closed as soon 

as the telephone signal voltage is applied. It depends on the setting of the two 

potentiometers “bridging of call intervals“ and “power-on time” how long the switching 

contact remains closed. 

Setting bridging of call intervals (“Rufpausenunterdrückung”) 

The potentiometer for the bridging of call intervals sets the period the switching contact 

remains closed longer than the telephone interface relay is actuated. The setting range is 

linear and lies between 0 and 12 seconds. If the selected time is longer than the actuation 

intervals by the telephone call voltage the switching contact remains closed without 

interruption until the actuation stops (end of call). If the selected time is shorter than the 

actuation interval the switching time of the contact results from the signal period plus the 

selected bridging time. 

Setting power-on time (“Einschaltdauer”) 

The potentiometer for power-on time setting allows to limit the time the switching contact 

remains closed. The setting range is not linear and lies between 0.25 and about 12 

seconds. If the potentiometer is set for permanent (“Dauer”) the switching contact is not 

limited and remains closed up to the end of actuation. 

11 5350 00 


Telephone interface relay 

00 8801 70, 10/11 (Rev. 2.0) 

Page 156


14.7 Interfaces in the group 

77 0801 00 OSYlink‐Door entry speaker 

77 0802 00 OSYlink‐Group lamp 

77 0803 00 OSYlink‐Universal 

77 0804 00 OSYlink‐Announcement 

77 0870 00 OSYlink AS-CCS 

77 0872 00 OSYlink AS-L200 


Page 157


OSYlink‐Türsprechstelle, Best.‐Nr. 77 0801 00 

Schnittstelle zum Anschluss einer Türsprechstelle, Bestell‐Nr. 77 0350 00, an den 

Gruppenbus (OSYnet). 

2‐Draht‐Anschluss zur Türsprechstelle (inkl. Daten und Sprache) 

Anschluss für Türöffner‐Transformator 12 V AC 

Eingang zur lokalen Ruflöschung in Verbindung mit einem separaten Taster (Schließer 

nach 24 V) 

Max. Stromaufnahme: 380 mA 





OSYlink-Door Entry Speaker, order no. 77 0801 00 

Interface for connecting a door entry speaker, order no. 77 0350 00, to the group bus 

(OSYnet). 

2‐wire‐connection to the door entry speaker (including data and speech) 

Connection for door opener transformer 12 V AC 

Input for local call cancelling in combination with a separate switch (N/O contact to 24 V) 

Max. current consumption: 380 mA 


manual. 



Montage 

Wahlweise Montage auf Hutschiene oder Wandmontage 

A1: Montage auf Hutschiene (35 mm) 

OSYlink 1 auf die Hutschiene 3 aufklipsen, bis es einrastet. 

A2: Wandmontage 

1. Die drei Befestigungsclips 2 soweit herausschieben, bis die Öffnungen für die 

Schrauben 4 frei liegen. 

2. OSYlink 1 an der Wand festschrauben. 

Mounting 

Optionally mounting on supporting rail or wall mounting. 

A1: Mounting on supporting rail (35 mm) 

Click the OSYlink 1 onto the supporting rail 3. 

A2: Wall mounting 

1. Push out the three fixing clips 2 until the holes for the screws 4 appear. 

2. Screw the OSYlink 1 to the wall. 



Zum Einstellen der Adresse auf der Leiterplatte dienen die Codierschalter 1 bis 7 mit den 





Codierschalter 8 und 9 nicht verändern! Werkseitige Einstellung: OFF. 

Reset 

Um einen Hardware-Reset durchzuführen, den Codierschalter 10 für eine Sekunde auf ON 

und anschließend wieder auf OFF stellen. Ein Hardware-Reset muss durchgeführt werden, 

wenn eine Codierschalterstellung verändert wurde. Sonst werden die geänderten 

Einstellungen nicht übernommen. 

For setting the address on the printed circuit board please use the code switches 1 to 7 with 

the values 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64. Set the appropriate switch to ON. 

Examples: Address 1 is set by using the code switch 1. Address 4 is set by code switch 3. 

Address 24 is selected through addition, coding switch 4 and 5 (8 + 16 = 24). 

Do not change code switches 8 and 9! Factory set: OFF. 

Reset 

To reset the OSYlink you have to set code switch 10 to ON for one second, then back to OFF. 

A reset has to be made, if a code switch setting has been changed. Otherwise the new setting 

will not be activated. 

ESD‐Schutzabdeckung (Best.‐Nr. 00 0276 53) ESD protection cover (order no. 00 0276 53) 

Nach dem Anschließen der Leitungen (siehe Rückseite) die ESD‐Schutzabdeckung 

aufsetzen. (ESD = Electro Static Discharge = Elektrostatische Entladung) 

Demontage von der Hutschiene 

Einen Schraubendreher in die sichtbare Öffnung des schwarzen Befestigungsclips stecken 

und dann den Clip nach oben herausziehen, bis sich das OSYlink 1 von der Hutschiene 3 

löst. 

 

Montage auf Hutschiene 

Mounting on supporting rail 

2 

1 

After you have connected the cables (see reverse side), you have to put the ESD protection 

cover on the OSYlink. (ESD = Electro Static Discharge) 

Dismantling from supporting rail 

Put a screw driver into the visible hole of the black fixing clip. Then pull the clip upwards, 

until the OSYlink 1 comes loose from the supporting rail 3. 

 

Wandmontage 

Wall mounting 

2 

1 

4 

3 

2 2 

4 

2 2 

4 

ON 

58 mm 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

1 

2 

4 

8 

16 

Adresse 

Address 

7 

32 

64 

8 9 10 

Reset 

90 mm 

ESD‐Schutzabdeckung 

ESD protection cover 

77 0801 00 

OSYlink‐Türsprechstelle 

OSYlink‐Door entry speaker 

106 mm 

00 8802 34, 02/13 (Rev. 2.0) 

Page 158

Page 159


OSYlink‐Gruppenleuchte, Best.‐Nr. 77 0802 00 

Schnittstelle zum Anschluss von Gruppenleuchten an den Gruppenbus (OSYnet). 

Einsetzbar als Sammel- oder Richtungsanzeige. Raumzuordnung und Bildung von Gruppen 

möglich. 

4 x 2 potentialfreie Ausgänge zur Anschaltung von 4 Gruppenleuchten mit je 2 Leuchtfeldern 

Stromversorgung wählbar (Jumper) intern aus der Rufanlage oder extern 

Anzeige nach DIN VDE 0834, zentral konfigurierbar 

Zentrale, flexible Konfiguration der Blinkfolgen und Zuordnung der Teilnehmeradressen 

Max. Stromaufnahme: 26 mA + 60 mA je Ausgang 





OSYlink-Group lamp, order no. 77 0802 00 

Interface for connecting group lamps to the group bus (OSYnet). Usable as collective or 

direction display. Room allocation and group forming possible. 

4 x 2 potential‐free outputs for connecting 4 group lamps, with two light sections each 

Power supply selectable (jumper) internal from the call system or external 

Display compliant with DIN VDE 0834, centrally configurable 

Central, flexible configuration of flash‐signal sequences and allocation of user addresses 

Max. current consumption: 26 mA + 60 mA per output 




Montage 








Mounting 












Adresse 4 durch Einschalten des Codierschalters 3. 



Reset 







Examples: Address 1 is set by using the code switch 1. Address 4 by the code switch 3. 

Address 24 is selected through addition, coding switch 4 and 5 (8 + 16 = 24). 


Reset 




ESD‐Schutzabdeckung (Bestell‐Nr. 00 0276 53) ESD protection cover (order no. 00 276 53) 






löst. 

 



2 

1 






 

Wandmontage 

Wall mounting 

2 

1 

4 

3 

2 2 

4 

2 2 

4 

58 mm 


(1 Sek. EIN / 1 Sek. AUS), wenn OSYlink 

ok ist. Sonst liegt eine Störung vor. 

Red control LED flashes slowly 

(1 sec ON, 1 sec OFF), if OSYlink is ok. 


ON 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

7 

8 9 10 

1 

2 

4 

8 

16 

Adresse 

Address 

32 

64 

Reset 

90 mm 



77 0802 00 

OSYlink‐Gruppenleuchte 

OSYlink‐Group lamp 

106 mm 

00 8802 35, 10/11 (Rev. 1.1) 

Page 160

Page 161


OSYlink‐Universal, Best.‐Nr. 77 0803 00 

Schnittstelle zur Anschaltung von Fremdanlagen und/oder technischen Einrichtungen an 

den Gruppenbus (OSYnet). Max. Stromaufnahme: 900 mA. 





OSYlink-Universal, order no. 77 0803 00 

Interface for connecting external systems and/or technical installations to the group bus 

(OSYnet). Max. current consumption: 900 mA 


Caution! The printed circuit board includes electrostatic sensitive components. Avoid 

touching. 

Montage 








Mounting 














Reset 








Address 24 is selected through addition: coding switch 4 and 5 (8 + 16 = 24). 


Reset 












und dann den Clip nach oben herausziehen, bis sich OSYlink 1 von der Hutschiene 3 löst. 

 



3 

2 

2 2 

1 




4 

Wandmontage 

Wall mounting 

2 

2 

1 

2 

4 

4 

58 mm 

ON 

90 mm 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

1 

2 

4 

8 

16 

Adresse 

Address 

7 

32 

64 

8 9 10 

Reset 

77 0803 00 

OSYlink‐Universal 

160 mm 



00 8802 36, 06/12 (Rev. 4.0) 

Page 162


Ip 

Ip 

OSYnet 

OSYnet 

0 V 

0 V 

+24 V 

+24 V 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

OSYlink-Universal 

Order No. / Best.-Nr. 77 0803 00 

DG 

DL 

DH 

DG 

8 

16 

32 

64 

1 

2 

4 

Address 

NC 

Test 

Reset 

Rev.: 

Ser. No.: 

0 V 

IN 1 

0 V 

IN 2 

0 V 

IN 3 

0 V 

IN 4 

0 V 

IN 5 

0 V 

IN 6 

0 V 

IN 7 

0 V 

IN 8 

R_IN 1 

R_IN 2 

R_IN 3 

R_IN 4 

24V_OUT 8 

24V_OUT 7 

O C 8 

OUT 8 

C C 8 

C 8 

0 V 

OUT 7 

O C 7 

C C 7 

C 7 

0 V 

OUT 1 

OUT 2 

0 V 

OUT 3 

OUT 4 

0 V 

OUT 5 

OUT 6 

Jumpers, see below 

Jumper, siehe unten 

4K7 

4K7 

4K7 

4K7 

IN 1 - 4 

Monitored inputs 

Überwachte Schalteingänge 

Jumper 

R_IN1: 

R_IN2: 

R_IN3: 

R_IN4: 

24V_OUT7: 

24V_OUT8: 

IN 5 - 8 

Inputs 

Schalteingänge 

Jumper setzen, wenn IN 1 nicht benutzt. 




Jumper setzen, wenn Spannungsversorgung an OUT 7 intern. 

Jumper setzen, wenn Spannungsversorgung an OUT 8 intern. 

IN 5 Schalteingang - Sammeldurchsage (alle Stationen) Schließerkontakt 

IN 6 Schalteingang - Sammeldurchsage (alle Anwesenheiten) Schließerkontakt 

Funktion von IN 5 - IN 6: Kontakt geschlossen = Durchsage ausgelöst 

Kontakt geöffnet = Durchsage beendet 

IN 7 Schalteingang - Ruf auslösen Schließerkontakt 

IN 8 Schalteingang - Ruf abstellen Schließerkontakt 

Funktion von IN 7: Kontakt geschlossen = Ruf auslösen 

Kontakt geöffnet = ohne Funktion 

Funktion von IN 8: Kontakt geschlossen = Ruf von IN7 abstellen 

Kontakt geöffnet = ohne Funktion 

OUT 7, 8 

Relay outputs with internal or 

external power supply 

(external power supply: 

24V AC or DC, max. 1A) 

Relais‐Ausgänge mit interner 

oder ext. Spannungsversorgung 

(extener Spannungsversorgung: 

24V AC oder DC, max. 1A) 

Jumpers 

R_IN1: Set jumper, if IN 1 is not used. 




24V_OUT7: Set jumper if internal 24 V is used for OUT 7. 

24V_OUT8: Set jumper if internal 24 V is used for OUT 8. 

OUT 1 - 5 

Solid state outputs 24V 

Elektronische 

Ausgänge 24V 

OUT 6 

Solid state output 24V 

with location light feature 

Elektronischer Ausgang 

24V mit Findelicht‐Funktion 

IN 1 

IN 2 

Überwachter Schalteingang - Ruf 

Überwachter Schalteingang - Notruf 

Schließerkontakt mit parallelem 4K7-Widerstand 

Schließerkontakt mit parallelem 4K7-Widerstand 

IN 1 

IN 2 

Monitored input - Call 

Monitored input - Emergency call 

Normally open contact with parallel 4K7 resistor 


IN 3 Überwachter Schalteingang - AlarmrufSchließerkontakt mit parallelem 4K7-Widerstand IN 3 Monitored input- Alarm call 


IN 4 Überwachter Schalteingang - Ruf Schließerkontakt mit parallelem 4K7-Widerstand IN 4 Monitored input - Call 


Funktion von IN 1 - IN 4: Kontakt geschlossen = Rufmeldung frischer Ruf 

Function for IN 1 - IN 4: Contact closed = Call message Fresh call 

Kontakt geöffnet = Ausmeldung Ruf abgestellt 

Contact opened = Off message Call cancelled 

Quittierung möglich, frisch / abgefragt 

Acknowledgement possible, fresh / answered 

IN 5 Input - Collective announcement (to all wards) Normally open contact 

IN 6 Input - Collective announcement (to all staff) Normally open contact 

Function for IN 5 - IN 6: Contact closed = Announcement started 

Contact opened = Announcement closed 

IN 7 Input - Raise call Normally open contact 

IN 8 Input - Cancel call Normally open contact 

Function for IN 7: Contact closed = Raise call 

Contact opened = no function 

Function for IN 8: Contact closed = Cancel call from IN7 

Contact opened = no function 


OUT 1 Schaltausgang frei konfigurierbar, Elektronischer Ausgang 24V 


Sammelausgang Rufe 



Sammelausgang Notrufe 



Sammelausgang Alarmrufe 

OUT 4 Schaltausgang frei konfigurierbar Elektronischer Ausgang 24V 

OUT 5 Schaltausgang frei konfigurierbar Elektronischer Ausgang 24V 

OUT 6 Schaltausgang frei konfigurierbar Elektron. Ausgang 24V und/oder Findelicht- 

Funktion für Eingänge IN1, IN2, IN3, IN4, IN7. 

OUT 7 Schaltausgang frei konfigurierbar Wechselkontakt potentialfrei, interne 24V nutzbar 

OUT 8 Schaltausgang frei konfigurierbar Wechselkontakt potentialfrei, interne 24V nutzbar 

Konfiguration der Ausgänge in der Software SystemOrganizer. 

Bei Stationszusammenschaltung zeigen die Ausgänge stationsübergreifend an. 

OUT 1 Output can be configured. Solid state output 24V 


Collective output Calls 

OUT 2 Output can be configured. 


Collective output Emergency calls 


OUT 3 Output can be configured. 


Collective output Alarm calls 


OUT 4 Output can be configured Solid state output 24V 

OUT 5 

OUT 6 

Output can be configured 

Output can be configured 


Solid state output 24V and/or location light 

feature for inputs IN 1, IN 2, IN 3, IN 4, IN 7. 

OUT 7 Out. can be configured Change-over contact potential-free, internal 24V can be used 

OUT 8 Out. can be configured Change-over contact potential-free, internal 24V can be used 

The outputs are configured using the SystemOrganizer software. 

In case of ward coupling the outputs signal across wards. 

00 8802 36, 06/12 (Rev. 4.0) 

Page 163


OSYlink‐Durchsage, Best.‐Nr. 77 0804 00 

Schnittstelle zum Anschluss von Durchsagelautsprechern, Bestell‐Nr. 05 0024 01, an den 

Gruppenbus (OSYnet). Anschaltung als Einzelgerät oder in Gruppen. 

1 Audio‐Ausgang zur Ansteuerung von aktiven Lautsprechern (max. 5 Lautsprecher) 

1 potentialfreier Schaltausgang zur Steuerung der Zuschaltkennung 






OSYlink-Announcement, order no. 77 0804 00 

Interface for connecting announcement loudspeakers, order no. 05 0024 01, to the group 

bus (OSYnet). Connection of single devices or groups. 

1 audio output for driving active loudspeakers (max. 5 loudspeakers) 

1 potential‐free digital output for control of signalling the activity of the announcement 

system 



manual. 



Montage 








Mounting 














Reset 










Reset 











löst. 

 



2 

3 

1 






 

Wandmontage 

Wall mounting 

2 

1 

4 

2 2 

4 

2 2 

4 

ON 

58 mm 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

7 

8 9 10 

1 

2 

4 

8 

16 

Adresse 

Address 

32 

64 

Reset 

90 mm 



77 0804 00 

OSYlink‐Durchsage 

OSYlink‐Announcement 

106 mm 

00 8802 37, 01/13 (Rev. 2.0) 

Page 164

Page 165


OSYlink AS-CCS, Best.‐Nr. 77 0870 00 

Schnittstelle zur Anschaltung der Raumterminals einer CCS-Station (CCS-Bus) an den 

Gruppenbus (OSYnet) einer Flamenco-Rufanlage. Stromaufnahme: 90 mA. 

Bei Anschaltung von Wechselsprechsystemen (CCS 1080 W) wird zusätzlich ein 

Wechselsprechadapter, Best.-Nr. 74 8000 00, mit dem Netzgerät, Best.-Nr. 21 8000 00, 

benötigt. 

OSYlink AS-VKS, Best.‐Nr. 77 0871 00 

Schnittstelle zur Anschaltung der Raumterminals einer VKS-Station (CCS-Bus) an den 

Gruppenbus (OSYnet) einer Flamenco SE -Rufanlage. Stromaufnahme: 90 mA. 

Zusätzlich wird ein Wechselsprechadapter, Best.-Nr. 74 8000 00, mit dem Netzgerät, 

Best.-Nr. 21 8000 00, benötigt. 

OSYlink AS-L200, Best.‐Nr. 77 0872 00 

Schnittstelle zur Anschaltung der Raumterminals einer L200-Station (Stationsbus WCB0) 

an den Gruppenbus (OSYnet) einer Flamenco-Rufanlage. Stromaufnahme: 90 mA. 

OSYlink AS-CCS, order no. 77 0870 00 

Interface for connecting the room terminals of a CCS ward (CCS bus) to the group bus 

(OSYnet) of a Flamenco nurse call system. Current consumption: 90 mA. 

For connecting a half-duplex speech system (CCS 1080 W) additionally a speech amplifier, 

order no. 74 8000 00, with the power supply unit, order no. 21 8000 00, is needed. 

OSYlink AS-VKS, order no. 77 0871 00 

Interface for connecting the room terminals of a VKS ward (CCS bus) to the group bus 

(OSYnet) of a Flamenco SE call system. Current consumption: 90 mA. 

Additionally a speech amplifier, order no. 74 8000 00, with the power supply unit, order no. 

21 8000 00, is needed. 

OSYlink AS-L200, order no. 77 0872 00 

Interface for connecting the room terminals of a L200 ward (ward bus WCB0) to the group 

bus (OSYnet) of a Flamenco nurse call system. Current consumption: 90 mA. 


Hinweis! OSYlink AS sowie die angeschlossenen Raumterminals müssen im 

SystemOrganizer des Flamenco-Systems konfiguriert werden. 

Vorsicht! Elektrostatisch gefährdete Bauteile 

Die Leiterplatte ist mit elektrostatisch gefährdeten Bauteilen bestückt. Vermeiden 

Sie deshalb eine direkte Berührung. 

Montage 

Montage auf Hutschiene oder Wandmontage im Stationsverteiler oder Installationsraum. 







10-poligen Codierschalter einstellen 

Adresse einstellen (1 – 110) 

Zum Einstellen der Adresse des OSYlink am Gruppenbus OSYnet dienen die 

Codierschalter 1 bis 7 mit den Werten 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64. Schalter auf ON stellen. 




Angeschlossenes System einstellen (gemäß Abb. B) 

Zum Einstellen des angeschlossenen Systems dienen Codierschalter 8 „W/G“ mit W für 

Wechselsprechen und G für Gegensprechen und Codierschalter 9 „1080/2000“. 

Hardware-Reset durchführen 

Für einen Reset den Codierschalter 10 für eine Sekunde auf ON und dann wieder auf OFF 

stellen. Ein Reset muss durchgeführt werden, wenn eine Codierschalterstellung verändert 

wurde. Sonst werden die geänderten Einstellungen nicht übernommen. 

System Status LEDs 

OSYlink AS-CCS oder OSYlink AS-VKS: 

CCS L200 Audio OSYnet 

Blinkt langsam (1s / 1s) = Verbindung zum OSYnet ist ok. 

grün – grün rot 

Dauerlicht = Keine Verbindung zum OSYnet. 

Blinkt langsam (1s / 1s) = Sprechleitung ist betriebsbereit. 

Blinkt schnell = Sprechverbindung oder Durchsage aktiv. 

Blinkt langsam (1s / 1s) = CCS-Bus ist ok. 

Blinkt schnell = Mindestens eine Störung am CCS-Bus 

Dauerlicht = OSYlink AS nicht betriebsbereit! OSYlink AS wartet 

OSYlink AS-L200: auf Konfigurationsdaten vom OSY-ControlCenter. 


Blinkt langsam (1s / 1s) = Verbindung zum OSYnet ok. 

– grün – rot 

Dauerlicht = Keine Verbindung zum OSYnet. 

Blinkt langsam (1s / 1s) = Stationsbus WCB0 ist ok. 

Blinkt schnell = Mindestens eine Störung am Stationsbus WCB0 

Dauerlicht = OSYlink AS nicht betriebsbereit! OSYlink AS wartet 

auf Konfigurationsdaten vom OSY-ControlCenter. 



und dann den Clip nach oben herausziehen, bis sich OSYlink 1 von der Hutschiene 3 löst. 

 

 

2 



Wandmontage 

Wall mounting 

2 

3 

2 

2 2 

4 

1 

2 

1 

4 

4 

58 mm 

77 087x 00 

OSYlink AS... 

Note! The OSYlink module and connected room terminals must be configured 

using the SystemOrganizer of the Flamenco system. 

Caution! Electrostatic sensitive components 

The printed circuit board includes electrostatic sensitive components. 

Therefore avoid touching. 

Mounting 

Optionally mounting on supporting rail or wall mounting in distribution boxes or technical 

rooms. 






Setting the 10 pole coding switch 

Setting the address (1 – 110) 

For setting the address for the OSYlink on the group bus OSYnet use the code switches 1 to 

7 with the values 1, 2, 4, 8, 16, 32, 64. Set the appropriate switch to ON. 



Setting the connected system (according to figure B) 

For setting the connected system use code switch 8 „W/G“ (W = simplex speech, G = duplex 

speech) and code switch 9 „1080/2000“. 

Reset 





OSYlink AS-CCS or OSYlink AS-VKS: 


Flashing slowly (1s / 1s) = Connection to OSYnet is ok. 

Steady light = No connection to OSYnet. 

green – green red 

Flashing slowly (1s / 1s) = Speech line is operational. 

Flashing quickly = Active speech connection or announcement. 

Flashing slowly (1s / 1s) = CCS-Bus is ok. 

Flashing quickly = Minimum one fault on the CCS bus 

Steady light = OSYlink AS is not operational! It is waiting for 

OSYlink AS-L200: 

configuration data from the OSY-ControlCenter 


Flashing slowly (1s / 1s) = Connection to OSYnet ok. 

Steady light = No connection to OSYnet. 

– green – red 

Flashing slowly (1s / 1s) = Ward bus WCB0 is ok. 

Flashing quickly = Minimum one fault on the ward bus WCB0 

Steady light = OSYlink AS is not operational! It is waiting for 

configuration data from the OSY-ControlCenter 




Codierschalter / Coding Switch: 

ON 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

160 mm 

1 

2 

4 

8 

16 

Adresse 

Address 


Coding Switch 

7 

32 

64 

W / G 


8 9 10 

1080/2000 

Reset 

Angeschlossenes System 

Connected System 

90 mm 

OSYlink AS-CCS 

OSYlink AS-VKS 

OSYlink AS-L200 

Angeschlossenes System: 

Connected System: 

EccoLine mit Sprechen / 

EccoLine with speech, 

NewLine C201, NewLine, 

CCS 2000 G 

CCS 1080 G 

CCS 1080 W 

VKS 3000 (CCS 2000 Bus) 

VKS 3000 (CCS 1080 Bus) 

VKS 2000 (CCS 2000 Bus) 

VKS 2000 (CCS 1080 Bus) 

EccoLine L200, 

NewLine L200 


Coding Switch 

8 9 

ON 

ON 

ON OFF 

OFF OFF 

OFF ON 

OFF OFF 

OFF ON 

OFF OFF 

OFF OFF 

00 8800 62, 07/12 (Rev. 4.0) 

Page 166

I 

I 

I 

I 


EccoLine mit Sprechen/with speech, NewLine C201, NewLine, CCS 2000G, CCS 1080 G 

OSYnet 

OSYnet 

OSYlink-Gruppenleuchte*) 

OSYlink-Group lamp*) 

77 0802 00 

ComStation BUS *) 

77 0605 x0 

*) Optional am OSYnet anschließbar, siehe projektspezifischer Plan. 

*) Connection to OSYnet as an option. Refer to special plan for the hospital. 

zum / to the OSY-ControlCenter 

Ip 

Ip 

Achtung! Wenn OSYlink AS der letzte Busteilnehmer am OSYnet ist, muss zwischen DH 

und DL ein Abschlusswiderstand (120 Ohm, Bestell-Nr. 00 0040 76) gesetzt werden. 

Attention! If OSYlink AS is the last bus user on the OSYnet, DH and DL have to be connected 

by a terminating resistor (120 Ohm, order no. 00 0040 76). 

0 V 

0 V 

+24 V 

+24 V 

DG 

DL 

DH 

Power Supply 

OSYlink AS-CCS Order No. 77 0870 00 

OSYlink AS-VKS Order No. 77 0871 00 

OSYlink AS-L200 Order No. 77 0872 00 

DG 

OSYnet 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

Input 24 V / 90 mA 

Made in Germany 

8 

16 

32 

64 

1 

2 

4 

Address 

W / G 

1080/2000 

Reset 

Ward Bus L200 Begin 

Ward Bus L200 End 

CCS Bus / WCU Wechselsprech-Adapter 

System Status 

NC 

NC 

NC 

D‐0V 

D‐H 

D‐L 

NC 

NC 

NC 

D‐0V 

D‐H 

D‐L 

NF‐a 

NF‐b 

NF SCH 

0 VOLT 

T 

0VWCU 

SPR 

SPR 

CCS 

L200 

Audio OSYnet 

**) 

**) Brücke / Bridge 

CCS-Bus 

zu den / to the ComTerminals 

2 CCS 1080 W 

Ip 

0 V 

0 V 

+24 V 

Ip 

+24 V 

DG 

DL 

DH 

Power Supply 





DG 


NC 

NC 

NC 

D‐0V 

D‐H 

D‐L 

NC 

NC 

NC 

D‐0V 

D‐H 

D‐L 

OSYnet 



77 0802 00 

OSYnet 

NF‐a 

NF 1a 

NF‐b 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 



NF SCH 

0 VOLT 

T 

8 

16 

32 

64 

1 

2 

4 

Address 


W / G 

1080/2000 

0VWCU 

SPR 

SPR 

Reset 

OSYnet 



CCS 

System Status 

L200 




Attention! If OSYlink is the last bus user on the OSYnet, DH and DL have to be connected 


Audio OSYnet 



**) 

WCU Wechselsprechadatper Bestell-Nr. 74 8000 00 

Speech Amplifier Order No. 74 8000 00 

Netzgerät 21 8000 00 

Power Supply Unit 21 8000 00 

Eingang / Input: 230 V AC 

Ausgang / Output 42 V AC 

Power 

On 

ComCenter 

WCU 

CCS-W 

SPR 

active 

CCS Bus WCU 

SPR 

SPR0V 

SPR 

0VWCU 

SPR 

NF‐a 

NF‐b 

NF SCH 

0 VOLT 

T 

NF‐a 

NF‐b 

NF SCH 

0 VOLT 

T 

3 

2 

1 

230 V AC 

80 4323 00 (40 cm) 

2 

3 

1 


CCS-Bus 

00 8802 62, 07/12 (Rev. 4.0) 

Page 167

I 

I 

I 

I 


3 

VKS 3000 (CCS 2000 Bus), VKS 3000 (CCS 1080 Bus), VKS 2000 (CCS 2000 Bus), VKS 2000 (CCS 1080 Bus) 

OSYnet 

OSYnet 

zum / to the OSY-ControlCenter SE 



77 0802 00 


*) Connection to OSYnet as an option. Refer to special plan for the prison. 

Ip 

Ip 



Attention! If OSYlink is the last bus user on the OSYnet, DH and DL have to be connected 


0 V 

0 V 

+24 V 

+24 V 

DG 

DL 

DH 

Power Supply 




DG 

OSYnet 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 



8 

16 

32 

64 

1 

2 

4 

Address 

W / G 

1080/2000 

Reset 




System Status 

NC 

NC 

NC 

D‐0V 

D‐H 

D‐L 

NC 

NC 

NC 

D‐0V 

D‐H 

D‐L 

NF‐a 

NF‐b 

NF SCH 

0 VOLT 

T 

0VWCU 

SPR 

SPR 

CCS 

L200 

Audio OSYnet 


**) 

3 


2 

1 

Netzgerät 21 8000 00 

Power Supply Unit 21 8000 00 

Eingang / Input: 230 V AC 

Ausgang / Output 42 V AC 

230 V AC 

80 4323 00 (40 cm) 

Power 

On 

SPR 

WCU Wechselsprechadatper Bestell-Nr. 74 8000 00 

Speech Amplifier Order No. 74 8000 00 

ComCenter 

SPR0V 

SPR 

WCU 

0VWCU 

SPR 


2 

3 

1 

NF‐a 

CCS-W 

NF‐b 

NF SCH 

0 VOLT 

CCS-Bus 

T 

SPR 

active 

NF‐a 

CCS Bus WCU 

NF‐b 

NF SCH 

0 VOLT 

T 

4 

EccoLine L200, NewLine L200 

OSYnet 



77 0802 00 

OSYnet 




Ip 

Ip 



Attention! If OSYlink AS is the last bus user on the OSYnet, DH and DL have to be connected 


0 V 

0 V 

+24 V 

+24 V 

DG 

DL 

DH 

Power Supply 




DG 

OSYnet 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 



8 

16 

32 

64 

1 

2 

4 

Address 

W / G 

1080/2000 

Reset 




System Status 

NC 

NC 

NC 

D‐0V 

D‐H 

D‐L 

NC 

NC 

NC 

D‐0V 

D‐H 

D‐L 

NF‐a 

NF‐b 

NF SCH 

0 VOLT 

T 

0VWCU 

SPR 

SPR 

CCS 

L200 

Audio OSYnet 

zu den Lichtruf-Terminals 

to the nurse call terminals 

WCB0 

WCB0 

von den Lichtruf-Trminals 

from the nurse call terminals 

00 8800 62, 07/12 (Rev. 4.0) 

Page 168


14.8 Accessories 

70 0790 00 Sound detector 

70 0812 00 Diagnostic connection cable 

77 0901 00 Smoke detector 


Page 169


Schallwächter, Best.‐Nr. 70 0790 00 

Der Schallwächter dient zur akustischen Kontrolle von Räumen. Automatische Auslösung 

von Rufen durch laute Geräusche. 

Lautstärke und Zeitdauer der Geräusche, die einen Ruf auslösen sollen, können mit den 

Reglern ”Empfindlichkeit” 1 und ”Verzögerung” 2 eingestellt werden. 

Hinweis: Normale Gesprächslautstärke führt nicht zur Rufauslösung. 



Sound detector, order no. 70 0790 00 

Sound detector for acoustic monitoring of rooms. Automatic call activation in case of any 

noises. 

Sensitivity and time delay can be adjusted. So it can be adjusted which volume and noise 

duration shall activate a call. 

Note: Normal conversation will not activate a call. 


manual. 

Anschlussmöglichkeiten 

Der Schallwächter kann an unterschiedliche Steckvorrichtungen und 

Patienten‐Bedienkombinationen der Firma Tunstall GmbH angeschlossen werden und dient 

zur akustischen Kontrolle von Räumen. 

Bedienungsanleitung 

Einschalten 

Durch einfaches Stecken des Mini-DIN-Steckers in die Steckbuchse für Rufgeräte wird das 

Gerät eingeschaltet und ist sofort betriebsbereit. 

Einstellungen 

1 Empfindlichkeit (Ansprechempfindlichkeit): 

Dieser Regler dient zur Einstellung der Lautstärke, ab der das Gerät einen Ruf auslöst. 

Schwellwertskala von 0 bis 9. 

Einstellung 9 = höchste Empfindlichkeit: geringe Geräusche lösen einen Ruf aus. 

2 Verzögerung: 

Dieser Regler dient zur Einstellung der zeitlichen Mindestdauer eines Geräusches, die zur 

Auslösung eines Rufes führt. 

Zeitskala: 0 bis 9 (Verzögerungszeit 0,5 - 6 s) 

Connection possibilities 

The sound detector can be connected to different connection sockets and patient bedside 

combinations from the company Tunstall GmbH. 

User instructions 

To switch on 

The device will be automatically switched on by plugging into the corresponding socket for 

call devices. It is immediately operational. 

Adjustments: 

1 Sensitivity (sensitivity of speaking): 

This regulator is used for adjusting the sensitivity of sound loudness level. A call will be 

activated above this level. Scale of threshold value 0 to 9. 

Adjustment 9 = highest sensitivity: a slight noise activates a call. 

2 Delay: 

This regulator is used for adjusting the minimum duration of sound, beyond which leads to 

call activation. 

Time scale: 0 to 9 (time of delay 0,5 to 6 s). 

Technische Daten 

Technical data 

Farbe 

hellgrau 

Material 

Kunststoff ABS 

Stromversorgung 

24 VDC / 16 mA Ruhestrom 

Colour 

light grey 

Material 

Plastic ABS 

Power supply 

24 VDC / 16 mA standby current 


125 mm 

30 mm 

1 

150 mm 

2 

70 0790 00 

Schallwächter 

Sound detector 

00 8800 23, 06/06 (Rev. 2.0) 

Page 170


Verbindungsleitung für Diagnostikgeräte, Best.‐Nr. 70 0812 00 

Verbindungsleitung zum Anschluss von elektromedizinischen Geräten an 

Steckvorrichtungen, Best.‐Nr. 70 xxxx xx. 


beschrieben. 

Diagnostik connection cable, order no. 70 0812 00 

Cable for connection of electromedical devices to connection sockets, order no. 70 xxxx xx. 


manual. 

Anschluss an Steckvorrichtung 70 xxxx xx 

Connection to connection socket 70 xxxx xx 

8 

DIA 

7 

6 

5 

RL 

4 

3 

ABM 

+24V 

2 

1 

Drahtbrücke/wire link 

0V 


Rückmeldung bei Bedarf 

max. zul. Strom 10 mA 

Feedback on demand 

maximum allowable 

current 10 mA 

potentialfreier Kontakt nach VDE 

potential-free contact 

according to VDE 

muss im Alarmfall öffnen 

must open in case of emergency 

Länge = 2m / length = 2 m 

Elektromedizinisches Gerät 

Electromedical Device 

Freie Drahtenden (30 mm), verzinnt 

Free wire ends (30 mm), tin-plated 

Adernfarben: 

1 = blau 

2 = rot 

3 = 

4 = weiß 

5 = orange 

6 = gelb 

7 = schwarz 

8 = grün 

Wire colours: 

1 = blue 

2 = red 

3 = 

4 = white 

5 = orange 

6 = yellow 

7 = black 

8 = green 

Achtung! Nicht benutzte Drahtenden müssen isoliert werden. 

Attention! Non used wire ends have to be insulated. 

70 0812 00 

Verbindungsleitung für Diagnostikgeräte 

Diagnostic connection cable 

enspricht Zeichnungs-Nr./equivalent to drawing no. 70 1 0013 403, 28.04.1997 

Page 171

Anschlussplan für Rauchmelder, Best.−Nr.: 77 0901 00 

Connection plan for smoke detector, order no.: 77 0901 00 

Potenzialfreier Kontakt 

Potential-free contact 

Contact libre de potentiel 

Contatto libero da potenziale 

Klemme im Relaismodul 

Clamp within the relay module 

Bornier dans le module relais 

Morsetto del modulo di relè 

Anschluss an die Rufanlage 

Connection to the nurse call system 

Connexion au système d’appel 

Collegamento a sistema di chiamata 

77 0901 00, 07/2006 

Page 172


14.9 System devices 

77 2x0x 00 OSY‐ControlCenter 

77 2100 00 OSYnet‐SafetyController 


Page 173


OSY‐ControlCenter, Best.‐Nr. 77 2000 00 

Das OSY-ControlCenter stellt alle Systemfunktionen der Flamenco-Rufanlage zur 

Verfügung. Es organisiert die Datenverteilung und den gesamten Sprechverkehr zwischen 

den einzelnen Teilnehmern. Das OSY-ControlCenter ist die zentrale Systemschnittstelle zur 

Ein- und Ausgabe von Daten, Sprechverbindungen und Systemmeldungen, jedoch auch die 

Schaltstelle für Fernzugriffe und Softwareupdates. Das OSY-ControlCenter ist modular 

aufgebaut und wird individuell entsprechend dem benötigten Leistungsumfang 

zusammengestellt. Die Anzahl der jeweils erforderlichen internen Komponenten ergibt sich 

aus der Gesamtanzahl der anzuschließenden Teilnehmer und der Anzahl der internen und 

externen Sprechverbindungen. Zusätzliche Schnittstellen zum Datenaustausch, z.B. KIS, 

Facility Management und Anbindungen an Telefonanlagen können integriert werden. Die 

Konfiguration des OSY‐ControlCenters erfolgt werkseitig. 

Versorgungsspannung OSY‐ControlCenter: 24 V DC 

Max. Stromaufnahme OSY‐ControlCenter: 2,3 A 



OSY‐ControlCenter, order no. 77 2000 00 

The OSY-ControlCenter provides all system functions for the Flamenco nurse call system. It 

organises the data distribution and the whole speech traffic between the single users. 

Furthermore the OSY-ControlCenter represents the central system interface for incoming 

and outgoing data, speech connections and system messages as well as the switching 

point for remote accesses and software updates. The OSY-ControlCenter is modular 

constructed and is individually assembled according to the required performance. The 

number of required internal components results from the total number of users to be 

connected and the number of internal and external speech connections. Additional 

interfaces for data exchange, e.g. for HIS, facility management and connections to 

telephone systems can be integrated. The OSY‐ControlCenter is factory configured. 

Supply voltage for OSY‐ControlCenter: 24 V DC 

Max. current consumption OSY‐ControlCenter: 2.3 A 


Netzwerk‐Switch 

network switch 

Anschlussbuchsen für Netzwerk-Switch 

connection sockets for network switch 

Kontrollanzeigen (LED) 

control LEDs 



Netzwerk‐Switch anschließen 

Anschlussfeld 

connection field 

Je nach Ausstattung des OSY‐ControlCenters, weist dieses bis zu 6 RJ45‐Buchsen auf. 

Jede dieser Buchsen muss mit einer beliebigen RJ45‐Buchse im Netzwerk‐Switch 

verbunden werden. Es empfiehlt sich allerdings die folgende übersichtliche Anordnung: 

Kabeleinführung 

cable entrances 

Connection of network switch 

Depending on its components the OSY‐ControlCenter may include a maximum of 6 RJ45 

sockets. Each socket has to be connected to an arbitrary RJ45 socket in the network 

switch. But the following clear arrangement is recommended: 

Netzwerk‐Switch 



RJ45‐Buchsen 

RJ45 sockets 

77 2000 00 


00 8802 52, 10/12 (Rev. 3.0) 

Page 174

Montage D Mounting GB 

Anforderungen an den Installationsort 

Bedingt zugänglicher technischer Betriebsraum 

Trockener Raum (Max. Luftfeuchtigkeit 75% bei ca. 18 o C) 

Umgebungstemperatur 0 o bis 40 o C 

Das OSY‐ControlCenter muss jederzeit gut zugänglich sein (Revisionsgang 60 cm 

breit). 

Freiraum für die Kabeleinführung muss berücksichtigt werden. 

Belüftung 

Die Wärmeabfuhr darf nicht behindert sein. Für eine ausreichende Luftzirkulation über und 

unter dem OSY‐ControlCenter muss deshalb gesorgt werden. Der Abstand über und unter 

dem OSY‐ControlCenter zu anderen Geräten oder zu Wänden muss mindestens 50 mm (im 

Montageschrank 3 HE) betragen. Die Lüftungsdurchlässe dürfen unter keinen Umständen 

abgedeckt sein. Beim Einbau in Schaltschränke muss gegebenenfalls durch Zwangslüftung 

die Verlustwärme abgeführt werden. 

Installation location requirements 

Limited access location for technical equipment 

Dry location (max. relative humidity 75% at approx. 18 o C) 

Ambient temperatures between 0 o and 40 o C 

The OSY‐ControlCenter shall be readily accessible (access aisle 60 cm wide). 

Consider sufficient free space for cable entries. 

Ventilation 

The heat transfer must not be blocked. The selected location must ensure sufficient air 

circulation above and below the OSY‐ControlCenter. Therefore, check for minimum 

distance of 50 mm (3 U in a rack) to walls, ceiling and other equipment. The venting ports 

must not be covered up. Where the OSY‐ControlCenter is installed in a 19‐inch rack, 

forced-air ventilation may be required. 

Wandmontage / Wall mounting 

291.5 

Netzwerk-Schwitch 


50 

Ø 12 

55 

278.9 

354.4 

Ø 7 

77 2000 00 


Gewicht ohne Kabel ca. 17 kg 

weight without cables approx. 17 kg 

465,6 

482.6 

444 

25 

291.5 

Angaben in mm. 

Values in mm. 


Einbau in 19 Zoll Montageschrank / Mounting in 19-inch rack 

Netzwerk-Schwitch 


7 mm 

12 mm 

77 2000 00 


Montagewinkel nach vorne umsetzen. 

Move mounting brackets to the front. 

00 8802 52, 10/12 (Rev. 3.0) 

Page 175


Gefahr! Bauseitiger Potentialausgleich erforderlich 

Anschluss werkseitig 

2 x 2.5 mm 2 

Anschluss des 

Netzwerk-Swich 

werkseitig 

Netzgerät USV 

(Bestell‐Nr. 77 3400 00) 

Klappferrit (Bestell-Nr. 00 0080 34) 

Anschluss für Potentialausgleich auf 

Gewindebolzen im Gehäuse: 

Interne Potentialausgleichsverbindung 

Störmeldeausgang 

Potentialfreier Ausgang. 

Sammelausgang. 

Kontaktbelastbarkeit: max. 100 mA / 24 V. 

Bei Störung öffnet Kontakt an den Schraubklemmen. 

Störmeldeausgang schaltet bei: 

Abgezogener oder defekter OSYnet-Busteilnehmer 

Abgezogener oder defekter RAN-Busteilnehmer 

Unterbrochene Stromversorgung auf der Station 

Unterbrochene Stromversorgung am OSY-ControlCenter 

Unterbrochene OSYnet-Busleitung 

OSY-ControlCenter fährt nicht hoch 


Gruppe 1 

Gruppe 2 

Gruppe 3 

Gruppe 4 

Gruppe 5 

Gruppe 6 

Gruppe 7 

Gruppe 8 

Belegung des 9-poligen Sub-D-Steckers: 

RxD = 2 

TxD = 3 

GND = 5 

Daten Gruppe 1 








Sprechen Gruppe 1 








Nichts anschließen, wenn Telefonleitung 5, 6, 7 oder 8 benutzt wird. 

Sonst Verwendung für: Sprechen Gruppe 17 - 20. 

Nichts anschließen, wenn Telefonleitung 1, 2, 3 oder 4 benutzt wird. 

Sonst Verwendung für: Sprechen Gruppe 21 - 24. 

Beachten Sie beim Anschließen: 

Prüfen Sie alle Leitungen auf Durchgang, Kurzschlussund 

Erdschlussfreiheit. 

Wenn die Datenleitungen korrekt angeschlossen sind, 

beträgt die Spannung zwischen DH und DG sowie die 

Spannung zwischen DL und DG ca. 2,5 V. 

Achtung! Bei dem Anschlussplan handelt es sich um 

einen Standardanschlussplan. Beachten Sie die Abweichungen 

in Ihrem projektspezifischen Anschlussplan. 

Telefonleitung 1 








00 8802 52, 10/12 (Rev. 3.0) 

Page 176


Danger! Potential equalisation required. 

Pre-connected 

2 x 2.5 mm 2 

Network switch 

pre-connected 

Power supply unit UPS 

(Order no. 77 3400 00) 

Connection for potential equalisation on the 

threaded bolt in the housing: 

Internal potential equalisation connection 

Ferrite (order no. 00 0080 34) 

Fault message output 

Potential-free output. 

Collective output. 

Contact load: max. 100 mA / 24 V. 

In case of a fault contact opens at the screw clamps. 

Fault message output switches in case of: 

Disconnected or defective OSYnet bus user. 

Disconnected or defective RAN bus user. 

Interrupted power supply on the ward. 

Interrupted power supply at the OSY-ControlCenter. 

Interrupted OSYnet bus. 

OSY-ControlCenter does not boot-up. 

Assignment for the 9 pole Sub-D connector: 

RxD = 2 

TxD = 3 

GND = 5 

Group 1 

Group 2 

Group 3 

Group 4 

Group 5 

Group 6 

Group 7 

Group 8 

Data Group 1 

Data Group 2 

Data Group 3 

Data Group 4 

Data Group 5 

Data Group 6 

Data Group 7 

Data Group 8 

Speech Group 1 









Don't connect, if telephone line 5, 6, 7 or 8 is used. 

Otherwise use for: Speech Group 17 - 20. 

Don't connect, if telephone line 1, 2, 3 or 4 is used. 

Otherwise use for: Speech Group 21 - 24. 


Check all cables for continuity, short circuits and ground 

faults. 

When the data cables are correctly connected, the values 

are: voltage between DH and DG and voltage between 

DL and DG approx. 2.5 V. 

Attention! The connection plan on the following page is 

a standard connection plan. Please follow the deviations 

in your project specific connection plan. 

Telephone Line 1 








00 8802 52, 10/12 (Rev. 3.0) 

Page 177

Kontrollanzeigen (LED) D Control LEDs GB 

Die Kontrollanzeigen dienen Tunstall‐Technikern zur differenzierten Analyse von Störungen. 

The control LEDs help Tunstall engineers to analyze faults. 

F: LED flackert (10 Hz) oder LED aus: Störung, LED flickering (10 Hz) or LED OFF: fault 

D: LED ein: Durchsageverstärker eingeschaltet 

D: LED ON: Announcement amplifier ON 









K/S: LED ein: Sprechverbindung eingeschaltet 

K/S: LED ON: Speech connection ON 










Eine detailliertere Auswertung der Leuchtanzeigen ist nur durch Tunstall‐Techniker möglich. 

A more detailed interpretation of the control LEDs is possible for Tunstall engineers only. 

Bedeutung der LEDs für Telefonleitungen 1 - 8: 

Meaning of LEDs for telephone lines 1 - 8: 

1 Linie / Line 

2 

3 

4 

Durchsageverstärker / Announcement amplifier 

Klingelsignal / Ringing signal 

Schleifenspannung / Loop current 

LED 1 leuchtet: Sprechverbindung zwischen Telefonleitung und Rufanlage besteht. 

LED 2: leuchtet nie. 

LED 3 flackert: Es klingelt auf der Telefonleitung. 

LED 4 leuchtet: “Hörer ist abgehoben” auf der Telefonleitung. 

LED 1 is ON: Speech connection between the telephone line and nurse call system. 

LED 2: is always OFF. 

LED 3 flickering: Ringing signal on the telephone line. 

LED 4 is ON: Telephone off-hook. 

Reset‐Taster hinterer PC / Reset button for rear PC 

Kontroll‐LED*) hinterer PC / Control LED*) for rear PC 

Kontroll‐LED*) vorderer PC / Control LED*) for front PC 

Reset‐Taster vorderer PC / Reset button for front PC 

PC 5 

PC 5 

PC 6 

PC 6 

PC 1 

PC 1 

PC 2 

PC 2 

PC 3 

PC 3 

PC 4 

PC 4 

*) Kontroll‐LED: 1sec Rot EIN / 1 sec Rot AUS = PC ok, sonst = PC Störung 

*) Control LED: 1sec Red ON / 1 sec Red OFF = PC ok, otherwise = PC fault 

00 8802 52, 10/12 (Rev. 3.0) 

Page 178


OSYnet‐SafetyController, Best.‐Nr. 77 2100 00 

Sicherheitscontroller zum direkten Anschluss an den Gruppenbus (OSYnet). Parallel 

einsetzbar zum OSY-ControlCenter, pro physikalische Gruppe. Vorgesehen als Redundanz 

zur Aufrechterhaltung der Systemfunktionen bei Ausfall des OSY-ControlCenters. 

Steuerung der Lichtruf-Grundfunktionen für eine physikalische Gruppe (DIN VDE 0834) 

Steuerung von Anzeigen an Zimmerleuchten und Displays 

Selbständige und automatische Umschaltung zwischen Normal- und Sicherheitsbetrieb 

1 potentialfreier Schaltausgang (Wechselkontakt) zur Anzeige der Betriebsart. 

1 potentialfreier Schaltausgang (Wechselkontakt) zur Anzeige von Störungen 

Schaltausgang: intern: 24 VDC/60 mA, extern: 24 VAC/1 A 






Montage 

Montage auf Hutschiene oder Wandmontage im Technikraum der Station. 


OSYnet‐SafetyController 1 auf die Hutschiene 3 aufklipsen, bis er einrastet. 




2. OSYnet‐SafetyController 1 an der Wand festschrauben. 

OSYnet‐SafetyController, order no. 77 2100 00 

Safety controller for direct connection to the group bus (OSYnet). Usable in parallel with 

OSY-ControlCenter, per physical group. Intended use as redundancy for maintaining the 

system operation in case of OSY-ControlCenter fail. 

Controlling the base light call functions of one physical group (DIN VDE 0834) 

Control of room lamps and displays 

Autonomous and automatic switching between normal and safety operation 

1 potential free digital output (change‐over contact) for signalling the operation mode 

1 potential free digital output (change‐over contact) for fault signalling 

Digital output: internal: 24 VDC/60 mA, external: 24 VAC/1 A 





Mounting 

Mounting on supporting rail or wall mounting in the electrical room of the ward. 


Click the OSYnet‐SafetyController 1 onto the supporting rail 3. 



2. Screw the OSYnet‐SafetyController 1 to the wall. 


Adresse einstellen (126, 125) Setting of address (126, 125) 



Am OSYnet‐SafetyController müssen Sie die Adresse 126 einstellen. Wenn Sie in der 

physikalischen Gruppe einen zweiten OSYnet‐SafetyController installieren, müssen Sie an 

diesem die Adresse 125 einstellen. 


Reset 





Kontroll‐LED (rot) 

Leuchtet nicht: 

Langsames Blinken: 

( 1s EIN - 1 s AUS) 

Schnelles Blinken: 

(200 ms EIN - 200 ms AUS) 

OSYnet‐SafetyController 

ohne Spannungsversorgung oder defekt 

OSY‐ControlCenter steuert die Gruppe. 

OSYnet‐SafetyController betriebsbereit (standby) 

OSYnet-SafetyController steuert die Gruppe. 

Länger als 10 s Dauerlicht: OSYnet‐SafetyController nicht betriebsbereit. 



At the OSYnet‐SafetyController you have to set address 126. If you install a second 

OSYnet‐SafetyController in the same physical group, you have to set address 125 at the 

second OSYnet‐SafetyController. 


Reset 

To reset the OSYnet‐SafetyController you have to set code switch 10 to ON for one second, 

then back to OFF. A reset has to be made, if a code switch setting has been changed. Otherwise 

the new setting will not be activated. 

Control LED (red) 

Light OFF: 

Flashing slowly: 

( 1s ON - 1 s OFF) 

Flashing quickly: 

(200 ms ON - 200 ms OFF) 


without power supply or defect 

OSY‐ControlCenter controls the group. 

OSYnet‐SafetyController ready-to-operate (standby) 

OSYnet-SafetyController controls the group. 

Light ON for more than 10 s: OSYnet‐SafetyController not ready to operate. 






und dann den Clip nach oben herausziehen, bis sich der OSYnet‐SafetyController 1 von der 

Hutschiene 3 löst. 


cover on the OSYnet‐SafetyController. (ESD = Electro Static Discharge) 



until the OSYnet‐SafetyController 1 comes loose from the supporting rail 3. 

 



2 

 

Wandmontage 

Wall mounting 

2 

4 

1 

1 

3 

2 2 

58 mm 

4 

ON 

2 2 

4 

1 2 3 4 5 6 

7 

8 9 10 

Kontroll‐LED (rot) 

Control LED (red) 

90 mm 

1 

2 

4 

8 

16 

32 

64 

Adresse 

Address 

Reset 

77 2100 00 


106 mm 

125 

126 



00 8802 39, 10/09 (Rev. 3.0) 

Page 179


Ip Ip OSYnet OSYnet 

0 V 

0 V 

+24 V 


Rev.: 

Ser. No.: 

+24 V 

NF 1a 

NF 1b 

NF 2a 

NF 2b 

DG 

DL 

DH 

DG 

8 

16 

32 

64 

OSYnet-SafetyController 

Order No. / Best.-Nr. 77 2100 00 

1 

2 

4 

Address 

NC 

Test 

Reset 

24V_OUT 1/2 

OUT 1 

C 1 / 2 

OUT 2 

0 V 

24V_OUT 3/4 

OUT 3 

C 3 / 4 

OUT 4 

0 V 

No Function - Keine Funktion 

Ausgang zur Anzeige 

der Betriebsart 

(Wechselkontakt) 

Output for signalling the 

operation mode 

(change‐over contact) 

Ausgang zur Anzeige von 

Störungen 

(Wechselkontakt) 

Output for fault signalling 

(change‐over contact) 

Ausgang zur Anzeige der Betriebsart 

OUT 1 geschlossen & OUT 2 offen = Normalbetrieb 

OUT 1 offen & OUT 2 geschlossen = Sicherheitsbetrieb (SafetyController steuert die Gruppe) 

Jumper OUT 1/2 gesteckt 

= Interne Spannungsversorgung (24V DC, max. 60 mA zur Ansteuerung eines Relais) 

Jumper OUT 1/2 nicht gesteckt = Externe Spannungsversorgung (24V AC oder DC, max. 1 A) 

Ausgang zur Anzeige von Störungen 

Störmeldungen von Gruppenbus-Teilnehmern 

OUT 3 geschlossen & OUT 4 offen = keine Störung 

OUT 3 offen & OUT 4 geschlossen = Störung! 

Jumper OUT 3/4 gesteckt 

= Interne Spannungsversorgung (24V DC, max. 60 mA zur Ansteuerung eines Relais) 

Jumper OUT 3/4 nicht gesteckt = Externe Spannungsversorgung (24V AC oder DC, max. 1 A) 

Output for signalling the operation mode 

OUT 1 closed & OUT 2 open = Normal operation 

OUT 1 open & OUT 2 closed = Safety operation (SafetyController controls the group) 

Jumper OUT 1/2 set = Internal power supply (24V DC, maximum 60 mA for triggering a relay) 

Jumper OUT 1/2 not set = External power supply (24V AC or DC, maximum 1 A) 

Output for fault signalling 

Faults of group bus users 

OUT 3 closed & OUT 4 open = no fault 

OUT 3 open & OUT 4 closed = Fault! 

Jumper OUT 3/4 set = Internal power supply (24V DC, maximum 60 mA for triggering a relay) 

Jumper OUT 3/4 not set = External power supply (24V AC or DC, maximum 1 A) 

00 8802 39, 10/09 (Rev. 3.0) 

Page 180


14.10 Power supply 


77 3400 10 Power supply unit UPS 60 


77 3450 00 Battery set for UPS 60 


Page 181

Power supply unit UPS, Order No. 77 3400 00 

The power supply unit UPS serves as a conventional power supply unit with integrated uninterrupted 

power supply module (UPS) in a common housing. Input voltage of 115 - 230 V AC is transformed into 

24 V DC, and the UPS feature ensures the supply of a connected DC user also in case of a mains 

power failure. 

When in the normal operating mode, i.e. mains power supply, the electronic module monitors the 

output voltage. Starting at a load current level of approx. 12.5 A DC, the output voltage is reduced 

while keeping a constant current load. 

This is a self-correcting output voltage feature, as the output voltage will be reactivated. Further to this, 

the output voltage is protected by a 15 A flat fuse "F2". 

If the mains input voltage fails or when it drops to less than 90 VAC, the two lead batteries in the unit 

will continue to supply the connected user without any interruption. 

To protect the batteries from going flat, circuit breakers will open when during the UPS mode the 

output voltage drops below to 19.5 V. When the mains supply voltage is active again, the system 

reverts to its normal operating mode. 

Roughly every 15 minutes, an integrated test circuitry performs a voltage check at the battery 

terminals, the connections and at the circuit breakers. Upon the return of the mains supply current, the 

battery is isolated from the outputs, and the internal charging module recharges the battery. 

Safety instructions 

• Non-compliance with the safety instruction or improper handling of the unit (e.g. skin 

contact with live components when the unit is open) can be extremely dangerous. 

• The power supply unit UPS should only be installed and operated by qualified 

specialists. 

• Before effecting any work at or with the unit, it must be isolated from any voltage 

(mains or battery). 

• Connection to the mains supply must be executed acc. to the valid national 

regulations (for Germany: VDE 0100 and VDE 0160). 

• Fuse or circuit breaker must be provided for safe isolation from the input (mains) 

current. 

• Overheating of the unit may occur when the values as shown in the technical data 

are exceeded. This may lead to permanent damage to the unit, and system safety is 

jeopardised. 

• Always watch for the safe isolation of AC and DC circuits! 

• Observe the general safety instructions for the handling of batteries! Sufficient 

ventilation must be provided to preclude the development of an explosive hydrogenair 

mixture! 

• If the power supply unit UPS will not be used for a longer time, first the batteries 

have to be fully charged. After that the power supply unit UPS has to be 

disconnected from mains supply and the battery fuse (under the left cover) has to be 

removed. 

1. Mounting 

The power supply unit UPS is designed for wall mounting. Bore holes are prepared at the housing for 

fixing the unit at the wall using the enclosed mounting material. A dimensional drawing is shown on 

the next page. 

Before mounting, check the condition of the wall itself. 

The power supply unit UPS weighs approx. 9 kg. 

The unit must be mounted such that the venting ports are at the top and bottom. 

© Tunstall GmbH, Orkotten 66, 48291 Telgte, Germany, www.tunstall.de, 00 8802 41, Rev. 4.0 (05/2012) English - 1 

Page 182


The selected location must ensure sufficient air circulation above and below the unit. Therefore, check 

for minimum distance of 50 mm to walls, ceiling and other equipment. The venting ports must not be 

covered up. Insufficient air circulation may lead to damage to the power supply unit. 

Dimensional drawing: 

2. Connection 

The internal connection terminals are provided as screw/plug-in clamps. 

2.1 Mains connection 

You have to ensure, that the mains cable is disconnected from the AC supply voltage during the 

following procedure: 

1. Release 4 screws for the left cover and remove the cover to the front. 

Now, the terminal connection clamps are accessible. 

2. Direct the mains cable through the cable duct into the housing and connect to the appropriate 

terminal posts as designated in the unit. 

NOTE: To simplify this process, you may pull the input connector, connect the wires as shown and 

replace the plug in its socket. 

CAUTION ! Check for the correct and positive connection of the protective conductor. 

3. Secure the connecting cable against being pulled from the housing for example by fixing the 

installation cable with cable clamps. 

2.2 Output terminal clamps 24 V DC / 12.5 A 

The output voltage is generated via a primary pulse controller. This controller provides the output 

voltage of 24 V DC with 12.5 A current (for continuous operation considering all tolerance criteria). 


output voltage. When the load current exceeds approx. 12.5 A, the output current is shut off (hicc-up 

mode) until the overload at the output terminal connections has been reduced. 

This is a self-correcting output voltage feature, as the output voltage will be reactivated. Further to this, 

the output voltage is protected by a 15 A flat fuse "F2". 

• The load shall be connected to the terminal clamps "+24V" and "0V" (provided 2 x). 

2.3 Control terminal clamps x + y 

The control terminal clamps "x" and "y" are used to prepare the unit for the uninterrupted power supply 

(UPS mode). 

English - 2 © Tunstall GmbH, Orkotten 66, 48291 Telgte, Germany, www.tunstall.de, 00 8802 41, Rev. 4.0 (05/2012) 

Page 183


2.3.1 Preparing the UPS function by placing a bridge contact between "x" and "y" 

• Connect the control terminal clamps "x" and "y" using the enclosed bridging contact or via a 

potential-free 'make contact'. The current for the bridging contact is approx. 1 mA. 

2.3.2 LED and indicator outputs 1 - 5 

The five indicator outputs 1 – 5 at the 7-pole terminal block indicate the status of the unit via potentialfree 

solenoid contacts. The current load for these contacts is up to 125 V / 1.5 A / 60 VA. 

Illuminated LED Status Output 

voltage 

Switched contacts 

(NO) 

Green „+24 V Power“ Mains mode +24 V DC 3 – 5 

Yellow „Battery active“ Battery mode +19.5 1 ) – 24 V DC 3 – 4 

Yellow „Battery active“ and 

Red „Battery low“ 


for 30 s every 15 minutes 

Battery low - 3 – 2 

Battery defective - 3 – 2 

(for 30 s every 15 min) 

Red „Output Failure Fuse F2“ 

No LED 

Fault F2 

Output fuse F2 was 

removed or it is 

defective. 

Power supply unit 

is off and battery is 

low or UPS function 

is not prepared 

0 V - 

3 – 2 

and 3 – 5 

1 ) When the output voltage has dropped to approx. 19.5 V, the power supply unit will shut off 

(protection against totally flat battery). 

2.3.3 Battery test 

The unit features an automatic battery load test. For this, the internal batteries' status is checked at 

regular intervals (approx. 15 minutes). 

This takes place by voltage measuring while simultaneously demanding a defined load current for a 

period of approx. 30 sec. 

If during this test the battery voltage should drop below approx. 21.5 V, the indicating contact (3 – 2) 

"Battery low" is reversed and this shows that the battery capacity will not sustain a UPS operating 

mode. 

This warning will be indicated for the said test period of approx. 30 sec. or until the battery voltage has 

been increased to approx. 23 V. This may also take place when the battery voltage rises during a 

recharging process after previous discharging, e.g. in the course of UPS operation. 

This warning message is reset after the test phase and will be reactivated again during the next 

battery load test. This is the reason for the cyclic indication of the battery fault as described above. 

The battery load test is an effective instrument for checking the true battery state. A negative result, 

i.e. a warning message is issued, may be caused by one or more of the following : 

• Charge status too low. 

• Battery fuse has failed. 

• Battery not correctly connected. 

• Battery is defective. 

• Battery is too old, and must be replaced. 


Page 184


3. Commissioning 

1. Insert the battery fuse between the batteries in the fuse holder (protection against total discharge 

during storage). 

2. Connect input and output terminal connections (refer to items 2.1 and 2.2). 

3. Switch on the input voltage (115 – 230 Volt). 

From now on, the connected nurse call system devices are supplied with 24 V DC. 

4. The green LED "Power" is on due to the voltage at the terminal clamps. 

If the red LED "Battery low“ is on, the UPS function is not yet active 

(Place the bridging contact x – y). 

5. Now the power supply unit UPS is fully operational. 

4. Shutting the power supply UPS off 

1. Shut off the input voltage (115 – 230 Volt). 

2. Remove the UPS function acc. to item 2.3.1 (Remove the bridging contact), otherwise the load for 

the user circuits will be supplied through the battery until the total discharge circuit disconnects the 

battery. 

5. Service 

To ensure the safe function of the system, batteries should be replaced every 3 years - depending on 

the ambient temperature (Refer to diagram 1, Item 6). After 3 – 5 years, the battery capacity has 

dropped to approx. 60%. 

6. Battery service life 

The power supply unit UPS comes with sealed, service-free and rechargeable led-gel batteries VRLA. 

According to the EUROBAT classification, these batteries have a useful service life of 5 – 7 years. 

This time, however, strongly depends on the relevant ambient temperature. (Up to 20 °C: 7 – 8 years 

as shown in diagram 1) 

If the system will not be used for an extended period of time, the batteries should be fully charged to 

prevent a total discharge. (Refer to item 7 "Storage") After the charging process has been completed 

the power supply unit has to be disconnected from the mains supply and the battery fuse (under the 

left cover) has to be removed. 

Battery service life (years) 

Temperature 

Diagram 1: Battery service life in relation to ambient temperature 


Page 185


6.1 Battery change 

Lead batteries contain harmful toxic substances. Observe general and local safety 

directives when during handling and transport. For disposal, comply with local directives. 

Pb 

Batteries bear the risk of excessive short-circuit currents. Never create any direct contact 

between the battery posts and or other conductive component parts. Therefore remove any 

wristband, watch, finger rings or other metal objects when working at the open power supply 

unit. Always use tools with standard isolating handles. 

Batteries may be replaced only by the same type of battery (2 x 12 V; 7 Ah). We recommend the use 

of the battery type BAT 24-7, Tunstall Order No. 00 0648 85. The use of other makes may create 

problems due to different connecting terminals or differing dimensions. 

1. Shut off mains supply to the power supply unit UPS !!! 

2. Release the 4 fastening screws for the left cover and remove the cover to the front. 

3. Confirm the position of the old battery and after its removal, install the new battery in the 

same manner. 

4. Make sure, the new battery is in the same position and check for the correct battery 

contacts. False connections may damage the power supply UPS ! 

5. Check for the correct seating of the plastic cover for the batteries. 

6. Fix the battery position by securing it with the Velcro tape. 

7. Replace and close the housing. 

8. Perform a functional check of the power supply UPS! 

7. Storage 

If the power supply unit UPS will not be used for an extended period of time, the batteries must first 

be fully recharged to preclude battery damage due to total discharging. (Refer to item 6 Battery 

service life). 

For the charging process, the power supply unit UPS shall be connected to the mains supply for at 

least 4 hours, and the UPS function shall be activated by placing the bridging contact between "x“ and 

"y“. After the charging process has been completed the power supply unit has to be disconnected from 

the mains supply and the battery fuse (under the left cover) has to be removed. 


Spare part 


Rechargeable lead-gel battery, Type BAT 24-7 consisting of 2 batteries 00 0648 85 

Battery fuse, internal 20 A FKS 00 0132 03 

Mains fuse, front plate (5 x 20) T 5.0 A 00 0130 41 

Output fuse, bottom 15 A FKS 00 0132 02 

Clamp for mains connection, 3-pole 00 0211 40 

Clamp for 24 V connection, 4-pole 00 0211 41 

Clamp for control and indicator outputs, 7-pole 00 0211 39 

Bridging contact EB 2 – 5 for control clamps "x“ and "y“ 00 0223 56 


Page 186


9. Technical data 

Power supply unit UPS Order No. 77 3400 00 

Input 

Nominal input voltage 

115 – 230 V AC 

Input voltage range 

90 – 264 V AC 

Input frequency 

47 – 63 Hz 

Input current 

4 A at 115 V AC / 2 A at 230 V AC 

Start-up current surge 

22 A at 115 V AC / 44 A at 230 V AC, typical 

Power factor 

0.95 at 230 V AC / 0.98 at 115 V AC for full load 

Efficiency 

88%, typical 

Output 

Nominal output current 

12.5 A DC 

Output voltage 24 V DC +/- 2% 

Output voltage in battery mode 

26,5 – 19,5 V DC, typical 

Calculated output power 

288 W 

Rippling of nominal output current 

< 100 mV eff 

Battery capacity 

7 Ah 

Charge current 

700 mA, typical 

Bridging time at nominal current 

approx. 17 min. 

Overload protection 

< 14 A 

Overvoltage protection, power supply unit 

Overtemperature protection 

26.7 – 32.4 V DC 

75 °C +/- 5°C (power diode) 

output voltage switched off, automatic re-engaging 

Battery voltage thresholds 

Switching threshold for UPS mode 

U a < 22.5 V, typical 

Switching threshold for warning before battery 

21.5 V, typical 

shut-down 

Switching threshold for total discharge 


protection 

EMC CE-certified EN 55022 Class B; ENV 50204 

EN 61000-3-2, -3; EN 61000-4-2, -3, -4, -5, -6, -8, -11 

Safety EN 60950 

Output 

Safety low voltage, SELV 

Test voltage PRI – SEC 

3 kV 

Protection class 

I 

Protection (safety) IP 20 

Safety devices 

Battery fuse, internal 

20 A FKS 

Charging fuse, internal (5 x 20) 

T 4.0 A 

Mains fusing, front plate (5 x 20) 

T 5.0 A 

Output fusing, bottom of unit 

15 A FKS 

General 

Cooling 

convection, free air flow 

Permissible ambient temperature 0 ... +50 °C 

Storage temperature -25 ... + 60 °C 

MTBF 

100,000 hours (no for batteries) 

Weight 

approx. 9 kg 

Dimensions (HxWxD) 

244 x 325 x 178 mm 

Mounting 

Wall mounting 

Connecting clamps 

Screw / plug-in connections 


Page 187

Power supply unit UPS 60, Order No. 77 3400 10 

The power supply unit UPS 60 is a power supply unit and includes the electronics that builds up an 

uninterrupted power supply (UPS) in combination with battery set for UPS 60 (order no. 77 3450 00). 

Input voltage of 115 - 230 V AC is transformed into 24 V DC output voltage. The UPS feature ensures 

the supply of the connected DC users also in case of a mains power failure. 

If the mains input voltage fails or when it drops to less than 90 VAC, the two connected lead batteries 

will continue to supply the users without any interruption. 

To protect the batteries from going flat, circuit breakers will open when during the UPS mode the 

output voltage drops below to 19.5 V. When the mains supply voltage is active again, the system 

reverts to its normal operating mode. 

Roughly every 15 minutes, an integrated test circuitry performs a voltage check at the battery 

terminals, the connections and at the circuit breakers. Upon the return of the mains supply current, the 

battery is isolated from the outputs, and the internal charging module recharges the battery. 




• The power supply unit UPS 60 should only be installed and commissioned by 

qualified specialists. 






current. 



jeopardised. 




mixture! 

• If the power supply unit UPS 60 will not be used for a longer time, first the batteries 

have to be fully charged. After that the power supply unit UPS 60 has to be 

disconnected from the mains supply. Furthermore the battery connection cable must 

be disconnected from the battery set for UPS 60 (see chapter 2.1). Alternatively the 

battery fuse in the battery set for UPS 60 can be removed. 

1. Mounting 

The power supply unit UPS 60 is designed for wall mounting. Bore holes are prepared at the housing 

for fixing the unit at the wall using the enclosed mounting material. A dimensional drawing is shown on 

the next page. 


The power supply unit UPS 60 weighs approx. 4 kg. 






Page 188



2. Connection 

The internal connection terminals are provided as screw/plug-in clamps and cage clamp/plug-in 

clamps. 

2.1 Mains and battery connection 



1. Release 4 screws for the left cover and remove the cover to the front. 

Now, the terminal connection clamps for the mains connection are accessible. 

2. Direct the mains connecting cable through the right cable duct into the housing and connect to the 

mains terminal posts (3 pole) as designated in the housing. 


3. Secure the mains connecting cable against being pulled from the housing for example by fixing 

the installation cable with the screwed cable gland. 

4. Direct the battery connecting cable through the left smaller cable duct into the housing and 

connect to the battery terminal posts (2 pole) as designated in the housing 

CAUTION ! Check for the correct connection, orientation and locking with srews. 

5. Secure the battery connecting cable against being pulled from the housing for example by fixing 

the installation cable with the screwed cable gland. 




When in mains operation, the electronic module monitors the output voltage. When the load current 

exceeds approx. 12.5 A, the output voltage is reduced with keeping a constant current depending on 

the value of resistance of the connected overload. 

Further to this, the output current is limited by a 15 A flat fuse "F2". After the cause for the overload 

has been eliminated the output voltage reverts to the must value 24 V. It is a self reverting output 

voltage. 



Page 189


2.3 Control terminal clamps x + y 

The control terminal clamps "x" and "y" are used to prepare the unit for the uninterrupted power supply 

(UPS mode). 

2.3.1 Preparing the UPS function by placing a bridge contact between "x" and "y" 

• Connect the control terminal clamps "x" and "y" using the enclosed bridging contact or via a 

potential-free 'make contact'. The current for the bridging contact is approx. 1 mA.. 

2.3.2 LED and indicator outputs 1 - 5 

The five indicator outputs 1 – 5 at the 7-pole terminal block indicate the status of the unit via potentialfree 

relay contacts. The current load for these contacts is up to 125 V / 1.5 A / 60 VA. 

Illuminated LED Status Output 

voltage 

Switched contacts 

(NO) 

Green „+24 V Power“ Mains mode +24 V DC 3 – 5 

Yellow „Battery active“ Battery mode +19.5 1 ) – 24 V DC 3 – 4 

Yellow „Battery active“ and 



for 30 s every 15 minutes 

Battery low - 3 – 2 

Battery defective - 3 – 2 

(for 30 s every 15 min) 

Red „Output Failure Fuse F2“ 

No LED 

Fault F2 

Output fuse F2 was 

removed or it is 

defective. 

Power supply unit 

is off and battery is 

low or UPS function 

is not prepared 

0 V - 

3 – 2 

and 3 – 5 

1 ) When the output voltage has dropped to approx. 19.5 V, the power supply unit will shut off 

(protection against totally flat battery). 

2.3.3 Battery test 

The unit features an automatic battery load test. For this, the connected batteries' status is checked at 

regular intervals (approx. 15 minutes). 

This takes place by voltage measuring while simultaneously demanding a defined load current for a 

period of approx. 30 sec. 

If during this test the battery voltage should drop below approx. 21.5 V, the indicating contact (3 – 2) 

"Battery low" is reversed and this shows that the battery capacity will not sustain a UPS operating 

mode. 

This warning will be indicated for the said test period of approx. 30 sec. or until the battery voltage has 

been increased to approx. 23 V. This may also take place when the battery voltage rises during a 

recharging process after previous discharging, e.g. in the course of UPS operation. 

This warning message is reset after the test phase and will be reactivated again during the next 

battery load test. This is the reason for the cyclic indication of the battery fault as described above. 

The battery load test is an effective instrument for checking the true battery state. A negative result, 

i.e. a warning message is issued, may be caused by one or more of the following : 


Page 190








1. Connect input, output and battery terminal connections (refer to items 2.1 and 2.2). 

2. Switch on the input voltage (115 – 230 Volt). 


3. The green LED "Power" is on due to the voltage at the terminal clamps. 

If the red LED "Battery low“ is on, the UPS function is not yet active 

(Place the bridging contact x – y). 

4. Now the power supply unit UPS is fully operational. 

4. Shutting the power supply UPS 60 off 

1. Shut off the input voltage (115 – 230 Volt). 

2. Remove the UPS function acc. to item 2.3.1 (Remove the bridging contact), otherwise the load for 

the user circuits will be supplied through the battery until the total discharge circuit disconnects the 

battery. 

5. Service 





The batteries connected to the power supply unit UPS 60 are sealed, service-free and rechargeable 

lead-gel batteries VRLA. According to the EUROBAT classification, these batteries have a useful 

service life of 5 – 7 years. This time, however, strongly depends on the relevant ambient temperature. 

(Up to 20 °C: 7 – 8 years as shown in diagram 1) 


prevent a total discharge. (Refer to item 7 "Storage") While the system is not used, the battery fuse 

has to be removed to prevent total discharge. 


Page 191



Temperature 



Lead-gel batteries contain harmful toxic substances. Observe valid safety directives when 

during handling and transport. For disposal, comply with local directives. 

Pb 



wristband, watch, finger rings or other metal objects when working at the open unit. Always 

use tools with standard isolating handles. 


of two batteries type BAT 12-24, Tunstall Order No. 00 0648 87. The use of other makes may create 


1. Shut off mains supply to the power supply unit UPS 60 !!! 

2. Refer to the information for the battery set for UPS 60, order no. 77 3450 00. 

3. Perform a functional check of the power supply UPS 60! 

7. Storage 

If the power supply unit UPS 60 will not be used for an extended period of time, the connected 

batteries must first be fully recharged to preclude battery damage due to total discharging. (Refer to 

item 6 Battery service life). 

• For the charging process, the power supply unit UPS 60 shall be connected to the mains supply 

for at least 4 hours, and the UPS function shall be activated by placing the bridging contact 

between "x“ and "y“. 

• While the power supply unit UPS 60 is not used, the power supply unit UPS 60 must be 

disconnected from the batteries of battery set for UPS 60 to prevent total discharge. 


Page 192



Spare part 


Mains fuse, front plate (5 x 20) T 5.0 A 00 0130 41 

Output fuse, bottom 15 A FKS 00 0132 02 

Clamp for mains connection, 3-pole 00 0211 40 

Clamp for 24 V connection, 4-pole 00 0211 41 

Clamp for control and indicator outputs, 7-pole 00 0211 39 

Clamp for battery connection, 2 pole 00 0211 20 

Bridging contact EB 2 – 5 for control clamps "x“ and "y“ 00 0223 56 


Power supply unit UPS 60 Order No. 77 3400 10 

Input 


115 – 230 V AC 


90 – 264 V AC 


47 – 63 Hz 

Input current 

5.5 A at 115 V AC / 3 A at 230 V AC 



Power factor 

0.95 at 230 V AC / 0.98 at 115 V AC for full load 

Efficiency 

88%, typical 

Output 


12.5 A DC 


Output voltage in battery mode 

26.5 – 19.5 V DC, typical 


288 W 


< 100 mV eff 

Battery capacity to be connected 

24 Ah 

Charge current 

3.0 A, typical 

Bridging time at nominal current 

approx. 1 hour 

Overload protection 

< 14 A 

Overvoltage protection, power supply unit 

26.7 – 32.4 V DC 




Battery voltage thresholds 

Switching threshold for UPS mode 

U a < 22.5 V, typical 

Switching threshold for warning before battery 


shut-down 

Switching threshold for total discharge 


protection 


EN 61000-3-2, -3; EN 61000-4-2, -3, -4, -5, -6, -8, -11 


Output 



3 kV 


I 

Ingress Protection IP 20 

Fuses 

Charging fuse, internal (5 x 20) 

T 4.0 A 

Mains fusing, front plate (5 x 20) 

T 5.0 A 

Output fusing, bottom of unit 

15 A FKS 

General 

Cooling 




MTBF 

100,000 hours 

Weight 

approx. 4 kg 


244 x 325 x 178 mm 

Mounting 

Wall mounting 


Screw / cage clamp plug-in connections 


Page 193

Power supply unit, Order No. 77 3401 00 

The power supply unit generates a 24 V DC output voltage using 115 - 230 V AC mains supply 

voltage. An integrated monitoring circuitry limits the output current to 12.5 A DC nearly. Two LEDs on 

the front face indicate the status at the output clamps. 


1. Mounting 



• The power supply unit should only be installed and operated by qualified specialists. 




current. 





jeopardised. 


The power supply unit is designed for wall mounting. Bore holes are prepared at the housing for fixing 

the unit at the wall using the enclosed mounting material. 

Before mounting, check the condition of the wall itself. (Weight: approx. 2 kg) 

The unit must be mounted such that the venting ports are at the top and bottom. The selected location 

must ensure sufficient air circulation above and below the unit. Therefore, check for minimum distance 

of 50 mm to walls, ceiling and other equipment. The venting ports must not be covered up. Insufficient 

air circulation may lead to damage to the power supply unit. 


Page 194


2. Connection 

The internal connection terminals are provided as screw/plug-in clamps. 

2.1 Mains connection 



1. Release 4 screws of the left cover and remove the cover to the front. 


2. Direct the mains cable through the cable duct into the housing and connect to the appropriate 

terminal posts as designated in the unit. 

NOTE: To simplify this process, you may pull the input connector, connect the wires as shown and 

replace the plug in its socket. 


3. Secure the connecting cable against being pulled from the housing for example by fixing the 

installation cable with cable clamps. 





output voltage. Starting at a load current level of more than approx. 12.5 A DC, the output voltage is 

reduced while keeping a constant current load. 

This is a self-correcting output voltage feature, as the output voltage will be reactivated, if the overload 

current drops below its trigger value of approx. 12.5 A. Further to this, the output voltage is protected 

by a 15 A flat fuse "F2". 


2.3 LEDs at the front face 

2.3.1 Green LED "Power" 

Green LED "Power“ is on. 

24 V voltage is available at the terminal clamps. 

2.3.2 Red LED "Output Failure Fuse F2" 

Red LED "Output Failure Fuse F2" and green 

LED “+24 V Power” are on. 

Output fuse failed or was removed. No voltage is 

available at the output clamps. 

2.4 Indicator clamps (3, 4, 5) 

The clamps 3, 4 and 5 are potential-free switching contacts for indicating the current operating state: 

Contact 3 – 4 closed. 

Green LED "Power“ is off. 

Contact 3 – 5 closed. 

Green LED "Power“ is on. 

No mains supply. No voltage available at the 

output clamps. 

24 V voltage is available at the terminal clamps. 

The indication "No mains power" may have several causes, e.g.: 

• No input voltage at the power supply unit. 

• When the load current exceeds approx. 12.5 A, the output current is reduced until the overload 

situation at the output clamps has been corrected. 

• Output fuse was removed or damaged. (Red LED "Output Failure Fuse F2“ is on) 

• "Mains Fuse F1“ missing or defective. 


Page 195



1. Connect input and output terminal connections. (Refer to items 2.1 and 2.2) 

2. Switch on the input voltage. 


The green LED "Power" is on due to the voltage at the terminal clamps. 


Spare part 


Mains Fuse F1 (5 x 20) T 5,0 A 00 0130 41 

Output fuse F2 FKS 15 A 00 0132 02 

Clamp for input voltage, 3-pole 00 0211 40 

Clamp for 0 V and +24 V, 4-pole 00 0211 41 

Indicator clamp, 7-pole 00 0211 39 


Power supply unit Order No. 77 3401 00 

Input 


115 – 230 V AC 


90 – 264 V AC 


47 – 63 Hz 

Input current 

4 A at 115 V AC / 2 A at 230 V AC 



Power factor 

0.95 at 230 V AC / 0.98 at 115 V AC under full load 

Efficiency 

88%, typical 

Output 


12,5 A DC 



288 W 


< 100 mV eff 

Overload protection, power supply unit, 

< 14 A 

internal 

Overvoltage protection, power supply 

26.7 – 32.4 V DC, typical 

unit 





EN 61000-3-2, -3; EN 61000-4-2, -3, -4, -5, -6, -8, -11 


Output 

Safety low voltage SELV 


3 kV 


Class I 

Protection IP 20 

Safety devices 

Mains Fuse F1 (5 x 20) 

T 5.0 A 

Output fuse F2 FKS 

15 A FKS 

General 

Cooling 

Convection, free airflow 



MTBF 

100,000 hours 

Weight 

approx. 2 kg 


244 x 325 x 178 mm 

Mounting 

Wall mounting 


Screw / plug-in clamps 


Page 196

Battery Set for UPS 60, Order No. 77 3450 00 

The battery set for UPS 60 are rechargeable batteries (= accumulators) that build an uninterrupted 

power supply (UPS) in combination with the power supply unit UPS 60, order no. 77 3400 10. 

If the mains input voltage fails or when it drops to less than 90 VAC, the two lead-gel batteries will 

continue to supply the users connected to the power supply unit UPS 60 without any interruption. 


• The battery set may only be used together with the power supply unit UPS 60, order 

no. 77 3400 10. The safety instructions delivered with this power supply unit have to 

be observed as well. 

• The power supply unit UPS should only be installed and commissioned by qualified 

specialists. 

• Before effecting any work at or with the power supply unit UPS, it must be isolated 

from any input voltage and the battery fuse (located between the batteries) has to be 

removed. 




mixture! 

• If the battery set for UPS 60 will not be used for a longer time, first the batteries have 

to be fully charged. After that the batteries must be disconnected from the mains 

supply. This can be done by disconnecting the battery connection cable from the 

power supply unit UPS 60 (see chapter 2.). Alternatively the battery fuse can be 

removed. 

1. Mounting 

The battery set for UPS 60 is designed for wall mounting. Bore holes are prepared at the housing for 

fixing the unit at the wall – preferably under the power supply unit - using the enclosed mounting 

material. A dimensional drawing is shown on the next page. 


The battery set for UPS 60 weighs approx. 25.2 kg. 






Page 197



2. Connection 

The connection terminals are provided as cage srew/plug-in clamps. 

1. Release 6 fastening screws for the cover and remove the cover to the front. 


2. Direct the connection cable through the cable duct into the power supply unit and connect to the 

appropriate terminal posts as designated in the power supply unit. 

CAUTION! Check for the correct connection, orientation and screwing. 

3. Secure the connection cable against being pulled from the housing for example by fixing the 

installation cable with the screwed cable gland. 

2.1 Battery test 

The power supply unit features an automatic battery load test. The battery load test is an effective 

instrument for checking the true battery state. A negative result, i.e. a warning message is issued, may 

be caused by one or more of the following: 







Page 198


3. Service 





The battery set UPS 60 comes with sealed, service-free and rechargeable lead-gel batteries VRLA. 

According to the EUROBAT classification, these batteries have a useful service life of 5 – 7 years. 

This time, however, strongly depends on the relevant ambient temperature. (Up to 20 °C: 7 – 8 years 

as shown in diagram 1) 


prevent a total discharge. (Refer to item 5 "Storage") While the system is not used, the battery fuse 

(located between the two batteries) has to be removed to prevent total discharge. After the charging 

process has been completed, the battery set for UPS 60 has to be disconnected from the power 

supply unit UPS 60 by disconnecting the battery connection cable (see chapter 2.) or by removing the 

battery fuse. 


Temperature 



Lead-gel batteries contain harmful toxic substances. Observe valid safety directives when 

during handling and transport. For disposal, comply with local directives. 

Pb 



wristband, watch, finger rings or other metal objects when working at the open unit. Always 

use tools with standard isolating handles. 


of the battery type BAT 12-24, Tunstall Order No. 00 0648 87. The use of other makes may create 


1. Shut off mains supply to the power supply unit UPS !!! 

2. Release the 6 fastening screws for the cover and remove the cover to the front. 

3. Confirm the position of the old batteries and after their removal, install the new batteries 

in the same manner. 

4. Make sure, the new batteries are in the same position and check for the correct battery 

contacts. False connections may damage the power supply unit UPS ! 

5. Put the rubber grommets back on the connection screws. 

6. Fix the battery position by securing it with the Velcro tape. 


Page 199


7. Replace and close the housing. 

8. Perform a functional check of the power supply UPS! 

5. Storage 

If the battery set for UPS 60 will not be used for an extended period of time, the batteries must first be 

fully recharged by the power supply unit UPS to preclude battery damage due to total discharging. 

(Refer to item 4 Battery service life). 

• For the charging process, the power supply unit UPS shall be connected to the mains supply for at 

least 4 hours, and the UPS function shall be activated by placing the bridging contact between "x“ 

and "y“. 

• While the system is not used, the battery fuse (located between the two batteries) has to be 

removed to prevent total discharge. 


Spare part 


Rechargeable lead-gel battery, Type BAT 12-24 (2 batteries required) 00 0648 87 

Battery fuse, internal 20 A FKS 00 0132 03 

Clamp for battery connection, 2 pole 00 0211 20 


Battery Set for UPS 60 Order No. 77 3450 00 

Input 


24 V DC 

Output 


12.5 A DC 

Battery capacity 

24 Ah 


Output 



III 

Ingress Protection IP 20 

Fuses 

Battery fuse, internal 

20 A FKS 

General 

Cooling 




Weight 

approx. 25.2 kg 


244 x 450 x 178 mm 

Mounting 

Wall mounting 


Screw / plug-in connections 


Page 200


14.11 Installation 

77 4000 00 OSYnet‐Y‐RepeaterOpto 

77 4001 00 OSYnet‐Gateway 


Page 201


OSYnet-Y-RepeaterOpto, Best.‐Nr. 77 4000 00 

Datenrepeater zur galvanischen Trennung des Gruppenbus (OSYnet). Vorgesehen zur 

Aufteilung und/oder Trennung des Gruppenbus OSYnet in 2 unabhängige Teilstrecken, 

Y-Verteilung. Einsetzbar einmal pro physikalischer Gruppe. 

Direkter Anschluss an den Gruppenbus (OSYnet) und dessen Teilstrecken. 

Hutschienenmontage 35 mm, anreihbar. 


Stromversorgung: 24 V DC (8 ... 30 V DC) 

Stromaufnahme (bei 20 °C): ca. 60 mA 

OSYnet-Y-RepeaterOpto, order no. 77 4000 00 

Data repeater for electrical isolation of the group bus (OSYnet). Intended for branching 

and/or isolation of the group bus OSYnet into 2 autonomous sections, Y-branching. One 

repeater can be used per physical group. 

Direct connection to the group bus (OSYnet) and its branch sections. 

Mounting on top‐hat rail (35 mm), several units can be mounted side‐by‐side. 


Power supply: 24 V DC (8 ... 30 V DC) 

Current consumption (at 20 °C): approx. 60 mA 


120 


120 

Busteilnehmer 

z.B. OSYlink 

3 

OSYnet Teil 3 

bus user 

eg. OSYlink 

3 

OSYnet section 3 

OSYnet Teil 2 


2 

1 

120 



2 

1 

120 

OSYnet Teil 1 


Gruppenbus OSYnet = Teil 2 + Teil 3 + Teil 1 = max. 700 m 



Group bus OSYnet = section 2 + section 3 + section 1 = max. 700 m 


manual. 


OSYnet‐Teilstrecken anschließen 

Zum Schraubanschluss der OSYnet‐Teilstrecken benötigen Sie drei 

OSYnet‐Anschlussstecker , Best.‐Nr. 77 0950 00. 

Der Anschlusspunkt CAN Net 1 ist galvanisch von den anderen Teilen getrennt. Deshalb 

muss die Teilstrecke des OSYnet, die von den anderen galvanisch getrennt werden soll, an 

den Anschlusspunkt CAN Net 1 angeschlossen werden. 

Die PIN‐Belegungen entnehmen Sie der Abbildung A. 

Spannungsversorgung anschließen 

Die Spannungsversorgung oben oder unten am OSYnet‐Y‐RepeaterOpto anschließen 

(Schraubanschluss). 

Achtung! Die Spannungsversorgung darf nicht “durchgeschliffen” werden. D.h. es ist nicht 

erlaubt die eine Seite als 24V‐Eingang und die andere Seite als 24V‐Ausgang zu 

verwenden, um z.B. weitere Geräte zu versorgen. 

Kontroll‐LEDs 

LED leuchtet, wenn alle Baugruppen im OSYnet‐Y‐Repeater 

außer für OSYnet Teil 1 mit Spannung versorgt sind 

LED leuchtet, wenn Baugruppe im OSYnet‐Y‐Repeater 

für OSYnet Teil 1 mit Spannung versorgt ist 

Connection of OSYnet sections 

For screw connection of the OSYnet sections you need three OSYnet connecting plugs, 

order no. 77 0950 00. 

Connection point CAN Net 1 is electrically isolated from the other parts. That's why the 

OSYnet section, that should be electrically isolated from the others, has to be connected to 

connection point CAN Net 1. 

For the pin assignment refer to the figure A. 

Connection of power supply 

Connect the power supply cable to the connection clamp on the top or the bottom of the 

OSYnet‐Y‐RepeaterOpto (screw connection). 

Attention! The power supply may not be connected through. I.e. it is not allowed to use one 

connection clamp as 24 V input and the other connection clamp as 24 V output e.g. for 

supply of further devices. 

Control LEDs 

LED on, if all subassemblies in the OSYnet‐Y‐Repeater 

except for OSYnet section 1 are supplied with power. 

LED on, if subassembly in the OSYnet‐Y‐Repeater 

for OSYnet section 1 is supplied with power. 

keine Funktion 

LED leuchtet bei Datenverkehr OSYnet Teil 3 



no function 

LED on for data traffic OSYnet section 3 



OSYnet Teil 1 


Anschluss an Spannungsversorgung 

Connection to power supply 

0 V 

+24 V 

0 V 


power supply 


control LEDs 

OSYnet Teil 2 


Pin 2: DL 

Pin 3: DG 

1 2 3 4 5 

6 7 8 9 

Connect on the top or the bottom. 

Oben oder unten anschließen. 

+24 V 

0 V 

0 V 

+24 V 

77 4000 00 

0 V 

zu weiteren Verbrauchern 

to further current consumers 


power supply 

OSYnet Teil 3 


77 4000 00 


Pin 7: DH 

Pin 6: DG 

optional 

Externe Klemme 

External connector 

77 4000 00 

Sicherungshalter (00 0130 18) mit 

Sicherungseinsatz (00 0130 17) und 

Feinsicherung 5 x 20 mm, T100mA 

Fuse holder (00 0130 18) with fuse insert 

(00 0130 17) and micro-fuse 5 x 20 mm, 

100 mA/slow-acting (00 0130 45) 

00 8802 50, 10/11 (Rev. 3.0) 

Page 202


OSYnet-Gateway, Best.‐Nr. 77 4001 00 

Aktives Gateway zur galvanischen Trennung des Gruppenbus OSYnet. Vorgesehen zur 

Verlängerung der max. Leitungslänge des Gruppenbus OSYnet um 700 m. Einsetzbar 

einmal pro physikalischer Gruppe. 

Direkter Anschluss an den Gruppenbus (OSYnet) und dessen Teilstrecken 

Hutschienenmontage 35 mm, anreihbar 


Stromversorgung: 24 V DC 

Max. Stromaufnahme (bei 20 °C): 50 mA 



OSYnet-Gateway, order no. 77 4001 00 

Active gateway for electrical isolation of the group bus (OSYnet). Intended for extension of 

the maximum cable length to additional 700 m. One gateway can be used per physical 

group. 

Direct connection to the group bus (OSYnet) and its branch sections 

Mounting on top‐hat rail (35 mm), several units can be mounted side‐by‐side 


Power supply: 24 V DC 

Max. current consumption (at 20 °C): 50 mA 



120 Ω 

120 Ω 

OSYnet Teil 1 = max. 700 m 

OSYnet Teil 2 = max. 700 m 

OSYnet section 1 = max. 700 m 

OSYnet section 2 = max. 700 m 

Gruppenbus OSYnet = Teil 1 + Teil 2 



group bus OSYnet = section 1 + section 2 


manual. 

Anschlüsse 

OSYnet 1 OSYnet 2 

Connections 

OSYnet 1 OSYnet 2 

+24 V 

0 V 

DG 

DH 

DL 

DG 

DH 

DL 

+24 V 

0 V 

DG 

DH 

DL 

DG 

DH 

DL 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 


1 ) Si 200 mA/T 

+24V 

Ip 

0V 

+24V 

Ip 

0V 

OSYnet Teil 1 

120 Ω 2 ) 

Ip = Spannungsversorgung = NYM 2x2,5mm 2 

OSYnet Teil 2 

120 Ω 2 ) 

1 ) Steck-Schraubklemme mit Si-Halter (00 0224 81), Sicherung 0,2 A Träge (00 0130 42) 

2 ) Hinweis! Zwischen den Anschlusspunkten DH und DL von OSYnet 1 sowie zwischen den 

Anschlusspunkten DH und DL von OSYnet 2 muss jeweils ein Abschlusswiderstand 

gesetzt werden (120 Ohm, Bestell‐Nr. 00 0040 76). 


1 ) Fuse 200 mA/T 

+24V 

Ip 

0V 

+24V 

Ip 

0V 

OSYnet section1 

120 Ω 2 ) 


120 Ω 2 ) 

Ip = power supply = NYM 2x2,5mm 2 

1 ) Plug-in screw terminal with fuseholder (00 0224 81), fuse 0,2 A slow-acting (00 0130 42) 

2 ) Note! The connection points DH and DL of OSYnet 1 as well as DH and DL of OSYnet 2 

have to be connected by a terminating resistor (120 Ohm, order no. 00 0040 76) . 

Control LEDs 

Power 

OSYnet 1 Active 

LED leuchtet, wenn OSYnet‐Gateway mit Spannung 

versorgt wird. 


Power 


LED on, if OSYnet‐Gateway is supplied with power. 







Konfigurationsschnittstelle 

nur für Tunstall GmbH 

Do not use! 

Configuration inferface for 

Tunstall GmbH only 


control LEDs 

Anschlussklemmen 


77 4001 00 


00 8802 51, 10/11 (Rev. 3.1) 

Page 203


Page 204

Flamenco Technical Manual Revision 6.0 - Tunstall.de

You also want an ePaper? Increase the reach of your titles

Delete template?

Save as template?